PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class Hindi Book Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 8 Hindi Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

Hindi Guide for Class 8 PSEB माँ का प्यार Textbook Questions and Answers

(क) भाषा – बोध

शब्दार्थ:

शयन कक्ष = सोने का कमरा।
सुसज्जित = सजाया हुआ।
वत्स = पुत्र।
साम्राज्य = अति विशाल राज्य।
चेष्टा = प्रयास, कोशिश।
आन = मर्यादा, इजत।
दूभर = कठिन, मुश्किल।
यवन = विदेशी। पेट की ज्वाला = भूख।
नरेश = राजा।
प्रस्थान = जाना।
घातक = हमला करने वाला।
आभारी = उपकार को मानने वाला।
पटाक्षेप = पर्दे का गिरना।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

II. इन शब्दों और मुहावरों के अर्थ लिखते हुए वाक्यों में प्रयोग करें :

मृत्यु-दंड = ……………….
सत्यवादी = ……………….
कसर न उठा रखना = ……………….
प्राण न्योछावर करना = ……………….
पेट भर अन्न = ……………….
पेट की ज्वाला = ……………….
उज्वल = ……………….
आभारी = ……………….
अगाध = ……………….
हिम्मत न पड़ना = ……………….
जीवन दान = ……………….
आँखें खुलना = ……………….
वीरता कूट-कूटकर भरी होना = ……………….
उत्तर:
मृत्यु दंड = मौत की सज़ा – देश के साथ गद्दारी करने के अपराध में राजा ने अपने ही सैनिक को मृत्यु दंड दे दिया था।
सत्यवादी = सच बोलने वाला – राजा हरिश्चन्द्र को सभी लोग अब भी सत्यवादी कहकर सम्मान देते हैं। ।
कसर न उठा रखना = कोई कमी न रखना – नौकर ने कहा कि वह सबकी सेवा करने में कोई कसर न उठा रखेगा।
प्राण न्योछावर करना = मर जाना – देश के लिए हज़ारों-लाखों युवकों ने अपने प्राण न्योछावर कर दिए थे।
पेट भर अन्न = भूख मिटाने के लिए अनाज – मज़दूर और किसान दिन-रात कठोर परिश्रम करके भी पेट भर अन्न प्राप्त नहीं कर पाते।
पेट की ज्वाला = पेट की भूख-मनुष्य से पेट की आग कौन – सा अपराध नहीं कराती ?
उज्वल = प्रकाशमय – ईश्वर आपको उज्ज्वल भविष्य प्रदान करे।
आभारी = कृतार्थ – मैं आपकी इस दयालुता के लिए आभारी हूँ।
अगाध = अत्यधिक, बहुत – हे भगवान! आपने मुझ पर अपनी अगाध कृपा की है।
हिम्मत न पड़ना = साहस न होना – मुझ में कभी भी इतनी हिम्मत न पड़ती यदि मुझे तुम्हारा सहारा न मिलता।
जीवन दान = जीवन प्रदान करना – भगवान् ने मुझे इस भयंकर दुर्घटना से बचाकर जीवन दान प्रदान किया है।
आँखें खुलना = होश आना – अपने ही रिश्तेदारों के द्वारा की गई बेईमानी को देखकर अनुजा की तो आँखें खुल चुकी हैं।
वीरता कूट-कूट कर भरी होना = शक्ति सम्पन्न होना – चन्द्रगुप्त मौर्य में वीरता कूट-कूट कर भरी हुई थी।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

(ख) विषय – बोध

I. इन प्रश्नों के उत्तर एक या दो वाक्यों में लिखें :

(क) मालव जी कौन था ?
उत्तर:
मालव जी शिवाजी के एक सिपाही का वीर पुत्र था जो दो वर्ष पहले मुगलों से लड़ते हुए मारा जा चुका था।

(ख) वह शिवाजी को क्यों मारना चाहता था ?
उत्तर:
पेट की आग से परेशान और एक यवन के द्वारा दिए गए लालच के कारण वह शिवाजी को मारना चाहता था।

(ग) दिखावटी रोष किसने किया और कब किया ?
उत्तर:
दिखावटी रोष शिवाजी ने किया था जब मालव जी की वीरता, विवशता और साहस को उन्होंने भली-भांति परख लिया था।

(घ) बालक ने कौन-सी प्रतिज्ञा की और क्यों की ?
उत्तर:
बालक ने माँ से मिलकर एक घंटे में वापस आने की प्रतिज्ञा की ताकि शिवाजी उसे मृत्यु दंड दे सकें।

(ङ) मालव जी के चले जाने पर शिवाजी ने तानाजी से क्या कहा ?
उत्तर:
मालव जी के चले जाने के बाद शिवाजी ने तानाजी से कहा था कि वह बहुत वीर, सत्यवादी और साहसी था।

(च) बालक ने अपनी माँ से मृत्यु दंड की बात क्यों नहीं बतायी ?
उत्तर:
बालक ने अपनी माँ को अपने मृत्यु दंड की बात नहीं बताई थी। ऐसा करने पर वह उसे मरने के लिए वापस न भेजती।

(छ) शिवाजी ने बालक को क्षमा क्यों किया ?
उत्तर:
शिवाजी ने बालक को उसकी सत्यवादिता, ईमानदारी, वीरता और भारत माता की सेवा के लिए क्षमा किया था।

(ज) जीवन दान मिलने पर बालक ने शिवाजी को कौन-सा वचन दिया ?
उत्तर:
जीवन दान मिलने पर बालक ने शिवाजी को वचन दिया था कि जब तक उसके शरीर में जान है तब तक वह मातृभूमि की सेवा से कभी पीछे नहीं हटेगा।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

II. ये वाक्य किसने, किससे कहे :

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार 1
उत्तर:
किसने कहा – किससे कहा
(क) मालव जी – शिवाजी
(ख) तानाजी – शिवाजी
(ग) शिवाजी – तानाजी
(घ) शिवाजी – मालव जी
(ङ) तानाजी – शिवाजी
(च) शिवाजी – तानाजी
(छ) मालव जी – शिवाजी
(ज) मालव जी – शिवाजी
(झ) मालव जी – शिवाजी

(ग) व्यावहारिक व्याकरण

I. विपरीतार्थक शब्द लिखें :

अपराध = ………………
दंड = ……………….
मृत्यु = ……………….
झूठ = ……………….
मालिक = ……………….
सौभाग्य = ……………….
कर्तव्य = ……………….
सत्यवादी = ……………….
वीर = ……………….
कृतज्ञ = ……………….
सन्देह = ……………….
आदर = ……………….
उपस्थित = ………………
आशा = ………………
वैरी = ……………….
उत्तर:
अपराध = निरपराध
दंड = पुरस्कार
मृत्यु = जीवन
झूठ = सच
मालिक = सेवक
सौभाग्य = दुर्भाग्य
कर्त्तव्य = अकर्तव्य
सत्यवादी = मिथ्यावादी
वीर = कायर
कृतज्ञ = कृतघ्न
संदेह = निस्सन्देह
आदर = निरादर/अनादर
उपस्थित = अनुपस्थित
आशा = निराशा
वैरी = मित्र

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

II. पर्यायवाची शब्द लिखें :-

तलवार = ……………….
वार = ……………….
मालिक = ……………….
वैरी = ……………….
ज्वाला = ……………….
लालच = ……………….
नरेश = ……………….
जेलखाना = ……………….
माँ = ……………….
माता-पिता = ……………….
संदेह = ……………….
भेद = ……………….
अपराध = ……………….
उत्तर:
तलवार = असि , कृपाण।
वार = आघात , चोट।
मालिक = स्वामी , ईश्वर।
वैरी = रिपु , दुश्मन।
ज्वाला = लपट , लौ।
लालच = तृष्णा , लोभ।
नरेश = राजा , राजन।
जेलखाना = बंदीगृह , कारागार।
माँ = माता , जननी।
माता-पिता = मात-पितु , जन्मदाता।
संदेह = शक , शंका।
भेद = रहस्य , अन्तर।
अपराध = जुर्म , गलती।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

III. नीचे एक और कुछ विशेषण शब्द दिये हैं, दूसरी ओर विशेष्य। उपयुक्त विशेषण के साथ विशेष्य जोड़कर लिखें :

विशेषण – विशेष्य
अगाध साम्राज्य
बड़ा – अवस्था
भयानक – प्राण
समस्त – साहस
दिखावटी – प्रेम
स्वप्न – मराठा
छोटी – कठिन
अपने – भार
इतना – रोष
उत्तर:
विशेषण – विशेष्य
अगाध – प्रेम
भयानक – स्वप्न
दिखावटी – रोष
छोटी – अवस्था
इतना – साहस
बड़ा – कठिन
समस्त – भार
मराठा – साम्राज्य
अपने – प्राण।

IV. समासों का विग्रह करें :

मृत्युदंड = ……………….
कुलभूषण = ……………….
वीर पुत्र = ……………….
महाराज = ……………….
सेनानायक = ……………….
शयनकक्ष = ……………….
प्रेमभरी = ……………….
उत्तर:
मृत्यु दंड = मृत्यु का दंड
कुलभूषण = कुल का भूषण
वीर पुत्र = वीर का पुत्र
महाराज = महान् है जो राजा
सेनानायक = सेना का नायक
शयनकक्ष = शयन का कक्ष
प्रेमभरी = प्रेम से भरी।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

V. सन्धि करें :

वि + आकुल = ……………….
वि + अवहार = ……………….
उत् + ज्वल = ……………….
परि + ईक्षा = ……………….
सम् + सार = ……………….
निः + भय = ……………….
उत्तर
संसार
वि + आकुल = व्याकुल
वि + अवहार = व्यवहार
उत् + ज्वल = उज्ज्वल
परि + ईक्षा = परीक्षा
सम् + सार = संसार
निः + भय = निर्भय।

VI. निम्नलिखित में से प्रत्यय छांटकर अलग लिखें :

वीरता = ……………….
पूजनीय = ……………….
हिन्दुत्व = ……………….
कायरता = ……………….
आभारी = ……………….
उत्तर:
वीरता = ता
पूजनीय = ईय
हिन्दुत्व = त्व
कायरता = ता
आभारी = ई

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Guide माँ का प्यार Important Questions and Answers

बहुविकल्पीय प्रश्न निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखें

प्रश्न 1.
‘माँ का प्यार’ में किस वीर बालक की गाथा प्रस्तुत की गई है ?
(क) ताना जी
(ख) नाना जी
(ग) मालव जी
(घ) मालक जी।
उत्तर:
मालव जी।

प्रश्न 2.
मालव जी हाथ में नंगी तलवार लेकर किसकी हत्या करना चाहते हैं ?
(क) नाना जी की
(ख) शिवाजी की
(ग) यवन की .
(घ) पिता की।
उत्तर:
शिवाजी की।

प्रश्न 3.
मालव जी के पिता किन से लड़ते हुए वीरगति को प्राप्त हुए थे ?
(क) अंग्रेज़ों
(ख) मुग़लों
(ग) तुर्कों
(घ) तुगलकों।
उत्तर:
मुग़लों।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

प्रश्न 4.
शिवाजी ने बालक को क्या दण्ड दिया ?
(क) अर्थदंड
(ख) मृत्युदंड
(ग) आजीवन कारावास
(घ) देश निकाला।
उत्तर:
मृत्युदंड।

प्रश्न 5.
शिवाजी ने बालक को किस कारण क्षमादान दिया ?
(क) उसकी माता के
(ख) उसके पिता की मृत्यु के
(ग) उसकी वीरता के
(घ) उसके क्षमा माँगने के।
उत्तर:
उसकी वीरता के।

प्रश्न 6.
बालक किसकी सेवा करने की प्रतिज्ञा करता है ?
(क) अपनी माता की
(ख) अपने समाज की
(ग) शिवाजी की
(घ) मातृभूमि की।
उत्तर:
मातृभूमि की।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 12 माँ का प्यार

माँ का प्यार Summary

माँ का प्यार एकांकी का सार

शिवाजी अपने कमरे में सो रहे थे। मालव जी नाम का एक बालक अपने हाथ में नंगी तलवार लिए हुए उनका वध करने के लिए आया। जैसे ही उसने शिवाजी पर वार करना चाहा वैसे ही तानाजी ने पीछे से आकर उसका हाथ पकड़ लिया। शिवाजी की नींद खुल चुकी थी। उन्होंने उस बालक से नाम पूछा तो उसने बताया कि वह मालव जी था। वध का प्रयास करने का कारण पूछने पर उसने बताया कि उसके पिता उनकी सेना में सिपाही थे। वे उनकी ओर से मुगलों से लड़ते हुए दो वर्ष पहले मारे गए थे। उनकी रोजी-रोटी का कोई भी और साधन नहीं था। उन्हें पेट-भर अन्न मिलना भी अब कठिन हो गया था। इन्सान सब कुछ सहन कर सकता है लेकिन पेट की आग नहीं। शिवाजी ने उससे पूछा कि यदि उन माँ-बेटे को इतना अधिक कष्ट था तो वे उसके पास सहायता के लिए क्यों नहीं आए थे। उसने उत्तर दिया कि जिस सिपाही ने उनकी सेना में भर्ती होकर उनका नाम उज्ज्वल किया था उसके बाल-बच्चों की देखरेख करना उनका कर्त्तव्य था।

उसने यह भी बताया कि उसे एक यवन ने उनकी हत्या के लिए कुछ इनाम देने का लालच दिया था। शिवाजी उसकी वीरता और निडरता पर मुग्ध हो गए थे। उन्होंने बनावटी क्रोध दिखाते हुए तानाजी से कहा कि उस बालक को जेलखाने में बंद कर दो और कल उसे मृत्यु-दंड दिया जाएगा। मालव जी ने शिवाजी से प्रार्थना की कि वह मरने से पहले एक बार अपनी माँ से मिलना चाहता था। यह शंका प्रकट करने पर कि वह वापस नहीं लौटेगा उसने कहा कि वह वीर पुत्र था और वह माँ के दर्शन करने के पश्चात् एक घंटे बाद अवश्य वहाँ आ जाएगा। शिवाजी ने उसे घर जाकर माँ से मिलकर लौट आने की आज्ञा दे दी। ठीक एक घंटे बाद बालक वापस आ गया। उसने बताया कि उसकी माँ उसकी प्रतीक्षा कर रही थी। उसने उसे अपनी छाती से लगाया। उसने उसे वापस लौटने और मृत्यु दंड भोगने के बारे में उसे नहीं बताया था। मालव जी ने शिवाजी से प्रार्थना की कि वे उसकी माँ की देखरेख का सारा भार अपने ऊपर ले लें। शिवाजी ने यह सुनकर कहा कि वे वीरों का आदर करते हैं। वे अब तक उसकी परीक्षा ले रहे थे। उन्होंने उसके अपराध को क्षमा कर दिया और उसे बताया कि जैसे वह अपनी माँ के लिए चिन्तित था वैसे ही वे भारत माता के लिए चिन्तित थे और उसका दुःख दूर करना चाहते थे। मालव जी ने कहा कि जब तक उसके शरीर में जान है वह मातृभूमि की सेवा से कभी भी पीछे नहीं हटेगा।

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Religion Book Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Religion Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
What is the Sikh way of life?
Or
Discuss in brief but meaningful the salient features of Sikh Rahit Maryada.
Or
Examine critically the Sikh Way of Life.
Or
What is Code of Conduct? Explain in brief the Sikh Code of Conduct.
Or
Discuss in brief the Religious Sikh Way of Life.
Or
Give a brief account of the Sikh Way of Life.
Or
Write about the Sikh Way of Life.
Or
Disccribe the personal life in Sikh Code of Conduct.
Or
What is the Gurmat life? Discuss.
Or
Discribe the salient features of Sikh Way of Life.
Or
Write about the Gursikh Way of Life.
Or
What should be the Sikh Way of Life?
Or
Sikh Rahit Maryada is the source of the Sikh way of life. Discuss.
Answer:
Each conduct of life is based on some or the other philosophy. Like a true Muslim tries to lead his life according to the teachings of Quran and a true Christian leads his life according to the Bible. Though there are several sects among the Hindus, but special sects try to lead their lives according to their religious texts. The Guru Granth Sahib describes the Sikh way of life at several places. In 1699 A.D., when Guru Gobind Singh Ji created the Khalsa Panth at Anandpur Sahib, he proclaimed certain rules which had to be essentially followed by every Khalsa.

These rules are still available to us in the form of Rahitnamas. The Rahitnamas do not present any new ideology. These present a picture of the way of life so described in the Gurbani in brief. The Code of Conduct so prescribed by the Shiromani Gurdwara Prabandhak Committee, Amritsar for a Sikh and that which is authentic is briefly described as follows :

(a) Who is a Sikh?
Any woman or man who believes in the Absolute, the Ten Gurus (from Guru Nanak Dev Ji to Guru Gobind Singh Ji), the Bani and teachings of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji, the Nectar (amrit) of Guru Gobind Singh Ji and disbelieves any other religion is a true Sikh.

(b) Practice of Nam

  1. A Sikh should wake up at dawn, take bath and recite the Name of the Akal Purakh (Parmatma-the Supreme Soul).
  2. Follow the path of Nitnem. The Banis of Nitnem are as follows : Japji Sahib, Jaap Sahib, Anand Sahib, Chaupai and 10 Sawaiyyas. These Banis must be read at dawn.
    Rahiras Sahib—This Bani is read out in the evening.
    Sohela—This Bani must be read out at night before sleeping. It is essential to do the Ardaas at dawn and after Nitnem.
  3. The impact of Gurbani is greater on the Sangat. Hence, it is appropriate for a Sikh that he goes to visit the Gurdwara and enjoys the benefit of listening to the Bani while sitting among the Sangat.
  4. The illumination of the Guru Granth Sahib must take place in the Gurdwara everyday. Ordinarily, the Sukh Asan must take place after the path of Rahiras Sahib.
  5. The Guru Granth Sahib’s illumination should be done respectfully. For the illumination, it is essential that the area is completely clean and there is light above it. The illumination should be done by covering the Manji Sahib with a clean cloth. Matresses (gaddelas) should be used for the Guru Granth Sahib Ji and a rumala should be placed on it. At the time when the Path is not taking place, the Guru Granth Sahib should be covered with a rumala. The chanwar should be used at the time of illumination.
  6. There should be no idol-worship or any custom followed against the Gurmat.
  7. The Ardaas should be recited while taking the Guru Granth Sahib from one place to the other. The person who holds the Guru Granth Sahib on his head should be bare foot. .
  8. The illumination of the Guru Granth Sahib should be done along with the recitation of the Ardaas. The Vaak should be taken at the time of illumination.
  9. When the Guru Granth Sahib is brought, then each Sikh should stand up in respect.
  10. While entering the Gurdwara one should remove one’s shoes and slippers etc. and wash hands as well.
  11. There is no restriction for people of any country, religion, caste etc. for darshan of the Gurdwara but they should not be in possession of things like tobacco etc. that are prohibited in Sikhism.
  12. While sitting among the Sangat there should be no discrimination of Sikh, non-Sikh, caste-creed, high-low etc.
  13. It is against the Gurmat (Sikhism) for any person to sit on the mattresses (gaddela), asana, chair, stool or cot etc. during the illumination of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji or while sitting among the Sangat.
  14. No Sikh should sit with his head uncovered in the Sangat. There is a prohibition on the use of purdah or ghoonghat for the Sikh women.
  15. Every Gurdwara must have the Nishan Sahib at a high position.
  16. There must be a Nagara in the Gurdwara and it should be sounded at the right time.
  17. Only a Sikh can perform Kirtan in the Sangat.
  18. The Kirtan Gurbani should be recited in the form of ragas.
  19. Only a Sikh (man or woman) can sit at the tabya of Guru Granth Sahib at the time of its Diwan.
  20. After the Diwan, the Hukam must be taken.

(c) Code of Conduct of Gursikh
The Code of Conduct of the Sikhs should be according to the Gurmat is as follows :

  1. A Gursikh should not worship any god or goddess other than the Akal Purakh (the Absolute).
  2. A Gursikh should worship the giver of salvation i.e. the ten Guru Sahiban, Guru Granth Sahib and the Bani written in it.
  3. A Gursikh should not believe in caste-creed, untouchability, mantra, shradha, forefathers, pinda, deeva, fasts observed on ekadashi, puranmashi, tilak, idol worship etc.
  4. A Gursikh should not believe in any other religious pilgrimage other than the Guru Ghar.
  5. A Gursikh should pray before Waheguru before starting any work.
  6. It is the duty of every Sikh to enlighten his child about the teachings of Gursikhi.
  7. The Sikhs should not consume bhaang, narcotics, liquor, tobacco etc.
  8. A Gursikh should not indulge in killing a girl child. He should not be even associated with such a person.
  9. A Gursikh should lead a life with honest earning.
  10. A Gurusikh has to keep away from theft, robbery and gambling etc.
  11. A gurusikh has to consider the other’s daughter as one’s own daughter and the other’s wife as one’s own mother.
  12. A Gursikh should abide by the teachings of the Gurus from birth till death.
  13. A Gursikh should greet another Sikh by saying ‘Waheguru Ji ka Khalsa, Waheguru Ji ki Fateh’.
  14. It is not appropriate for the Sikh women to observe purdah or ghoonghat (veil).
  15. On the birth of a child in a Sikh’s house, the family and relatives should go to the Gurdwara to express gratitude towards the Akal Purakh.
  16. The word ‘Singh’ should be attached to the name of a Sikh boy and the word ‘Kaur’ should be attached to the name of a Sikh girl.
  17. The Sikh marriages should be arranged without any thought being given to the caste and gotra.
  18. Sikhs should be married according to ‘Anand’ tradition.
  19. Child marriage is prohibited. While deciding upon the day of marriage, looking for an auspicious day or making a patri is against the Gurmat. Any day can be fixed for the marriage.
  20. Sehra, filling the gharauli, reading chhandas, performing havans, getting prostitutes to dance, consuming liquor is against Gurmat.
  21. The Diwan should be in the presence of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji at the time of marriage. The Kirtan should be performed by the Sangat or ragis. Then the bridegroom and bride should be made to sit in the presence of the Guru Granth Sahib. With the permission of the Sangat, the Ardaas to begin the ‘Anand’ should be offered.
  22. Ordinarily, a Sikh cannot remarry in case his wife is alive and with him.
  23.  At the time of death, a person lying on the cot should not be put down on the ground and no other ritual against the Gurmat should be followed. One should recite the Path of Gurbani or should chant ‘Waheguru’, ‘Waheguru’:
  24. One should not cry or observe mourning at the time of a person’s death.
  25. A person whether minor or old should be cremated.
  26. There should be no superstition followed regarding day or night at the time of cremation.
  27. Deeva, mourning, the custom of pinda, shradha, death of the aged etc. is against the Gurmat. _i;
  28. The Sikhs should pray for the blessings of Waheguru on every occasion of happiness and sorrow like griha pravesh, opening a new shop, sending a child for education etc.
  29. Seva is a special part of Sikhism. Seva is not limited to fanning or serving the langar. A Sikh should render his service to others throughout his life.
  30. Every Sikh should adorn the 5 K’s-Kesh, Kangha, Kachcha, Kara and Kripan.
  31. These four malpractices should not be observed-
    (1) cutting of Kesh
    (2) Eating halal meat
    (3) Adultery
    (4) Consumption of tobacco.
    If any of the above instructions is violated, he shall have to consume the immortal nectar again.
  32. If a Sikh commits a sin pertaining to rahit, he should go to a nearby Gurdwara and accept his mistake in the presence of the Sangat.
  33. Gurmata can be obtained only on questions pertaining to clarification of the early principles of Sikhism. This Gurmata can be passed by only a representative committee appointed by the Guru Panth or by the Sangat.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 2.
“Morality is the key in Sikhism as per Sikh Way of Life.” Discuss.
Or
“Morality is the hase of the Sikh Way of Life.” Elucidate.
Or
According to Sikhism, Moral Life is key of Life.
Or
Explain the special features of Sikh Morality.
Or
Moral Life is the key to Sikh Life. Discuss.
Or
“Morality is the key of Sikhism as per Sikh Way of Life.” Discuss.
Answer:
Code of Conduct of Gursikh
The Code of Conduct of the Sikhs should be according to the Gurmat is as follows :

  1. A Gursikh should not worship any god or goddess other than the Akal Purakh (the Absolute).
  2. A Gursikh should worship the giver of salvation i.e. the ten Guru Sahiban, Guru Granth Sahib and the Bani written in it.
  3. A Gursikh should not believe in caste-creed, untouchability, mantra, shradha, forefathers, pinda, deeva, fasts observed on ekadashi, puranmashi, tilak, idol worship etc.
  4. A Gursikh should not believe in any other religious pilgrimage other than the Guru Ghar.
  5. A Gursikh should pray before Waheguru before starting any work.
  6. It is the duty of every Sikh to enlighten his child about the teachings of Gursikhi.
  7. The Sikhs should not consume bhaang, narcotics, liquor, tobacco etc.
  8. A Gursikh should not indulge in killing a girl child. He should not be even associated with such a person.
  9. A Gursikh should lead a life with honest earning.
  10. A Gurusikh has to keep away from theft, robbery and gambling etc.
  11. A gurusikh has to consider the other’s daughter as one’s own daughter and the other’s wife as one’s own mother.
  12. A Gursikh should abide by the teachings of the Gurus from birth till death.
  13. A Gursikh should greet another Sikh by saying ‘Waheguru Ji ka Khalsa, Waheguru Ji ki Fateh’.
  14. It is not appropriate for the Sikh women to observe purdah or ghoonghat (veil).
  15. On the birth of a child in a Sikh’s house, the family and relatives should go to the Gurdwara to express gratitude towards the Akal Purakh.
  16. The word ‘Singh’ should be attached to the name of a Sikh boy and the word ‘Kaur’ should be attached to the name of a Sikh girl.
  17. The Sikh marriages should be arranged without any thought being given to the caste and gotra.
  18. Sikhs should be married according to ‘Anand’ tradition.
  19. Child marriage is prohibited. While deciding upon the day of marriage, looking for an auspicious day or making a patri is against the Gurmat. Any day can be fixed for the marriage.
  20. Sehra, filling the gharauli, reading chhandas, performing havans, getting prostitutes to dance, consuming liquor is against Gurmat.
  21. The Diwan should be in the presence of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji at the time of marriage. The Kirtan should be performed by the Sangat or ragis. Then the bridegroom and bride should be made to sit in the presence of the Guru Granth Sahib. With the permission of the Sangat, the Ardaas to begin the ‘Anand’ should be offered.
  22. Ordinarily, a Sikh cannot remarry in case his wife is alive and with him.
  23. At the time of death, a person lying on the cot should not be put down on the ground and no other ritual against the Gurmat should be followed. One should recite the Path of Gurbani or should chant ‘Waheguru’, ‘Waheguru’:
  24. One should not cry or observe mourning at the time of a person’s death.
  25. A person whether minor or old should be cremated.
  26. There should be no superstition followed regarding day or night at the time of cremation.
  27. Deeva, mourning, the custom of pinda, shradha, death of the aged etc. is against the Gurmat.
  28. The Sikhs should pray for the blessings of Waheguru on every occasion of happiness and sorrow like griha pravesh, opening a new shop, sending a child for education etc.
  29. Seva is a special part of Sikhism. Seva is not limited to fanning or serving the langar. A Sikh should render his service to others throughout his life.
  30. Every Sikh should adorn the 5 K’s-Kesh, Kangha, Kachcha, Kara and Kripan.
  31. These four malpractices should not be observed-
    (1) cutting of Kesh
    (2) Eating halal meat
    (3) Adultery
    (4) Consumption of tobacco.
    If any of the above instructions is violated, he shall have to consume the immortal nectar again.
  32. If a Sikh commits a sin pertaining to rahit, he should go to a nearby Gurdwara and accept his mistake in the presence of the Sangat.
  33. Gurmata can be obtained only on questions pertaining to clarification of the early principles of Sikhism. This Gurmata can be passed by only a representative committee appointed by the Guru Panth or by the Sangat.

Question 3.
Explain the Mud Mantra. Where is the Mul Mantra placed in the Guru Granth Sahib?
Or
Explain the Sikh doctrine of unity of God while discussing Mul Mantra.
Or
What is meant by Monotheism in Sikhism? Give a brief account of Mul Mantra.
Or
Describe the concept of Akal Purakh (God) in Sikhism.
Or
What is the ‘Mul Mantra’ in Sikhism? Explain.
Answer:
The beginning lines of Japji Sahib of Guru Nanak Dev Ji is called Mul Mantra. Guru Granth Sahib Ji starts with Mul Mantra. These lines are Ik-onkaar Sat-nam Karta Purakh Nirbhau Nirvair Akaal Moorat Ajoonee Saibhang Gur Prasaad. In these, are included the essence of the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Mul Mantra means there is but one God. His name is true. He is the Creator. He is fearless. He is without enmity. He is immortal. He is beyond birth. He is self-illumined. He is realised by the grace of True Guru. A brief decription of the Mula Mantra is as follows :

1. God is One : Gurbani has stressed repeatedly that God is one though he is remembered by many names. According to the Sikh tradition, the letter T which appears in the beginning of the Mul Mantra stands for oneness of God. According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, God is the Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer of the world. No Pir, Paigamber, Avtar, Auliya, Rishi or Muni etc. can stand up to him. They are like beggars in the court of God.

Their position before God can be compared to that of a tiny star before the glaring sun. There are thousands and lakhs of Mohammads, Brahmas, Vishnus, Maheshas, Ramas and Krishanas but God is one. Hence the Gurbani forbids the worship of all the deities except one God. Guru Amar Das Ji says,

Ever remember Him who is contained in all.
Why remember Him who is prone to birth and death.

2. Nirguna and Saguna : God has two forms. He is Nirguna (without attributes) as well as Saguna (with attributes). In the beginning there was darkness all around in the world. There were no earth and heaven or creatures etc. God existed in Himself. This was his Nirguna form. When it pleased God, He created earth, heaven, moon, sun, mountains, lakes, forests, human beings, animals, birds and flowers etc. by His single command (Hukam). Thus He revealed Himself in his creation. This is His Saguna form.

3. Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer : God alone is the Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer of the world. Before the creation of the world, there was utter darkness. There was neither earth nor heavens but only the infinite Order of God (Hukam) prevailed. When it pleased God, He created the world (universe) with a single command. God does not merely create. Having brought the world into being, He watches over it and cares for it. He is also declared to be the Destroyer and Recreator of the world. Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,

The Lord Himself created His own self and assumed Himself the name.
Secondly He made the creation and seated there in, He beholds it with delight.
Thou Thyself act the Donor and Creator and being pleased, thou bestowes and showest mercy.
Thou act the knower of all and thou givest and taketh life with a word.
Aboding within, thou beholdest thy creation with delight.

4. Sovereign : God is sovereign. He is the wielder of absolute authority. Nothing can occur against His will. He doesn’t need anybody’s help nor is He dependent on anybody for His powers. Infact, He is the supporter of everybody. Many instances of His sovereignty are cited in the Gurbani. If He wills, He can make a pauper an emperor and an emperor can be reduced to a beggar. The earth, heaven and all creatures follow His Hukam. In brief, there is nothing which God cannot do.

5. Formless and Omnipresent : God is formless. He has no form or colour. He can not be described in words. He can not be idolised and can not be seen with human eyes. Despite this He is omnipresent. He is present everywhere in water, earth and heaven. He can be seen with only divine eyes. His light is present in everybody. Hence He is near everybody. Do not consider yourself distant from Him. He is omnipresent. Guru Gobind Singh Ji says,

O Lord You are in water, you are on land.
You are in the sea, You are in the rivulet.
You are in the tree, You are in the leaf.
In short, You are present everywhere.

6. Immortal: The universe created by God is unstable and temporary but God is immortal. He is beyond the cycle of birth, death and rebirth. Thousands of Mohammads, Brahmas, Vishnus, Ramas and Krishanas stand in obedience before Him. All of them are mortal whereas God is immortal.

7. Greatness : There is a description of God’s greatness at several places in the Gurbani. He is the eternal giver. He has such a treasury of wealth that it is never depleted even if distributed. He can make anyone immensely wealthy. He can forgive all those who come to him for forgiveness. Thousands of saints and bhagats have sung songs in praise of His greatness yet not a fragment of His greatness could they express. Actually, His greatness can not be described. His greatness, His mercy, His knowledge, His gifts, what He sees and what He hears can not be described. He is the bearer of the knowledge of His own greatness. Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,

Great is thy Glory, for great is thy Name.
Great is thy Glory, for thy Justice is upon thy Truth.
Great is thy Glory, for Eternal is thy Seat.
Great is thy Glory, for Thou knowest over speech.
Great is thy Glory, for Thou Divinest our innermost thoughts.

8. Just : God is just also. Impartial justice is granted in His court without any .. discrimination. In the worldly courts, a man who commits a sin can still go seotfree through corrupt means but nobody is spared in God’s court. He is well aware of the deeds of every man. He does not even need to investigate. Justice is imparted with honesty.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 4.
Remembering Divine Name, Honest Labour and Sharing with the Needy are the basis of the Sikh Way of Life. Discuss.
Or
Throw light on the importance of Kirat Karo, Nam Japo and Wand Chhako.
Or
Following are the necessary elements of life in Sikhism

  1. Remembering Divine Name
  2. Honest Labour
  3. Sharing with Others.

Or
Write notes on the following :
Nam Japna, Kirat Kama, Wand Chhakna.
Answer:
Nam Japna, Kirat Kama and Wand Chhakna are the three basic principles of Sikhism. It would be no exaggeration if they are referred to as the summary of all the teachings of Sikhism. Every Sikh has been inspired to lead his life according to these three principles. A brief description of the meanings of these principles and their importance is as follows:

1. Remembering Divine Name : Remembering the Divine Name or Simran is considered to be the highest form of worship of God. Guru Nanak Dev Ji said that on one hand remembering the Divine Name eradicates all sins of the heart, on the other hand it becomes placid. For this reason, man’s sorrows come to an end. All his fears are dispelled. By remembering the Divine Name, a man’s works are accomplished easily because God himself helps him in all his works.

A person who remembers the Divine Name of God, has a soul that is always gentle and fragrant like a lotus flower. A person who remembers the Divine Name is able to swim across the vicious cycle of transmigration. Without Name, man’s life on this earth is futile. Such a man is always entrapped in all types of sins and the vicious cycle of transmigration. He meets his end in the God’s court in the same manner as a castle of sand in a terrible storm.

The Divine Name of God should be remembered with a pure heart and true devotion. A person who is blessed by the Almighty Himself only can remember the Divine Name. Guru Arjan Sahib says,

Without God’s Name, he who wears and eats is like a dog, who falls in (on) impure leaf plates.
Sans the Name the entire business is futile as the decoration of a corpse.
Forgetting the Name, he, who indulges in revelments has no peace even in dream and his body becomes diseased.
Abandoning Lord’s Name, if man engages in other occupations, the whole of his false gilding would fall off.
About the importance of Nam Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,
By repeating Thy Name, I live, by forgetting It, I die.
Difficult to utter is the True Name.

2. Honest Labour : Kirat means honest labour. Honest labour is extremely important. It is the ordain of the Absolute (Hukam). We observe everyday that every creature earns his livelihood through Kirat. Hence the need for honest labour is extremely essential for man because he is the head of all creatures. Kirat is essential to keep the body healthy that shelters in it the Supreme soul. A person who does not perform honest labour cannot keep his body fit.

Such a person actually performs a sin against the Absolute. Guru Nanak Dev Ji performed Kirat by practising agriculture. He preferred to have the simple, dry chapati at Bhai Lalo’s house at Saidpur to the Brahma Bhoj of Malik Bhago. The reason for this was that Bhai Lalo performed honest labour.

The Sikh is not prohibited from taking up any occupation. He can take up any occupation such as agriculture, trade, service etc. But he is strictly prohibited from earning by means of theft, robbery, dacoity, fraud, bribery and evil. Guru Nanak Dev Ji says, For this wealth many are ruined and it has disgraced many. Without misdeeds it is not amassed, and it departs not with the dead. He, whom the Creator Himself destroys, him, He first deprives of virtue.

3. Sharing with the Needy : Sikhism has greatly emphasised on Wand Chhakna. Wand Chhakna means to share with the needy. Sikhism does not advocate sharing after eating but sharing before eating. It also inspires to treat others as brothers and sisters and to share with them. Only that person is eligible to donate or share with the needy who gives his hard earned income in charity. Sikhism believes in donating Daswandh. It means that one should spend one tenth of one’s income towards the cause of social welfare. Guru Arjan Dev Ji says,

The unique Lord is the Bestower, He is the Giver to all.
In his giving there is no stint.
Numberless are His brimful stores.

Question 5.
Explain the importance of Sangat in Sikhism.
Or
Describe the concept of Sangat in Sikhism.
Answer:
Sangat or Sadh Sangat is crux of Sikhism. The foundation of this institution was laid by Guru Nanak Dev Ji at Kartarpur. Wherever he went, the Sangat was formed there. Sangat implies ‘a congregation of the Guru lovers where they praised God.’ Every woman or man without any discrimination on tjie basis of caste, creed, colour, religion, rich, poor etc. could join it. Explaining about Sangat, Guru Nanak Sahib says, How do we describe the noble company? The place where only one Name is uttered. The utterance of one Name is the order. This is what Satguru has ordained.

The basic principle of Sikhism lies in the belief that the God Himself resides in the Sangat. Thus the life of a person who is a part of the Sangat completely changes. His heart is free from evil impulses of kam (lust), krodh (anger), lobh (greed), moh (attachment) and hankar (pride) and his heart is full of contentment, kindness, religion and honesty and other such divine virtues. Haumai (ego) disappears and enlightenment takes place.

The sins of the greatest of sinners are forgiven in the Sangat. Guru Ramdas Ji says that just as the touch of touchstone converts iron into gold, similarly a sinner becomes pure after joining the Sangat. Guru Ram Das Ji says, As by touch with the touchstone iron turns into gold. So do the downgraded persons become noble with good company.

The Sangal is so powerful that it can make even the lame climb mountains, the foolish can talk like an intellectual, the blind can see Trilok and all the dirt of his heart is removed. All his wishes are fulfilled and he attains Parmanand (supreme happiness). He sees God in each of his creatures. There is nobody he calls his own or a stranger.

He breathes along with everyone. Guru Arjan Dev Ji says, “Since the time I have attained unto the society of the saints, I have altogether forgotten to he jealous of others. No one now is my enemy nor any one a stranger to me and I am the friend of all.”

By joining the Sangat, a man can swim through the ocean of life. The man is free from all illusions. His prolonged disease of Haumai gets cured. By sitting among the Sangat one attains peace and happiness first similiar to the kind that he receives by sitting under a shady tree in the summer season after a long and weary travel. Only those people can join the Sangat on whom God is generous. They have to be kind hearted and humble.

A person who goes to the Sangat with pride (hankar) achieves nothing. In this contest Bhagat Kabir Ji gives the example of sandalwood and bamboo. The whole forest receives the fragrance of sandalwood whereas a bamboo due to its height and hollowness cannot receive it even though it may be close to it.

A person’s birth who does not join the Sangat is futile. He has to suffer a lot. He is always entrapped in the vicious circle of transmigration and keeps wandering in several jonis (life forms). In context of the importance of Sangat, the famous historian Dr. Fauja Singh says, “The Sangat acquired more and more functions as the range of interests of the Sikh movement widened and gradually attained a status even superior to that of the Guru himself.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 6.
Explain the importance of Pangat in Sikhism.
Or
Describe the concept of Pangat in Sikhism.
Answer:
The institution of Pangat has a commendable role to play in the development of Sikhism. Guru Nanak Dev Ji had laid the foundation of this important institution in Kartarpur. Every woman or man without any discrimination on the basis of caste, religion, creed, rich or poor etc. could join the Pangat. Everyone had equal rights to serve. The establishment of the institution of Pangat by Guru Nanak Dev Ji was a revolutionary step. This way the- Shudras were able to serve food to the Brahmans

The object of this institution was to put an end to the caste system which was making our social system hollow. This way he brought the principle of equality into practice. Due to this reason, the feeling of mutual brotherhood among the Sikhs developed. It gave respect to the lower castes which had been oppressed by the higher classes for centuries. The money for this Langar was donated by the Sikhs of the Guru. This helped them develop the habit of donation and charity. Due to the institution of Pangat, the popularity of Sikhism spread far and wide. In context of the importance of Pangat Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,

He alone O’ Nanak knoweth the way Who earneth with the sweat of his brow, and then shareth with others. Guru Angad Dev Ji developed this institution of Pangat further. His wife Bibi Khivi Ji, herself looked after the arrangements of Langar in Khadur Sahib. Guru Amar Das Ji further expanded this institution of Langar. He announced that whoever Wanted to meet him had to first partake the Langar in the Pangat. This was done to end permanently the problem of untouchability among the Sikhs. The Mughal Emperor Akbar and the king of Haripur also had to first partake the Langar in the Pangat before meeting him.

Guru Amar Das Ji was of the view that donating food for the hungry and clothes for the needy was better than thousands of Hawans and Yajnas. u Guru Ram Das Ji continued with this institution of Pangat with full vigour in Ramdaspura (Amritsar). With a view to accumulate wealth for Langar and other important tasks from the Sikhs, he started the Masand System. Guru Aijan Dev Ji asked the Sikhs to give the Daswandh. At that time, his wife Mata Ganga Ji looked after the arrangements of Langar. During that time, the rulers of Mandi, Kullu, Suket, Haripur and Chamba kingdoms along with the Mughal Emperor Akbar received the honour of having the Langar.

Guru Hargobind Ji continued this institution of Pangat. He also started the practice of distribution of Guru’s Langar in the army. Guru Har Rai Ji announced that honour of the institution of common kitchen (Langar) can be maintained only if a weary traveller who arrives late is immediately served Langar. Besides this it was announced that before the Langar began, the nagara had to be blown so that everyone was informed of the invitation to the Langar. This institution of Pangat continued during the time of Guru Harkrishan Ji, Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji and Guru Gobind Singh Ji. This tradition continues even today not only in India but also throughout the world in the Sikh Gurdwaras with full devotion and enthusiasm.

Question 7.
Discuss the importance of ‘Sangat’ and ‘Pangat’ in the Sikh Way of Life.
Or
What is meant by the concept of Sangat and Pangat in Sikhism? Discuss.
Or
Discuss the importance of Sangat and Pangat in Sikh way of Life.
Answer:

Sangat or Sadh Sangat is crux of Sikhism. The foundation of this institution was laid by Guru Nanak Dev Ji at Kartarpur. Wherever he went, the Sangat was formed there. Sangat implies ‘a congregation of the Guru lovers where they praised God.’ Every woman or man without any discrimination on tjie basis of caste, creed, colour, religion, rich, poor etc. could join it. Explaining about Sangat, Guru Nanak Sahib says, How do we describe the noble company? The place where only one Name is uttered. The utterance of one Name is the order. This is what Satguru has ordained.

The basic principle of Sikhism lies in the belief that the God Himself resides in the Sangat. Thus the life of a person who is a part of the Sangat completely changes. His heart is free from evil impulses of kam (lust), krodh (anger), lobh (greed), moh (attachment) and hankar (pride) and his heart is full of contentment, kindness, religion and honesty and other such divine virtues. Haumai (ego) disappears and enlightenment takes place.

The sins of the greatest of sinners are forgiven in the Sangat. Guru Ramdas Ji says that just as the touch of touchstone converts iron into gold, similarly a sinner becomes pure after joining the Sangat. Guru Ram Das Ji says, As by touch with the touchstone iron turns into gold. So do the downgraded persons become noble with good company.

The Sangal is so powerful that it can make even the lame climb mountains, the foolish can talk like an intellectual, the blind can see Trilok and all the dirt of his heart is removed. All his wishes are fulfilled and he attains Parmanand (supreme happiness). He sees God in each of his creatures. There is nobody he calls his own or a stranger.

He breathes along with everyone. Guru Arjan Dev Ji says, “Since the time I have attained unto the society of the saints, I have altogether forgotten to he jealous of others. No one now is my enemy nor any one a stranger to me and I am the friend of all.”

By joining the Sangat, a man can swim through the ocean of life. The man is free from all illusions. His prolonged disease of Haumai gets cured. By sitting among the Sangat one attains peace and happiness first similiar to the kind that he receives by sitting under a shady tree in the summer season after a long and weary travel. Only those people can join the Sangat on whom God is generous. They have to be kind hearted and humble.

A person who goes to the Sangat with pride (hankar) achieves nothing. In this contest Bhagat Kabir Ji gives the example of sandalwood and bamboo. The whole forest receives the fragrance of sandalwood whereas a bamboo due to its height and hollowness cannot receive it even though it may be close to it.

A person’s birth who does not join the Sangat is futile. He has to suffer a lot. He is always entrapped in the vicious circle of transmigration and keeps wandering in several jonis (life forms). In context of the importance of Sangat, the famous historian Dr. Fauja Singh says, “The Sangat acquired more and more functions as the range of interests of the Sikh movement widened and gradually attained a status even superior to that of the Guru himself.”

The institution of Pangat has a commendable role to play in the development of Sikhism. Guru Nanak Dev Ji had laid the foundation of this important institution in Kartarpur. Every woman or man without any discrimination on the basis of caste, religion, creed, rich or poor etc. could join the Pangat. Everyone had equal rights to serve. The establishment of the institution of Pangat by Guru Nanak Dev Ji was a revolutionary step. This way the- Shudras were able to serve food to the Brahmans

The object of this institution was to put an end to the caste system which was making our social system hollow. This way he brought the principle of equality into practice. Due to this reason, the feeling of mutual brotherhood among the Sikhs developed. It gave respect to the lower castes which had been oppressed by the higher classes for centuries. The money for this Langar was donated by the Sikhs of the Guru. This helped them develop the habit of donation and charity. Due to the institution of Pangat, the popularity of Sikhism spread far and wide. In context of the importance of Pangat Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,

He alone O’ Nanak knoweth the way Who earneth with the sweat of his brow, and then shareth with others. Guru Angad Dev Ji developed this institution of Pangat further. His wife Bibi Khivi Ji, herself looked after the arrangements of Langar in Khadur Sahib. Guru Amar Das Ji further expanded this institution of Langar. He announced that whoever Wanted to meet him had to first partake the Langar in the Pangat. This was done to end permanently the problem of untouchability among the Sikhs. The Mughal Emperor Akbar and the king of Haripur also had to first partake the Langar in the Pangat before meeting him.

Guru Amar Das Ji was of the view that donating food for the hungry and clothes for the needy was better than thousands of Hawans and Yajnas. u Guru Ram Das Ji continued with this institution of Pangat with full vigour in Ramdaspura (Amritsar). With a view to accumulate wealth for Langar and other important tasks from the Sikhs, he started the Masand System. Guru Aijan Dev Ji asked the Sikhs to give the Daswandh. At that time, his wife Mata Ganga Ji looked after the arrangements of Langar. During that time, the rulers of Mandi, Kullu, Suket, Haripur and Chamba kingdoms along with the Mughal Emperor Akbar received the honour of having the Langar.

Guru Hargobind Ji continued this institution of Pangat. He also started the practice of distribution of Guru’s Langar in the army. Guru Har Rai Ji announced that honour of the institution of common kitchen (Langar) can be maintained only if a weary traveller who arrives late is immediately served Langar. Besides this it was announced that before the Langar began, the nagara had to be blown so that everyone was informed of the invitation to the Langar. This institution of Pangat continued during the time of Guru Harkrishan Ji, Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji and Guru Gobind Singh Ji. This tradition continues even today not only in India but also throughout the world in the Sikh Gurdwaras with full devotion and enthusiasm.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 8.
Describe the concept of Hukam in Sikhism.
Answer:
Hukam is an important concept of Sikh philosophy. The word Hukam is derived from an Arabic word that means order, commandment or instruction. The Hukam of the Absolute is to be accepted as sweet as has been mentioned at several places in the Gurbani. Hukam implies that supreme commandment due to which the entire universe is conducting itself in a specific manner. Guru Nanak Dev Ji writes in the ‘Japji’ that the entire universe has been created in accordance to the Hukam of God. It is because of the Hukam that a creature receives appreciation or insult.

It is because of the Hukam that they become good or evil and receive joy or sorrow. They can acquire freedom from their sins or remain entrapped in the vicious circle of transmigration because of Hukam. Not a leaf can flutter without his Hukam. Infact it is the Hukam that runs all the natural phenomena of day-night, water-earth, wind-fire, moon-sun, world or beyond the world.

A man’s birth on earth is successful only if he is capable enough of recognising His Hukam. Only that person can recognise Hukam who has given up Haumai (ego) and in whose heart resides the Name of God. Such a person happily accepts all joyous and sordid events as the Hukam of God. Guru Aijan Dev Ji says, ’

As, as is Thy commands, so so does it happen.
Wheresoever Thou Thyself keepest me, there I go and stand.

Blessed is the person who can understand the will of God. He is not worried at all because he knows that whatever happens, happens because of the unchanging will of God. Man has nothing in his hands. Such a man is always contented and peaceful at heart. Guru Amar Das Ji says,

He who lives according to Guru’s will suffers no anguish.
In the will of the Guru lies ambrosia. Through equipoise hardly any one obtains it.

The persons who do not obey the will of God not only experience great suffering in this birth but also remain entrapped within the vicious circle of transmigration. Those who disobey the will of God are punished by the demons of hell. Such persons never get happiness and their birth on this earth is futile. Guru Angad Dev Ji says, How can he be called blind, who is blinded through the Lord’s will? Nanak, it is he, who understands not the Lord’s will, is called blind. Hence the Gurbani instructs the person to give up his Haumai and obey His Hukam because His will is unchanging and so the person who obeys the will of God acquires salvation (Mukti) from this world.

Question 9.
“Ego is a deep rooted disease.” How? What are the means to remove it?
Or
Describe the concept of Ego in Sikhism.
Answer:
The concept of Haumai (ego) has been described again and again in Sikh philosophy. Haumai means ‘Ego’ or T. It is a boundary that separates a creature’s soul from the omnipotent Supreme Soul. It would be no exaggeration to call the Haumai of the individual as a powerful fort of T. Because of Haumai, man can form a world of his own with his thoughts. In it, the Haumai or his ego is very strong. Hence, his world is limited to sons, daughters, brothers, nephews, sisters, brother-in-law, mother, father, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law, husband-wife etc.

and near and distant relatives. If this cord of personal relationships is extended further, then good friends can also be included in one’s personal world. But in the end, this personal world remains confined to personal acquaintances only. It is because of one’s creation of this personal world that gives birth to the feeling of ego in an individual and he considers himself to be the master of this artificial world. Consequently, he loses his true individuality.

Haumai is a chronic disease, that when afflicts a person like cancer is difficult to cure. It is the creator of the five vices-lust, anger, greed, attachment and pride. Such a man tells lies of several kinds, indulges in extravagance and takes the help of several false acts. Consequently it gives rise to the evil. It takes such a frightening form that life turns hell. A man who is filled with Haumai distances himself from the Supreme Soul and remains entrapped in the vicious circle of birth and death. What does a person do under the influence of Haumai? To this, Guru Nanak Dev Ji answers – that deeds of a person are bound by the bondage of Haumai.

He is born, he dies, gives, takes, earns, loses, speaks truth or tells lies, commits sins or performs good deeds under the influences of Haumai and makes his calculations about hell and heaven and measures intelligence and foolishness in the balance of Haumai. It is because of Haumai that a person does not identify the meaning of salvation. If he identifies Haumai, then he can see the gate of God. Man fights because of his ignorance. Accounts are written according to Karma. One receives the fruit of the kind of deeds that he performs. Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,

In pride man comes, in pride he departs.
In pride he is horn, in pride he dies.
In pride he gives, in pride he takes.
In pride he earns, in pride he loses.
In pride he becomes true or false.
In pride he reflects on virtue or vice.
In pride he falls in hell or heaven.
In pride he laughs, in pride he weeps.
In pride he is soiled, in pride he is washed off.
In pride, he loses his caste and kind.
In pride, he is ignorant, in pride he is wise.
He knows not the worth of salvation and emancipation.
In pride he loves mammon and in pride he is shadowed by it.
By taking pride the beings are created.
If ego is stilled, then is the God’s gate seen.
Without divine knowledge man prattles, prattles and wrangles.
Nanak, by Lord’s order the destiny is recorded.
As men see Themselves, so God does see Them.

Because of Haumai, a man’s good deeds are destroyed consequently, his soul is distressed. A man realises this when he grows old. A man loses all his senses by that time. Those whom he considers his own near and dear ones and with the support of whom he commits several sins, those whom he obliges several times in his life time also turn their backs on him. Consequently, the person is deeply hurt and laments on his ill-deeds. But now he is no longer capable of doing anything and he sees darkness all around him.

Undoubtedly, Haumai is a chronic disease but cannot be considered incurable. To get rid of Haumai one must be essentially able to understand it. He can attain freedom from Haumai by joining the Sangat, jap, introspection, adopting self sacrifice, service to humanity, sacrificing jealously, loving the truth etc. Guru Angad Sahib says, Ego is a chronic disease, but it has also its curing medicine.

If the Lord bestows His grace, then man acts according to Guru’s instruction (And this is the cure for ago).
Says Nanak, hear, O ye people, in this way the trouble departs.

If there is Haumai present in an individual, he cannot understand the importance of ‘Nam’ and he cannot become a devotee. The two cannot exist together. In context of Haumai Guru Amar Das Ji says,
Ego is at variance with the Name : the two dwell not in one place.
In ego, service cannot be performed, so the soul goes empty-handed.
O my soul, meditate thou on God and practise thou the Guru’s word.
If thou obey God’s order, then
Shalt thou meet Him and then alone, ego shall depart from within thee. Pause.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 10.
Describe the importance of Simran in Sikhism.
Or
What is meant by Simran? What are its benefits?
Or
Write a note on the concept of Nam in Sikhism.
Answer:
Simran or Nam is a major principle of Sikh philosophy. The Guru Granth Sahib gives a description of the qualities of Nam at several places. It is considered to be the best means of the attainment of God. There is no’ definition of Nam because it is endless, boundless, unfathomable and invaluable. The five enemies of man namely lust, anger, greed, attachment and pride give birth to several negative interests in his personality.

They render a man lose perspective of his true objective and keep him engrossed in luxury, taste and indulgence. With time, man’s enthusiasm for these interests declines. Hence they are called medium for the spread of what is untrue. But these five enemies produce such a fire within a man that destroys him altogether. In this way, his coming into this world is proved to be futile. Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,

The false one loves what is false and forgets the Creator.
With whom should I contract friendship, the whole world is to
pass away.

With the recitation of Nam, the ill feelings of the heart are eradicated on one hand and on the other the heart is rendered gentle and pure. Hence, man’s physical problems are also removed. In fact, with the recitation of Nam, man reaches such a high level where he loses all attachment with the world and physical hunger. With the recitation of Nam, the dirt of the evils in the heart of several births gets removed. All the sorrows of man are destroyed. All his illusions are destroyed. The veil of maya on the soul is removed and it emerges in its pristine form. Hence, the Gurbani stresses on sacrifice of cleverness by each individual and resort to the recitation of God’s name. Guru Arjan Dev Ji says,

By Lord’s meditation, man enters not the womb.
By Lord’s meditation, the torture of death flees.
By Lord’s meditation, death is removed.
By Lord’s meditation, the enemy keeps away.
By remembering the Lord no obstacle is met.
By Lord’s meditation, man remains watchful night and day.
By Lord’s meditation, fear overtakes not.
By Lord’s meditation, sorrow troubles not.
Lord’s meditation is attained in the Saints’ society.
AH the wealth, O Nanak, are in God’s love.

A person who recites the name of God is never a burden on anybody. All his works keep getting accomplished on their own because God renders his help in all his works. The soul of such a person remains pure like a lotus ’flower. Such a creature is able to swim across the ocean of this world of illusion and also escape the circle of transmigration. Such persons go the abode of the Almighty with a bright face. Guru Nanak Sahib says,

God cannot be installed nor He can be created.
The immaculate God is self-existent.
Those who contemplate Him, obtain true honour.
O Nanak ! Sing the praises of true God, who is treasury of attributes
Sing and hear His praise and keep love for Him in heart.
Taking away their sorrow, He grants them entry into the House- of Bliss.

The Nam of God can be recited by a person only if he is blessed by God Himself. To’ recite Nam it is essential to keep the heart in control, remove Haumai and adopt virtues like humility and service etc. Hence, the recitation of Nam has been often, referred to as Way of Life in Gurbani.

A man’s life is a curse without the recitation of Nam. Such a person talks nonsensical things like a donkey. He has to suffer great difficulties. He goes to hell after death. He has to face the beating of the messengers of Yama. Their faces look terrified. Such a low person’s birth in this world is futile. Farid Ji says,

Farid, dreadful are the faces of those who forget the Lord’s Name.
Here, they undergo many troubles and, hereafter, find no abode and refuge.

Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji says that after several cycles of transmigration a person; receives the birth of a human being. When in this birth, man receives a chance to meet the Supreme Soul, then why do people not recite His Nam? Guru Tegh Bahadur, Sahib aptly says, –

If thou hast not sung the praises of the World-Lord, thou hast wasted thy life in vain. .
Says Nanak, meditate thou on God, O man, like the way, the fish: loves water. .
Why art thou engrossed in the deadly sins and becomest not detached even for a moment?
Says Nanak, contemplate thou thy God, O man, that death’s noose may fall on thee not. ’
Thy youth has passed away in vain and oldage has overcome thy body.
Says Nanak, dwell thou on thy God, O man, thy life is fleeting away. ”

Question 11.
What is the importance of ‘Guru’ in Sikhism? Explain.
Answer:
A Guru has great importance in Sikhism. The power of a true Guru knows no bounds. He can give a lame the strength to climb the mountains. He can make the. blind see Trilok. He can give an ant the strength of an elephant. He can render a highly proud person great humility. He can render a poor rich and a millionaire bankrupt. He can give life to the dead and make the drowning stones rise and swim implying that he changes the impossible into possible.

Guru provides support to the helpless, is the guardian of the orphans and is always by our side. He takes a man from darkness towards light. Without him, the darkness prevalent in this world cannot be eradicated by the brightness of several moons and thousands of suns. Guru Angad Dev Ji says,

If hundred moons arise and a thousand suns appear, even with
such light, there would be pitch darkness without the Guru.

Like touchstone the touch of the Guru can enrich a man with divine virtues. By reciting the name of the Guru, poison can turn into Nectar. He can in at instant eradicate the malice in a person’s heart that has accumulated over several births. His meeting with the God gives rise to happiness in his life and he is able to develop self control over his heart. All his works are accomplished automatically. Guru Arjan Dev Ji says,

If the True Guru casts His merciful glance, I enjoy the happinesses of lakhs of empires.
Were he to bless me with His Name even for a trice, my soul and body will become cool.

Sikhism does not believe in a Guru with form because he cannot be the all in one. God Himself is the true Crura. Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,
God Himself is the Creator
Lord, who of Himself creating the creatures, assays them.
He Himself is the True Guru, Himself the attendant and Himself creates the world.

A true Guru is a person in front of whom both backbiting and appreciation are the same. His heart is a storehouse of the knowledge about the Absolute. In fact, he is the master of all the powers of the Almighty. So elevated is he at the spiritual level that it knows no bounds. In fact, a true Guru is a master of all the virtues possessed by God. For this reason, meeting a true Guru can turn around the life of a person. Guru Amar Das Ji aptly says,

When the True Guru becomes merciful, desire is fulfilled then. When the True Guru becomes merciful, man grieves not ever. When the True Guru becomes merciful, man knows no pain then. When the True Guru becomes merciful then man enjoys God’s love. When the True Guru becomes merciful, then what fear has man of death?

Another virtue of a true Guru is that he never lets himself be worshipped because he is not greedy. He knows no enemy. Friends and enemies are alike for him. Even if critic of his, comes to his shelter, he forgives him. Besides this, he does not wish evil for anyone. Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,
Nanak, deem that such is the True Guru who unites all with the Lord.
Meeting an ignorant Guru serves no purpose in life. Because, he himself is lost in the darkness of ignorance. Meeting a true Guru is possible only if one is blessed by God Himself. He can be known by Sabad.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 12.
Discuss the concept of ‘Kirtan’ in Sikhism.
Answer:
The Kirtan holds an important position in Sikhism. It is considered to be the highest means of attainment of spiritualism. In almost all the traditions of Sikhism, Kirtan is performed. Kirtan means that form of singing in which there is praise of the Akal Purakh. Singing the Gurbani according to ragas is called Kirtan.

It was Guru Nanak Dev Ji who started the practice of Kirtan in Sikhism. He was accompanied by Bhai Mardana Ji who throughout his travels used to play the Rabab at the time of Kirtan. While performing the Kirtan Guru Nanak Dev Ji had a magical impact on the hearts of his devotees. Consequently, not only the ordinary men but also stone-hearted persons like Sajjan Thug, Kauda Rakshasa, the witch Nurshahi, Hamza Gauss and Wali Kandhari could not help getting influenced by him and became his disciples. The remaining Gurus continued the tradition of Kirtan. With a view to arouse Veer Rasa in the Kirtan, Guru Hargobind Sahib started the tradition of Dhadhi.

Kirtan performed with a sense of love and devotion influences a man’s soul to the core. This awakens the dead souls of people and renders them free of all sufferings and cleanses his heart of all evil. He remains engrossed in recitation of Nam. It humbles a person’s hejurt. His soul feels devoted and happy and his life emerges out to be successful. For this reason, Kirtan has often been referred to as invaluable. Guru Arjan Sahib says,

All the Guru’s door one hears the God’s praise.
Meeting with the True Guru, one Utters the Lord’s praise with his mouth. ‘
Sorrows and strifes the True Guru effaces and blesses one with honour in the Lord’s court. ’

The honour of performing or listening to the Kirtan goes to those who are blessed by God. Without his blessings, neither man can acquire freedom and nor can be free himself from worldly activities and even though he manages to participate and join in the Kirtan, he is not able to concentrate with his mind and soul. Kirtan helps a man to remove all his illusions. Guru Arjan Dev Ji says,
Hymning the God’s praise day and night, the mortal is not cast into the womb again.

Question 13.
Discuss the role of Seva in the Sikh Way of Life.
Or
Discuss the importance of ‘Seva’ in Sikhism.
Answer:
Special importance has been given to Seva in Sikh philosophy. There is no doubt that there has been a glorious description about Seva in every religion but the importance that has been given to it in Sikhism is far greater than any other religion. Seva does not simply mean going to the Gurdwara and cleaning shoes, brooming, fanning the Sangat, serving water, Langar etc., because this type of Seva gives rise to Haumai. Seva means such activity that benefits humanity at large. Seva is actually devotion of higher order. It can prove to be fruitful only when it is performed without any selfish motive.

A man can not receive the privilege of performing Seva till he removes the feeling of Haumai. The interest for performing Seva does not arise in the heart of every individual. It needs character of high order to be able to perform Seva. It requires a person to surrender himself completely before God by sacrificing his Haumai. In context of Seva, Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,

He alone performs Thy service, O Lord, whom Thou yokest therewith.
Without the Lord’s service, no one attains unto Him, In duality and doubt, men are ruined.

There are several instances in Sikh history which make it quite evident that a person who performed Seva became the master of Guru Ghar whereas a person who was afflicted by Haumai did not obtain anything. Bhai Lehna Ji who tirelessly served Guru Nanak Dev Ji received the honour of being Guru Angad. Amar Das Ji though quite old in age served Gilru Angad Dev Ji so devotedly not only received the Gurgaddi but was also honoured by being called “Nithawiyaan Di Thaan’ (meaning the support to those who are helpless). On the other hand, Srichand, Datu and Dasu, Prithi Chand etc. though were the sons of Guru Sahibaan, yet they were deprived of the Gurgaddi due to lack of Seva. Guru Arjan Dev Ji says,

The disciple who lives under the guardianship of Guru;
He should accept Guru’s guidance with his heart.
He should consider himself worth nothing.
He should meditate the Divine Name with his heart.
He should sell out his mind to the True Guru.
Then all objectives of such a devotee will be fulfilled.
He, who serves without seeking any compensation;
He alone finds union with God.

Service to humanity is considered to be the highest form of Seva. In this context, the example of Bhai Kanhaiya Ji can be cited. He performed the service of giving water to the injured soldiers of the enemy and provided medical aid to them without any discrimination in the first battle of Anandpur Sahib fought during the time of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. On being asked, he said he could see the image (reflection) of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in every individual. This service performed by Bhai Kanhaiya Ji with the true devotion acts like a Pole Star for the Sikhs even today.

According to the Gurmat, Seva is a continuous part of Sikh life. It is not a matter of one or two days but has to be continued till the last breath. Seva can be performed
by those individuals who are blessed by God Himself and in whom resides true Nam. Those who resort to lies, forgery and sin can not perform the Seva. True Seva is considered to be the source of all happiness. A person who performs this kind of Seva receives adulation on both earth and heavens above.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 14.
Write brief notes on the following principles of Sikh Way of Life.

  1. Haumai (Ego),
  2. Seva (Service)
  3. Jat-Pat (Caste).

Answer:
(1) Haumai: There is repeatedly an explanation about Haumai (ego) in Sikh philosophy. Haumai means ‘pride’ or T. It is such a boundary which aloofs the creature’s soul from the omnipresent God. If we refer to the Haumai as a powerful fort of ego of an individual, it would be no exaggeration. Haumai is a chronic disease which like cancer is difficult to cure once it takes root. It gives rise to five vices of the heart and soul that are lust, anger, greed, attachment and hypocrisy. Consequently the evil is bom. It assumes such a terrifying shape that one’s life turns hell. A life filled with Haumai gets distanced from the Supreme Soul and is never able to escape the circle of transmigration.

Undoubtedly, Haumai is a chronic disease that is not incurable. To achieve freedom from Haumai, it becoiqes extremely essential to first understand it. Participating in Sangat, jap, introspection, detachment, developing a sense of service, sacrificing jealousy and love for truth etc. are the means by which one can acquire freedom from Haumai.

(2) Seva : Special importance has been given tcrSeva in Sikh philosophy. There is no doubt that there has been a glorious description about Seva in every religion but the importance that has been given to it in Sikhism is far greater than any other religion. Seva is actually devotion of high order. It can prove to be fruitful only when it is performed without any selfish motive. A man doesn’t receive the privilege of performing Seva till he removes the feeling of Haumai. The interest for performing Seva does not arise in the heart of every individual.

It needs character of high order to be able to perform Seva. It requires a person to surrender himself completely before God by sacrificing his Haumai. There are several instances in Sikh history which make it quite evident that a person who performed Seva became the master of Guru Ghar whereas a person afflicted by Haumai did not obtain anything.

Service to humanity is considered to be the highest form of Seva. In this context, the example of Bhai Kanhaiya Ji can be cited. He performed the service of giving water to the injured soldiers of the enemy and provided them medical aid without any discrimination in the first battle of Anandpur Sahib fought during Guru Gobind Singh’s Ji’s time. On being asked, he said that he could see the reflection of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in each individual. This service performed by Bhai Kanhaiya Ji with true devotion acts like a Pole Star for the Sikhs even today. Seva is an indispensable part of a Sikh’s life according to Sikhism. It continues not for a day or two but till the end of one’s life. Seva can be performed by only those individuals who are blessed by God Himself.

(3) Caste : During Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s time, Hindu society was not only divided into four major castes—Brahman, Kshatriya, Vaishya and’ Shudra—but also divided into several sub-castes. The people belonging to higher castes took great pride in themselves and looked down upon the people of lower caste and inflicted great atrocities on them. Untouchability was quite prevalent in society. Guru Nanak Dev Ji vehemently opposed the caste system and untouchability. Guru Sahib said that in God’s court there is no question of caste-creed but a calculation of ones Karmas only.

Guru Sahib initiated the practices of ‘Sangat’ and ‘Pangat’ to provide a severe jolt to caste system. In this manner, Guru Nanak Sahib propagated a feeling of mutual brotherhood. All the Guru Sahibs who succeeded Guru Nanak Dev Ji vehemently opposed the caste system. Guru Arjan Sahib contributed significantly towards eradication of casteism by incorporating the Bani of people belonging to the lower castes in the Adi Granth Sahib as did Guru Gobind Singh Ji by founding Khalsa Panth.

Question 15.
Write a note” on the following :

  1. Haumai
  2. Guru
  3. Jap
  4. Seva.

Answer:
1. Haumai : There is repeatedly an explanation about Haumai (ego) in Sikh philosophy. Haumai means ‘pride’ or T. It is such a boundary which aloofs the creature’s soul from the omnipresent God. If we refer to the Haumai as a powerful fort of ego of an individual, it would be no exaggeration. Haumai is a chronic disease which like cancer is difficult to cure once it takes root. It gives rise to five vices of the heart and soul that are lust, anger, greed, attachment and hypocrisy. Consequently the evil is bom. It assumes such a terrifying shape that one’s life turns hell. A life filled with Haumai gets distanced from the Supreme Soul and is never able to escape the circle of transmigration.

2. Guru : Guru has an important place in Sikh philosophy. Sikh Gurus consider the Guru extremely important to reach the Almighty. According to them, Guru is the true ladder to attain salvation. Without the Guru, man can see darkness all around. It is the Guru who helps an individual to move from darkness (ignorance) to light (enlightenment). A Guru helps a person to cure his diseases- of attachment to maya and Haumai. It is he who describes the method of treading on the path of devotion by the recitation of Nam and Sabad.

A Guru is not possible without feelings of devotion and knowledge. A Guru can make the impossible possible and it can transform a person’s lifestyle completely. Meeting a true Guru is not an easy task. Without the blessings of God himself one can obtain a true Guru. Here, it is worth mentioning that when Guru Nanak Dev Ji talks about the Guru, he does not mean a Guru in human form. A true Guru is God himself who provides his teachings by means of Sabad. Guru Nanak Sahib says,

Without the true Guru none has obtained the Lord; without the True Guru, none has obtained the Lord.
In the True Guru, the Lord has placed Himself, and I openly declare and proclaim it.
Salvation is obtained for aye, by meeting the True Guru, who has banished worldly attachment from within him.
The excellent idea (theme) is this that one attaches one’s mind to the True Lord.
Like this, one attains the Beneficient Lord, the Life of the world. Slok 1st Guru.

3. Jap : Remembering the Divine Name or Simran is considered to be the highest form of worship of God. Guru Nanak Dev Ji said that on one hand remembering the Divine Name eradicates all sins of the heart, on the other hand it becomes placid. For this reason, man’s sorrows come to an end. All his fears are dispelled. By remembering the Divine Name, a man’s works are accomplished easily because God himself helps him in all his works.

A person who remembers the Divine Name of God, has a soul that is always gentle and fragrant like a lotus flower. A person who remembers the Divine Name is able to swim across the vicious cycle of transmigration. Without Name, man’s life on this earth is futile. Such a man is always entrapped in all types of sins and the vicious cycle of transmigration. He meets his end in the God’s court in the same manner as a castle of sand in a terrible storm.

The Divine Name of God should be remembered with a pure heart and true devotion. A person who is blessed by the Almighty Himself only can remember the Divine Name. Guru Arjan Sahib says,

Without God’s Name, he who wears and eats is like a dog, who falls in (on) impure leaf plates.
Sans the Name the entire business is futile as the decoration of a corpse.
Forgetting the Name, he, who indulges in revelments has no peace even in dream and his body becomes diseased.
Abandoning Lord’s Name, if man engages in other occupations, the whole of his false gilding would fall off.
About the importance of Nam Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,
By repeating Thy Name, I live, by forgetting It, I die.
Difficult to utter is the True Name.

4. Seva : Special importance has been given tcrSeva in Sikh philosophy. There is no doubt that there has been a glorious description about Seva in every religion but the importance that has been given to it in Sikhism is far greater than any other religion. Seva is actually devotion of high order. It can prove to be fruitful only when it is performed without any selfish motive. A man doesn’t receive the privilege of performing Seva till he removes the feeling of Haumai. The interest for performing Seva does not arise in the heart of every individual.

Question 16.
Write about the following concepts :

  1. Haumai
  2. Seva (Service)
  3. Guru

Answer:
(1) Haumai : There is repeatedly an explanation about Haumai (ego) in Sikh philosophy. Haumai means ‘pride’ or T. It is such a boundary which aloofs the creature’s soul from the omnipresent God. If we refer to the Haumai as a powerful fort of ego of an individual, it would be no exaggeration. Haumai is a chronic disease which like cancer is difficult to cure once it takes root. It gives rise to five vices of the heart and soul that are lust, anger, greed, attachment and hypocrisy. Consequently the evil is bom. It assumes such a terrifying shape that one’s life turns hell. A life filled with Haumai gets distanced from the Supreme Soul and is never able to escape the circle of transmigration.

(2) Seva : Special importance has been given tcrSeva in Sikh philosophy. There is no doubt that there has been a glorious description about Seva in every religion but the importance that has been given to it in Sikhism is far greater than any other religion. Seva is actually devotion of high order. It can prove to be fruitful only when it is performed without any selfish motive. A man doesn’t receive the privilege of performing Seva till he removes the feeling of Haumai. The interest for performing Seva does not arise in the heart of every individual.

(3) Guru : Guru has an important place in Sikh philosophy. Sikh Gurus consider the Guru extremely important to reach the Almighty. According to them, Guru is the true ladder to attain salvation. Without the Guru, man can see darkness all around. It is the Guru who helps an individual to move from darkness (ignorance) to light (enlightenment). A Guru helps a person to cure his diseases- of attachment to maya and Haumai. It is he who describes the method of treading on the path of devotion by the recitation of Nam and Sabad. A Guru is not possible without feelings of devotion and knowledge. A Guru can make the impossible possible and it can transform a person’s lifestyle completely.

Meeting a true Guru is not an easy task. Without the blessings of God himself one can obtain a true Guru. Here, it is worth mentioning that when Guru Nanak Dev Ji talks about the Guru, he does not mean a Guru in human form. A true Guru is God himself who provides his teachings by means of Sabad. Guru Nanak Sahib says,

Without the true Guru none has obtained the Lord; without the True Guru, none has obtained the Lord.
In the True Guru, the Lord has placed Himself, and I openly declare and proclaim it.
Salvation is obtained for aye, by meeting the True Guru, who has banished worldly attachment from within him.
The excellent idea (theme) is this that one attaches one’s mind to the True Lord.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question17.
Give a detail account of Amrit Ceremony.
Answer:
The Amrit Ceremony or baptism is considered of special importance in Sikhism. This ceremony was started by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. It was called charan Amrit. This ceremony remained prevalent till Guru Teg Bahadur Ji. Guru Gobind Singh Ji made a change in this ceremony. He started the ceremony of Khande da Pahul (Amrit). The taking of Amrit is compulsory for every Sikh. He who doesn’t take Amrit is never called a true Sikh. TJie actual method of Amrit ceremoney is fixed by Shiromani Gurdwara Parbandhak Committee, Amritsar, which is as follows :

(a) Ambrosial baptism should be held at an exclusive place away from common human traffic.

ib) At the place where ambrosial baptism is to be administered, the holy Guru Granth Sahib should be installed and ceremonially opened. Also present should be six committed baptised Sikhs, one of whom should sit in, attendance of the Guru Granth Sahib and the other five should be there to administer the ambrosial baptism. These six may even include Sikh women. All of them must have taken bath and washed their hair.

(c) The five beloved ones who administer ambrosial baptism should not include a disabled person, such as a person who is blind or blind in one eye, lame, one with a broken or disabled limb, or one suffering from some chronic disease. The number should not include anyone who has committed a breach of the Sikh discipline and principles. All of them should be committed baptised Sikhs with appealing personalities.

(d) Any man or woman of any country, religion or caste who embraces Sikhism and solemnly undertakes to abide by its priciples is entitled to ambrosial baptism.

The person to be baptised should not be of very young age, he or she should have attained a plausible degree of discretion . The person to be baptised must have taken bath and washed the hair and must wear all five K’s – Kesh (unshorn hair) strapped Kirpan (sword). Kachhehra (prescribed shorts), Kanga (Comb tucked in the tied up hair), Karha (Steel bracelet). He/she must not have on his/her person any token of any other faith.

He/she must not have his/her head bare or be wearing a cap. He/she must not be wearing any ornaments piercing through any part of the body. The persons to be baptised must stand respectfully with hands folded facing the Guru Granth Sahib.

(e) Anyone seeking to be rebaptised, having committed an aberration, should be singled out and the five beloved ones should award chastisement to him/her in the presence of the congregation.

(f) One from amongst the five beloved ones administering ambrosial baptism to persons seeking to be baptised should explain the principles of the Sikh religion to them : The Sikh religion advocates the renunciation of the worship of any created thing, and rendering of worship and loving devotion to, and meditating on, the One Supreme Creator. For the fulfilment of such devotion and meditation, reflection on the contents of Gurbani and practising of its tenets, participation in the congregational services, rendering service to the Panth, benevolent exertion (to promote the good of others), love of God’s name (loving reflection on and experience of the Divine), living within the Sikh discipline after getting baptised etc. are the principles means. He should conclude his exposition of the principles of Sikh religion with the query : Do you accept these willingly?

(g) On an affirmative response from the seekers of baptism, one from amongst the five beloved ones should perform the Ardas for the preparation of baptism and take the holy Hukam (commapd) . The five beloved ones should come close to the bowl for preparing the amrit (ambrosial nectar).

(h) The bowl should be of pure steel and it should be placed on a clean steel ring or other clean support.

(i) Clean water and sugar puffs should be put in the bowl and the five beloved ones should sit around it in bir posture1 and recite the undermentioned scriptural compositions.

(j) The scriptural composition to be recited are : The Japji, The Jaap, The Ten Sawayyas (commencing with Sarawag sud). The Bainti Chaupai (From “Hamri karo hath dai rachha” to “dusht dokh to leho bcchai”). Anand Sahib.

(k) Each of the five beloved ones who recites the scripture should hold the edge of the bowl with his left hand and keep stirring the water with a double-edged sword held in his right hand. He should do that with full concentration. The rest of the beloved ones should keep gripping the edge of the bowl with both hands concentrating their full attention on the ambrosial nectar.

(l) After the conclusion of the recitation, one from amongst the beloved ones should perform the Ardas.

(m) Only that person seeking to be baptised who has participated in the entire ceremony of ambrosial baptism can be baptised. One who has turned up while the ceremony was in progress cannot be baptised.

(n) After the Ardas as per clause (1) above, thinking of our Father, the tenth Master, the wearer of the aigrette, every person seeking to be baptised should sit in the bir posture , putting his/her right hand cupped on the left cupped hand and be made to drink the ambrosial mix five times, as the beloved one who pours the mix into his cupped hand exclaims : say, Waheguru ji ka Khalsa, Waheguru ji ki Fateh ! (The Khalsa is of the Wondrous, Destroyer of darkness; victory, too, is His !)

The person being baptised should after imbibing the ambrosia, repeat : Waheguru ji ka Khalsa, Waheguru ji ki Fateh. Then five handfuls of the ambrosial mix should be sprinkled into the eyes of the person being baptised and another five into his hair. Each such sprinkling should be accompanied by the beloved one administering baptism saying, “Waheguru ji ka Khalsa, Waheguru ji ki Fateh” and the person being baptised repeating the chant. Whatever ambrosial mix is left over after the administration of the ambrosial baptism to all individual seekers, should be sipped by all (men and women) baptised, together.

(o) After this the five beloved ones, all together in chorus, communicating the name of Waheguru to all who have been administered the ambrosial baptism, recite to them the mul mantar (basic creed, seminal chant) and make them repeat it aloud : ik aunkar satnam karta purakh nirbhau nirwair akal murat ajuni saibhang gur prasad.

(p) After this, one from amongst the five beloved ones should explain to the initiates the discipline of the order : Today you are reborn in the true Guru’s household, ending the cycle of migration, and joined the Khalsa Panth (order). Your spiritual father is now Guru Gobind Singh and, spiritual mother, Mata Sahib Kaur. Your place of birth is Kesgarh Sahib and your native place is Anandpur Sahib. You, being the sons of one father, are spiritual brothers. You have become the pure Khalsa, having renounced your previous lineage, professional background, calling (occupation),

beliefs, that is, having given up all connections with your caste, descent, birth, country, religion, etc. You are to worship none except the One Timeless Being—no god, goddess, incarnation or prophet. You are not to think of anyone except the ten Gurus and anything except their gospel as your saviour. You are supposed to know Gurmukhi (Punjabi alphabet). (If you do not, you must learn it).

And recite, or listen in to the recitation of, the undermentioned scriptural compositions, the daily repetition of which is ordained, every day:

  1. The Japji Sahib,
  2. The Jaap Sahib,
  3. The Ten Sawayyas (Quartains) beginning “Sarawag sudh”,
  4. The Sodar Rahiras and the Sohila, Besides,

you should read from or listen in to the recitation from the Adi Guru Granth. Have, on your person, all the time, the five K’s : The Keshas (unshorn hair), the Kirpan (sheathed sword) , the Kachhehra , the Kanga (comb), the Karha (steel bracelet ). The undermentioned four transgressions (tabooed practices) must be avoided :

  1. Dishonouring the hair;
  2. Eating the meat of an animal slaughtered the Muslim way ;
  3. Cohabiting with a person other than one’s spouse;
  4. Using tobacco.

In the event of the commission of any of these transgressions, the transgressor must get rebaptised. If a transgression is committed unintentionally and unknowingly, the transgressor shall not be liable to punishment. You must not associate with a Sikh who had uncut hair earlier and has cut it or a Sikh who smokes. You must ever be ready for the service of the Panth and of the Gurudwaras (Sikh places of worship). You must tender one tenth of your earning to the Guru. In short, you must act the Guru’s way in all spheres of activity.

You must remain fully aligned to the Khalsa brotherhood in accordance with the principles of the Khalsa faith. If you commit transgression of the Khalsa discipline, you must present yourself before the congregation and beg pardon, accepting whatever punishment is awarded. You must also resolve to remain watchful against defaults in the future.

(q) The following individuals shall be liable to chastisement involving automatic boycott :

  1. Anyone maintaining relations or communion with elements antagonistic to the Panth including the minas (reprobates), the masands (agents once accredited to local Sikh Communities as Guru’s representatives, since discredited for their faults and aberrations), followers of Dhirmal or Ram Rai, et. al., or users of tobacco or killers of female infaints.
  2. One who eats/drinks left-overs of the unbaptised or the fallen Sikhs;
  3. One who dyes his beard;
  4. One who gives off son or daughter in matrimony for a price or reward.
  5. Users of intoxicants (hemp, opium, liquor, narcoties, cocaine, etc.);
  6. One holding, or being a party to, ceremonies or practices contrary to the Guru’s way;
  7. One who defaults in the maintenance of Sikh descipline.
  8. After this sermon, one from among the five beloved ones should perform the Ardas.
  9. Thereafter, the Sikh sitting in attendance of the Guru Granth Sahib should take the Hukam. If anyone from amongst those who have received the ambrosial baptism had not earlier been named in accordance with the Sikh naming ceremony,
    he should renounce his previous name and be given a new name beginning with first letter of the Hukam now taken.
  10. And finally, the Karhah prashad should be distributed. All the newly launched Sikh men and women should eat the karhah prashad together off the same bowl.

Question 18.
Explain the significance of the Ardaas (Prayer) in Sikhism.
Answer:
Though the Ardaas forms a part of all religions but it occupies a special position in Sikhism. The word Ardaas has been derived from a Persian word Araz Dast which means to request before someone. Ardaas is that key in Sikhism that opens the gates to the abode of God.

The system of performing the Ardaas in Sikhism was initiated by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. It was at the time of Guru Arjan Dev Ji that the system of offering the Ardaas in front of the Guru Granth Sahib was started. Guru Gobind Singh Ji started the system of offering Ardaas in the Sangat. There is no fixed time for Ardaas. It can be offered at anytime by anyone. An Ardaas performed sincerely definitely bears fruit. There are several instances for this in Sikh History. Guru Axjan Dev Ji says,

Whatever I ask of my Lord exactly that He blesses me with.
Whatever the Lord’s slave Nanak, utters with his mouth proves
true both here and hereafter.

While offering the Ardaas, if there is the illumination of Guru Granth Sahib then the entire Sangat should face the Guru Granth Sahib. In case, the illumination is not done, then the Ardaas can be offered facing any direction. While offering the Ardaas, the mind should fully concentrate because if our thoughts are somewhere else, then by merely standing with joined hands is purposeless. Hence to ensure that the Sangat is careful all the time, the Bhai Ji who offers the Ardaas keeps repeating’“Dhyan Karke Bolo Ji Waheguru” to which the entire Sangat calls out “Waheguru” loudly. At the time of Kirtan or at the time of the end of the Diwan, the entire Sangat has to stand up. If the Ardaas is offered for some specific purpose like naming ceremony, ring ceremoney or marriage ceremony etc. then the entire Sangat keeps sitting and only the related persons keep standing.

In Sikhism, every Sikh resorts to Ardaas at sometime or the other. The main subjects for offering the Ardaas are

  1. To express gratitude towards the Almighty.
  2. Ardaas of the Nam.
  3. Ardaas for Bani.
  4. Ardaas to destroy all sins.
  5. Ardaas to ask for forgiveness.
  6. To express gratitude on the birth of a child.
  7. Ardaas at the time of naming the child.
  8. Ardaas at the time of beginning of a child’s education.
  9. Ardaas for ring ceremony and marriage ceremony.
  10. Ardaas to ask for children.
  11. Ardaas for good health.
  12. Ardaas to accept Hukam.
  13. Ardaas to start journey.
  14. Ardaas before starting a new business.
  15. Ardaas before entering a new house.
  16. Ardaas after Nitnem.
  17. Ardaas at the time of drinking the immortal Nectar.
  18. Ardaas before starting a battle.
  19. Ardaas to meet the Almighty.

In brief, at every juncture of life, one has to resort to Ardaas. For the benefit of students, given below is the form of Ardaas recognized, by the Shiromani Gurudwara Prabandhak Committee :

ARDAAS

ik onkar waheguru ji ke fateh
siri bhagautti ji sahai
vaar siri bhagautti ji ki paattshaahi dasmi
prithm bhagautti simar kay gur nanak laee(n) dhiaae
phir angad gur tte amardaas(u) ramdasay hoi sahai
arjan hargobind no simrau siri har rai
siri harkrishan dhiaaeeay jis dithe sabh dukh jaae
teg bahadur simriay ghar nau nidh aavay dhaae
sabh thaai(n) hoe sahai
dasvaa(n) paattshah siri guru gobind singh sahib ji sabh thaai(n) hoe sahai dasaa(n) paatshaahiaa(n) di jot siri guru granth sahib ji de path didar da dhiaan dhar ke bolo ji waheguru.
panjaa(n) piyaariaa(n), chauhaa(n) sahibzaadiaa(n), chaaliaa(n)
muktiaa(n), hathaiaa(n), jupiaa(n), tapiaa(n), jinaa(n)h tera naam jupiaa, va(n)d
chhakiaa, deg chalaaee,’ teg vaahi, dekh ke andith
keetta, tinaa(n)h piyaariaa(n) sachiaariaa(n) di kamaai da dhiaan
dharke, khalsa ji, bolo ji waheguru.
jinaa(n)h singhaa(n) singhbeeaa(n) nay dharam haytt sees dittay,
ba(n)d ba(n)d kataa-ay, khopriaa(n) luhaaiaa(n), charkiaa(n) ttay
charhay, aaray-aa(n), naal chiraa-ay gae, gurudwariaa(n) di seva laee
kurbanniaa keettiaa(n), dharam nahee(n) haariaa, sikhi kesaa(n) __
suaasaa(n) naal nibaahi, ttinaa(n) ki kamaai da dhiaan dharkey,
khalsa ji bolo waheguru.
prithmay sarbatt khalsa ji ki ardaas hay ji, sarbatt khalsa ji ko
waheguru waheguru waheguru chitt aavay, chit aavan ka sadkaa
sarab sukh hovay. jahaa(n) jahaa(n) khalsa ji sahib tahaa(n)
tahaa(n) rachhiaa riaa-aytt,
deg-tteg fatteh, bidh ki payj, panth ki jeet, siri sahib ji sahaai,
khalsa ji kay bol baalay bolo ji waheguru.
sikhaa(n) noo(n) sikhi daan, kes daan, rayhatt daan, bibayk daan,
visaah daan, bharosa daan, daanaa(n) sir daan, naam daan, siri
amritsar ji de darshan ishnaan, chau(n)kiaa(n), jha(n)day, bungay.
jugo jug atall dharam ka jaykaar, bolo ji waheguru.
he nimaneya di maan, nitaneya di taan, neouteya di oaat, Sache pita waheguru sahib jeo, aap jee
dar te ardaas hae jee (Add the purpose of the ardaas like Guruduware, dewan smapti, ceremony, gurpurb, akhand path, chardi kala, neetnam, etc.) Akhar wadha Ghata bhul chuk maaf karni. Sai peyare melloo jenha meleya tera naam cheyat awey. Nanak naam chardi kalaah tere bhaneh sarbat da bhala.

WAHEGURU JI KA KHALSA, WAHEGURU JI KI FATEH !!!
BOLAY SO(N) NIHAAL, SAT SIRI AKAL

The Ardaas has a great importance in our lives. It renders spiritual happiness to a person who offers it. Though small in length it has a wide expanse. In fact, it is nothing short of an example of an ocean in a earthem pot. It gives us an inspiration to work for the devotion of God, service, sacrifice and benefit of humanity at large. It renders one’s heart pure. It removes Haumai. It puts an end to all sufferings. It helps remove all dirt that has accumulated over one’s heart over several births. It helps a man to overcome the circle of transmigration. In this manner, the Ardaas is an important means of meeting with the Almighty. Guru Arjan Dev Ji says,

In whose power are the lords and emperors
In whose power is the whole world
By whose doing, every thing is done, besides Him, there is nothing.
Address thy supplication to the True Guru,
Thine affairs, he will all arrange.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Short Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Discuss in brief the Religious Sikh Way of Life.
Answer:
1. A Sikh should wake up at dawn, take bath and recite the Name of the Akal Purakh (Parmatma-the Supreme Soul).

2. Follow the path of Nitnem. The Banis of Nitnem are as follows :— Japji Sahib, Jaap Sahib, Anand Sahib, Chaupai and 10 Sawaiyyas. These Banis must be read at dawn.
Rahiras Sahib—This Bani is read out in the evening.
Sohila—This Bani must be read out at night before sleeping. It is essential to do the Ardaas at dawn and after Nitnem.

3. The impact of Gurbani is greater in the Sangat. Hence, it is appropriate for a Sikh that he goes to visit the Gurdwara and enjoys the benefit of listening to the Bani while sitting among the Sangat.

4. The illumination of the Guru Granth Sahib must take place in the Gurdwara everyday. Ordinarily, the Sukh Asan must take place after the path of Rahiras Sahib.

5. The Guru Granth Sahib’s illumination should be done respectfully. For the illumination, it is essential that the area is completely clean the there is light above. The illumination should be done by covering the Manji Sahib with a clean cloth. Matresses (gaddelas) should be used for the Guru Granth Sahib Ji and a rumala should be placed on it. At the time when the Path is not taking place, the Guru Granth Sahib should be covered with a rumala. The chanwar should be used at the time of illumination.

6. There should be no idol-worship or any custom followed against the Gurmat.

7. The Ardaas should be recited while taking the Guru Granth Sahib from one place to the other. The person who holds the Guru Granth Sahib on his head should be bare foot.

8. The illumination of the Guru Granth Sahib should be done along with the recitation of the Ardaas. The Vaak should be taken at the time of illumination.

9. When the Guru Granth Sahib is brought, then each Sikh should stand up in respect.

Question 2.
Explain in brief the Sikh Code of Conduct.
Answer:

  1. A Gursikh should not worship any god or goddess other than the Akal Purakh (the Absolute).
  2. A Gursikh should worship the giver of salvation i.e. the ten Guru Sahiban, Guru Granth Sahib and the Bani written in it.
  3. A Gursikh should not believe in caste-creed, untouchability, mantra, shradha, forefathers, pinda, deeva, fasts observed on ekadashi, puranmashi, tilak, idol worship etc.
  4. A Gursikh should not believe in any other religious pilgrimage other than the Guru Ghar.
  5. A Gursikh should pray before Waheguru before starting any work.
  6. It is the duty of every Sikh to enlighten his child about the teachings of Gursikhi.
  7. The Sikhs should not consume bhaang, narcotics, liquor, tobacco etc.
  8. A Gursikh should not indulge in killing a girl child. He should not be even associated with such a person.
  9. A Gursikh should lead a life with honest earning.
  10. A Gurusikh has to keep away from theft, robbery and gambling etc.
  11. A Gurusikh has to consider the other’s daughter as one’s own daughter and the other’s wife as one’s own mother.
  12. A Gursikh should abide by the teachings of the Gurus from birth till death.
  13. A Gursikh should greet another Sikh by saying ‘Waheguru Ji ka Khalsa, Waheguru Ji ki Fateh’.
  14. It is not appropriate for the Sikh women to observe purdah or ghoonghat (veil).
  15. On the birth of a child in a Sikh’s house, the family and relatives should go to the Gurdwara to express gratitude towards the Akal Purakh.

Question 3.
Explain in brief the Mul Mantra.
Answer:
The beginning lines of Japji Sahib of Guru Nanak Dev Ji is called Mul Mantra. Guru Granth Sahib Ji starts with Mul Mantra. These lines are Ik-onkaar Sat-nam Karta Purakh Nirbhau Nirvair Akaal Moorat Ajoonee Saibhang Gur Prasaad. In these, are included the essence of the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. Mul Mantra means there is but one God. His name is true. He is the Creator, He is fearless. He is without enmity. He is immortal. He is beyond birth. He is self-illumined. He is realised by the grace of True Guru.

Question 4.
Describe any five features of Akal Purkh (God) in Sikhism.
Or
Is God Universal as per Sikh Way of life? Discuss.
Answer:
1. God is One : Gurbani has stressed repeatedly that God is one though he is remembered by many names. According to the Sikh tradition, the letter T which appears in the beginning of the Mul Mantra stands for oneness of God. According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji, God is the Creator, Sustainer and Destroyer of the world. No Pir, Paigamber, Avtar, Auliya, Rishi or Muni etc. can stand up to him.

2. Nirguna and Saguna : God has two forms. He is Nirguna (without attributes) as well as Saguna (with attributes). In the beginning there was darkness all around in the world. There were no earth and heaven or creatures etc. God existed in Himself. This was his Nirguna form. When it pleased God, He created earth, heaven, moon, sun, mountains, lakes, forests, human beings, animals, birds and flowers etc. by His single command (Hukam). Thus He revealed Himself in his creation. This is His Saguna form.

3. Sovereign : God is sovereign. He is the wielder of absolute authority. Nothing can occur against His will. He doesn’t need anybody’s help nor is He dependent on anybody for His powers.

4. Formless and Omnipresent: God is formless. He has’ no form or colour. He can not be described in words. He can not be idolised and can pot be seen with human eyes. Despite this He is omnipresent. He is present everywhere in water, earth and heaven.

5. Immortal: The universe created by God is unstable and temporary but God is immortal. He is beyond the cycle of birth, death and rebirth. Thousands of Mohamma as, Brahmas, Vishnus, Ramas and Krishanas stand in obedience before Him. All of them are mortal whereas God is immortal.

6. Greatness : There is a description of God’s greatness at several places in the Gurbani. He is the eternal giver. He has such a treasury of wealth that it is never depleted even if distributed. He can make anyone immensely wealthy. He can forgive all those who come to him for forgiveness.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 5.
What is the importance of remembering Divine Name in Sikhism?
Answer:
Remembering the Divine Name or Simran is considered to be the highest form of worship of God. Guru Nanak Dev Ji said that on one hand remembering the Divine Name eradicates all sins of the heart, on the other hand it becomes placid. For this reason, man’s sorrows come to an end. All his fears are dispelled. By remembering the Divine Name, a man’s works are accomplished easily because God himself helps him in all his works. A person who remembers the Divine Name of God, has a soul that is always gentle and fragrant like a lotus flower.

A person who remembers the Divine Name is able to swim across the vicious circle of transmigration. Without Name, man’s life on this earth is futile. Such a man is always entrapped in all types of sins and the vicious circle of transmigration. He meets his end in the God’s court in the same manner as a castle of sand in a terrible storm. The Divine Name of God should be remembered with a pure heart and true devotion. A person who is blessed by the Almighty Himself only can remember the Divine Name.

Question 6.
What is the meaning of Honest Labour?
Answer:
Kirat means honest labour. Honest labour is extremely important. It is the ordain of the Absolute (Hukam). We observe everyday that every creature earns his livelihood through Kirat. Hence the need for honest labour is extremely essential for man because he is the head of all creatures. Kirat is essential to keep the body healthy that shelters in it the Supreme soul. A person who does not perform honest labour cannot keep his b’ody fit. Such a person actually performs a sin against the Absolute.

Guru Nanak Dev Ji performed Kirat by practising agriculture. He preferred to have the simple, dry chapati at Bhai Lalo’s house at Saidpur to the Brahma Bhoj of Malik Bhago. The reason for this was that Bhai Lalo performed honest labour.

The Sikh is not prohibited from taking up any occupation. He can take up any occupation such as agriculture, trade, service etc. But he is strictly prohibited from earning by means of theft, robbery, dacoity, fraud, bribery and evil. Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,

For this wealth many are ruined and it has disgraced many.
Without misdeeds it is not amassed, and it departs not with the dead.
He, whom the Creator Himself destroys, first deprives him of virtue.

Question 7.
What is the importance of Sangat in Sikhism?
Answer:
Sangat or Sadh Sangat is crux of Sikhism. The foundation of this institution was laid by Guru Nanak Dev Ji at Kartarpur. Wherever he went, the Sangat was formed there. Sangat implies ‘a congregation of the Gurmu lovers where they praised God.’ Every woman or man without any discrimination on the basis of caste, creed, colour, religion, rich, poor etc. could join it. Explaining about Sangat, Guru Nanak Sahib says,
How do we describe the noble company? The place where only one Name is uttered.
The utterance of one Name is the order. This is what Satguru has ordained.

The basic principle of Sikhism lies in the belief that the God Himself resides in the Sangat. Thus the life of a person who is a part of the Sangat completely changes. His heart is free from evil impulses of kam (lust), krodh (anger), lobh (greed), moh (attachment) and hankar (pride) and his heart is full of contentment, kindness, religion and honesty and other such divine virtues. Haumai (ego) disappears and enlightenment takes place.

The sins of the greatest of sinners are forgiven in the Sangat. Guru Ramdas Ji says that just as the touch of touchstone converts iron into gold, similarly a sinner becomes pure after joining the Sangat. Guru Ram Das Ji says,

As by touch with t he touchstone iron turns into gold. So do the downgraded persons become noble with good company.
The Sangat is so powerful that it can make even the lame climb mountains, the foolish can talk like an intellectual, the blind can see Trilok and all the dirt of his heart is removed. All his wishes are fulfilled and he attains Parmanand (supreme happiness). He sees God in each of his creatures. There is nobody he calls his own or a stranger. He breathes along with everyone. This institution still persists.

Question 8.
What is the importance of Pangat in Sikh may of life?
Or
Write a short note on the Pangat.
Answer:
The institution of Pangat has a commendable role to play in the development of Sikhism. Guru Nanak Dev Ji had laid the foundation of this important institution in Kartarpur. Every woman or man without any discrimination on the basis of caste, religion, creed, rich or poor etc. could join the Pangat. Everyone had equal rights to serve.

The establishment of the institution of Pangat by Guru Nanak Dev Ji was a revolutionary step. This way the Shudras were able to serve food to the Brahmins. The object of this institution was to put an end to the caste system which was making our social system hollow. This way he brought the principle of equality into practice. Due to this reason, the feeling of mutual brotherhood among the Sikhs developed. It gave respect to the lower castes which had been oppressed by the higher classes for centuries. The money for this Langar was donated by the Sikhs of the Guru. This helped them develop the habit of donation and charity. Due to the institution of Pangat, the popularity of Sikhism spread far and wide. In context of the importance of Pangat Guru Nanak Dev Ji says,

He alone O’ Nanak knoweth the way
Who eameth with the sweat of his brow,
and then shareth with others.

Guru Angad Dev Ji developed this institution of Pangat further. His wife Bibi Khivi Ji, herself looked after the arrangements of Langar in Khadur Sahib. Guru Amar Das Ji further expanded this institution of Langar. He announced that whoever wanted to meet him had to first partake the Langar in the Pangat. This was done to permanently end the problem of untouchability among the Sikhs. The Mughal Emperor Akbar and the king of Haripur also had to first partake the Langar in the Pangat before meeting him. Guru Amar Das Ji was of the view that donating food for the hungry and clothes for the needy was better than thousands of Hawans and Yajnas. This institution still persists.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 9.
Describe the concept of Hukam in Sikhism.
Answer:
Hukam is an important concept of Sikh philosophy. The word Hukam is derived from an Arabic word that means order, commandment or instruction. The Hukam of the Absolute is to be accepted as sweet as has been mentioned at several places in the Gurbani. Hukam implies that supreme commandment due to which the entire universe is conducting itself in a specific manner.

Guru Nanak Dev Ji writes in the ‘Japji’ that the entire universe has been created in accordance to the Hukam of God. It is because of theJdukam that a creature receives appreciation or insult. It is because of the Hukam’that they become good or evil and receive joy or sorrow. They can acquire freedom from their sins or remain entrapped in the vicious circle of transmigration because of Hukam. Not a leaf can flutter without his Hukam. Infact it is the Hukam that runs all the natural phenomena of day-night, water-earth, wind-fire, moon-sun, world or beyond the world.

A man’s birth on earth is successful only if he is capable enough of recognising His Hukam. Only that person can recognise Hukam who has given up Haumai (ego) and in whose heart resides the Name of God. Such a person happily accepts all joyous and sordid events as the Hukam of God. Guru Arjan Dev Ji says,
As, as is Thy commands, so so does it happen.
Wheresoever Thou Thyself keepest me, there I go and stand.
Blessed is the person who can understand the will of God. He is not worried at all because he knows that whatever happens, happens because of the unchanging will of God. Man has nothing in his hands. Such a man is always contented and peaceful at heart.

Question 10.
What is meant’by Haumai in Sikhism?
Answer:
The concept of Haumai (ego) has been described again and again in Sikh philosophy. Haumai means ‘Ego’ or ‘I’. It is a boundary that separates a creature’s soul from the omnipotent Supreme Soul. It would be no exaggeration to call the Haumai of the individual as a powerful fort of T. Because of Haumai, man can form a world of his own With his thoughts. In it, the Haumai or his ego is very strong. Hence, his world is limited to sons, daughters, brothers, nephews, sisters, brother-in-law, mother, father, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law, husband-wife etc. and near and distant relatives.

If this cord of personal relationships is extended further, then good friends can also be included in one’s ‘ personal world. But in the end, this personal world remains confined to personal acquaintances only. It is because of one’s creation of this personal world that gives birth to the feeling of ego in an individual and he considers himself to be the master of this artificial world. Consequently, he loses his true-individuality.

Question 11.
“Ego is deep rooted disease.” How? ”
Ans.Haumai is a chronic disease, that when afflicts!a person like cancer is difficult to cure. It is the creator of the five vices-lust, anger,’greed, attachment and pride. Such a man tells lies of several kinds, indulges in extravagance and takes the help of several false acts. Consequently it gives rise to the evil. It takes such a frightening form that life turns hell. A man who is filled with Haumai distances himself from the Supreme Soul and remains entrapped in the vicious circle of birth and death. What does a person do under the influence of Haumai?

To this, Guru Nanak Dev Ji answers that deeds of a person are bound by the bondage of Haumai. He is born, he dies, gives, takes, earns, loses, speaks truth or tells lies, commits sins or performs good deeds under the influences of Haumai and makes his calculations about hell and heaven and measures intelligence and foolishness in the balance of Haumai. It is because of Haumai that a person does not identify the meaning of salvation. If he identifies Haumai, then he can see the gate of God. Man fights because of his ignorance. Accounts are written according to Karma. One receives the fruit of the kind of deeds that he performs.

Question 12.
What is the importance of Guru in the teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji?
Answer:
Guru has an important place in Sikh philosophy. Sikh Gurus consider the Guru extremely important to reach the Almighty. According to them, Guru is the true ladder to attain salvation. Without the Guru, man can see darkness all around. It is the Guru who helps an individual to move from darkness (ignorance) to light (enlightenment). A Guru helps a person to cure his diseases of attachment to maya and Haumai. It is he who describes the method of treading on the path of devotion by the recitation of Nam and Sabad. A Guru is not possible without feelings of devotion and knowledge.

A Guru can make the impossible possible and it can transform a person’s lifestyle completely. Meeting a true Guru is not an easy task. Without the blessings of God himself one can obtain a true Guru. Here, it is worth mentioning that when Guru Nanak Dev Ji talks about the Guru, he does not mean a Guru in human form. A true Guru is God himself who provides his teachings by means of Sabad.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 13.
What is the importance of Kirtan in Sikhism?
Or
Kirtan is very important in the Sikh way of life.
Answer:
The Kirtan holds an important position in Sikhism. It is considered to be the highest means of attainment of spiritualism. In almost all the traditions of Sikhism, Kirtan is performed. Kirtan means that form of singing in which there is praise of the Akal Purakh. Singing the Gurbani according to ragas is called Kirtan. It was Guru Nanak Dev Ji who started the practice of Kirtan in Sikhism. He was accompanied by Bhai Mardana Ji who throughout his travels used to play the Rabab at the time of Kirtan. While performing the Kirtan Guru Nanak Dev Ji had a magical impact on the hearts of his devotees.

Consequently, not only the ordinary men but also stone-hearted persons like Sajjan Thug, Kauda Rakshasa, the witch Nurshahi, Hamza Gauss and Wali Kandhari could not help getting influenced by him and became his disciples.

The remaining Gurus continued the tradition of Kirtan. With a view to arouse Veer Rasa in the Kirtan, Guru Hargobind Sahib started the tradition of Dhadhi. k Kirtan performed with a sense of love and devotion influences a man’s soul to the core. This awakens the dead souls of people and renders them free of all sufferings and cleanses his heart of all evil. He remains engrossed in recitation of Nam. It humbles a person’s heart. His soul feels devoted and happy and his life emerges out to be successful. For this reason, Kirtan has often been referred to as invaluable.

Question 14.
Explain the importance of Seva in Sikhism.
Answer:
Special importance has been given to Seva in Sikh philosophy. There is no -<i doubt that there has been a glorious description about Seva in every religion but the
importance that has been given to it in Sikhism is far greater than any other religion. Seva is actually devotion of high order. It can prove to be fruitful only when it is performed without any selfish motive. A man doesn’t receive the privilege of performing Seva till he removes the feeling of Haumai. The interest for performing Seva does not arise in the heart of every individual. It needs character of high order to be able to perform Seva. It requires a person to surrender himself completely before God by sacrificing his Haumai.
There are several instances in Sikh history which make it quite evident that a person who performed Seva became the master of Guru Ghar whereas a person afflicted by Haumai did not obtain anything.

Service to humanity is considered to be the highest form of Seva. In this context, the example of Bhai Kanhaiya Ji can be cited. He performed the service of giving water to the injured soldiers of the enemy and provided them medical aid without any discrimination in the first battle of Anandpur Sahib fought during Guru Gobind Singh’s Ji’s time. On being asked, he said that he could see the reflection of Guru Gobind Singh Ji in each individual.

This service performed by Bhai Kanhaiya Ji with true devotion acts like a Pole Star for the Sikhs even today. Seva is an indispensable part of a Sikh’s life according to Sikhism. It continues not for a day or two but continues till the end of one’s life. Seva can be performed by only those individuals who are blessed by God Himself.

Question 15.
Explain the significance of Ardas (Prayer) in Sikhism.
Answer:
Though the Ardaas forms a part of all religions but it occupies a special position in Sikhism. The word Ardaas has been derived from a Persian word Araz Dast which means to request before someone. Ardaas is that key in Sikhism that opens the gates to the abode of God.

The system of performing the Ardaas in Sikhism was initiated by Guru Nanak Dev Ji. It was at the time of Guru Arjan Dev Ji that the system of offering the Ardaas in front of the Guru Granth Sahib was started. Guru Gobind Singh Ji started the system of offering Ardaas in the Sangat. There is no fixed time for Ardaas. It can be offered at anytime by anyone. An Ardaas performed sincerely definitely bears fruit. There are several instances for this in Sikh History.

In Sikhism, every Sikh resorts to Ardaas at sometime or the other. The main subjects for offering the Ardaas are

  1. To express gratitude towards the Almighty.
  2. Ardaas of the Nam.
  3. Ardaas for Bani.
  4. Ardaas to destroy all sins.
  5. Ardaas to ask for forgiveness.
  6. To express gratitude on the birth of a child.
  7. Ardaas at the time of naming the child.
  8. Ardaas at the time of beginning of a child’s education.
  9. Ardaas for ring ceremony and marriage ceremony.
  10. Ardaas to ask for children.
  11. Ardaas for good health.
  12. Ardaas to accept Hukam.
  13. Ardaas to start journey.
  14. Ardaas before starting a new business.
  15. Ardaas before entering a new house.
  16. Ardaas after Nitnem.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Answer in One Word to One Sentence:

Question 1.
Who is a Sikh?
Answer:
Any man or woman who believes in the Absolute, the ten Gurus and the Guru Granth Sahib is called a Sikh.

Question 2.
According to what should a Sikh lead his life?
Answer:
According to Gurmat.

Question 3.
How many Banis are included in Nitnem?
Answer:
Japji Sahib, Jaap Sahib, Anand Sahib, Chaupai and 10 Sawaiyyas, Rahiras Sahib, Kirtan Sohila.

Question 4.
Name two Banis of Nitnem.
Or
Name any two Banis recited in the morning.
Answer:

  • Japji Sahib,
  • Jaap Sahib.Question 5.
    Which Bani is read out in the evening after sunset?
    Answer:
    Rahiras Sahib.

Question 6.
Which Bani is recited by the Sikh before night?
Answer:
Kirtan Sohila.

Question 7.
What things should be kept in mind during the illumination of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji? State any one.
Answer:
During the illumination of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji, there should be canopy above.

Question 8.
Which things have been prohibited for each Sikh inside a Gurdwara? State any one.
Answer:
They should remove their shoes outside.

Question 9.
Where should the Nishan Sahib be placed in the Gurdwara?
Answer:
The Nishan Sahib should be placed at a high position in the Gurdwara.

Question 10.
Give any one principle of Gurmat life.
Answer:
He would daily recite the Ardaas before the performance of his tasks for the day.

Question 11.
Which five K’s are essential for every Sikh to acquire?
Answer:
Every Sikh should acquire Kesh, Kangha, Kara, Kachcha and Kripan.

Question 12.
Which two malpractices have been prohibited for the Sikhs?
Answer:

  • Cutting of hair,
  • Using tobacco.

Question 13.
What is meant by Gurmata?
Answer:
Decision are accepted by all the Khalsas in the presence of Guru Granth Sahib.

Question 14.
On what issues can there be Gurmata?
Answer:
There can be Gurmata for removal of doubts regarding the basic principles of Sikhism.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 15.
Which is considered to be the supreme in Sikhism?
Answer:
Absolute (Parmatma).

Question 16.
Give any one characteristic of Akal Purakh.
Answer:
He is Superpower.

Question 17.
What according to the Gurbani acts like a ladder between a person and the Absolute?
Answer:
Guru.

Question 18.
What is the importance of Guru in Sikhism?
Answer:
Guru is the true ladder to attain salvation.

Question 19.
Which Guru created the institution of Sangat and Pangat and at which place?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji created the institution of Sangat and Pangat at Kartarpur Sahib.

Question 20.
What is meant by ‘Sangat’?
Answer:
The Sangat means the gathering of the Gursikhs where the Absolute is revered.

Question 21.
Who established the institution of ‘Sangat’?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 22.
What is the significance of Sangat in Sikhism?
Answer:
A person who goes to the Sangat is able to attain salvation.

Question 23.
What is meant by ‘Pangat’?
Answer:
Partaking the langar in a row is called Pangat.

Question 24.
Who established the institution of ‘Pangat’?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 25.
What is the significance of ‘Pangat’ in Sikhism?
Answer:
It encourage the propagation of Sikhism.

Question 26.
What is meant by ‘Hukam’ in Sikhism?
Answer:
Hukam means order.

Question 27.
What is the significance of ‘Hukam’ in Sikhism?
Answer:
That who follows the ‘Hukam’ is blessed by the Absolute.

Question 28.
What happens to the person who disobeys the ‘Hukam’?
Answer:
Any person who disobeys the ‘Hukam’ is trapped in the vicious circle of transmigration.

Question 29.
What is meant hy ‘Haumai’?
Answer:
Haumai means ego.

Question 30.
What kind of disease is Haumai?
Answer:
It is a chronic disease.

Question 31.
Give one way to eradicate Haumai.
Answer:
Reciting the Name of God.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 32.
How many pyschological vices are present in humans?
Answer:
Five.

Question 33.
From which vices a Sikh is advised to remain careful?
Answer:
Sikh is advised to remain careful from the vices-Kam, Krodh, Lobh, Moh and Ahankar.

Question 34.
State any two psychological vices of humans.
Answer:

  • Kam
  • Krodh.

Question 35.
What is meant by ‘Seva’?
Answer:
The Seva implies all those tasks that cause benefit to humanity in some form or other.

Question 36.
Which man can perform Seva in Sikhism?
Answer:
Who is blessed by the Absolute and in whom the True Name resides.

Question 37.
What is the best way to get the Absolute according to Sikhism?
Answer:
Simran is considered to be the best way to get the Absolute.

Question 38.
What is the importance of Simran in Sikhism?
Answer:
Simran saves from sufferings.

Question 39.
Which are the three principles in Sikhism that ought to he followed by each Sikh?
Answer:
Kirat Kami, Naam Japna and Wand Chhakna.

Question 40.
What is meant hy ‘Kirat’?
Answer:
Kirat means to earn money honestly.

Question 41.
Who started the Kirtan system in Sikhism?
Answer:
Gum Nanak Dev Ji started the Kirtan system in Sikhism.

Question 42.
What is meant by ‘Kirtan’?
Answer:
Kirtan is that form of singing which is sung in praise of God.

Question 43.
What is significance of Kirtan in Sikhism?
Answer:
The person who listens or recites Kirtan enables him or her to escape the cycle of transmigration.

Question 44.
What is meant by ‘Ardaas’?
Answer:
Ardaas implies a prayer or request offered to the Supreme.

Question 45.
Is there any fixed time for the Ardaas in Sikhism?
Answer:
No.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Question 46.
What is the significance of Ardaas in Sikhism?
Answer:
Ardaas removes the Haumai (ego) of a person.

Fill in the blanks:

1. Japji Sahib is read out in the ………………
Answer:
Morning (dawn).

2. …………….. bani must be read out in the evening.
Answer:
Rahiras Sahib.

3. The beginning lines of Japji Sahib is ……………..
Answer:
Mul Mantra.

4. According to Sikhism, God is ……………..
Answer:
one.

5. According to Sikhism, God has ……………. forms.
Answer:
two.

6. Absolute (Parmatma) is considered to be the …………….. in Sikhism.
Answer:
Super power.

7. There are ……………… basic principles of Sikhism.
Answer:
three.

8. Kirat means ………………. according to Sikhism.
Answer:
Honest Labour.

9. The first basic principle of Sikhism is ……………….
Answer:
Nam Japna (Remembering Divine Name).

10. The foundation of Sangat Institution was laid by ………………..
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

11. Partaking the langar (food) while sitting in a row is called ……………
Answer:
Pangat.

12. The word Hukam means ………………. of the absolute (God).
Answer:
order.

13. Haumai is a ……………… disease.
Answer:
chronic.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

14. ……………….. started the practice of Kirtan in Sikhism.
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

15. Special importance has been given to ………………. in Sikh philosophy.
Answer:
Seva.

16. Sikhism gave the message of ………………
Answer:
univesal brotherhood of mankind.

17. ………………… Pyaras must be present during the initiating ceremony of Amrit.
Answer:
Five.

18. ………………. implies a prayer or request offered to the supreme in Sikhism.
Answer:
Ardas.

True Or False:

1. Japji Sahib is read out at the time of dawn.
Answer:
True

2. There is a ban on using narcotics in the Sikhism.
Answer:
True

3. Japji Sahib starts with Mul Mantra.
Answer:
True

4. Gurbani stresses that God is one.
Answer:
True

5. Gurbani tells that the world can not be destroyed.
Answer:
False

6. No importance is given to Nam Simran in the Sikhism.
Answer:
False

7. Guru Amar Das Ji started the institutions of Sangat and Pangat.
Answer:
False

8. According to Sikhism, Hukam means commandment or order of the
Answer:
True

9. Haumai is a chronic disease, according to Sikh philosophy.
Answer:
True

10. Guru Nanak Dev Ji started the practice of Kirtan.
Answer:
True

11. The presence of Panj Payaras is must during Amritpan. (baptism)
Answer:
True

12. There is no fixed time for Ardas in Sikhism.
Answer:
True

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 9 The Sikh Way of Life

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. Which one of the following Bani is not read at the time of dawn?
(a) Japji Sahib
(b) Jaap Sahib
(c) Rahiras Sahib
(d) Anand Sahib
Answer:
(c) Rahiras Sahib

2. Which one of the following Bani is read at night before sleeping?
(a) Chaupai Sahib
(b) Anand Sahib
(c) Rahiras Sahib
(d) Sohella
Answer:
(d) Sohella

3. Which one of the following is a false fact?
(a) A Gursikh can worship any god or goddess
(b) The Sikhs should pray for blessings of Waheguru before starting any work
(c) The Sikhs should not consume narcotics
(d) Waheguru Ji Ka Khalsa, Waheguru Ji Ki Fateh
Answer:
(a) A Gursikh can worship any god or goddess

4. Which of the following Bani contains Mul Mantra in it?
(a) Jaap Sahib
(b) Japji Sahib
(c) Anand Sahib
(d) Rahiras Sahib
Answer:
(b) Japji Sahib

5. According to Sikhism which one of the following statement in relation to Almighty God is Wrong?
(a) Gods are many
(b) He is Nirguna
(c) He is omnipresent
(d) He is full of greatness
Answer:
(a) Gods are many

6. How many basic principles of Sikhism are there?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

7. What is the first basic principle of Sikhism?
(a) Nam Japna
(b) Kirat Kami
(c) Wand Chhakna
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Nam Japna

8. Who started the institution of Sangat and Pangat.
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Angad Dev Ji
(c) Guru Amar Das Ji
(d) Guru Ram Das Ji
Answer:
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji

9. Who started the Kirtan System in Sikhism?
(a) Guru Har Rai Ji
(b) Guru Har Krishan Ji
(c) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji
Answer:
(c) Guru Nanak Dev Ji

10. What is the minimum number of Payaras needed at the time of Amrit Chhakauna (baptising)?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(d) 5

11. When can a Ardaas be performed in Sikhism?
(a) At morning
(b) At evening
(c) Before Sleeping
(d) Any time
Answer:
(d) Any time

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Religion Book Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Religion Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

Long Answer Type Questions:

Examine critically the Four Noble Truths of Buddhism.
Or
Explain Four Noble Truths of Buddhism.
Or
Explain the Four Social Virtues of Buddhism.
Or
What are the Four Noble Truths of Buddhism? Explain.
Or
Describe the Four Noble Truths of Buddhism.
Or
Write about the Four Noble Truths of Buddhism.
Answer:
The Four Noble Truths form the basis of Buddhism. These truths had been acquired by Lord Buddha through his own life’s experience. These Four Noble Truths are philosophy in themselves. These are also called the Four Aryan Truths because they are immortal and are based on truth. Lord Buddha was of the belief that man could get permanent relief from his sorrows if he tread on them and could attain Nirvana. To follow these, man does not necessarily have to be a priest and do not need to indulge in other formal rituals. Leading a pious life is its basic foundation.

The Four Noble Truths are as follows :

1. Life is full of suffering.
2. There is a cause of suffering.
3. Sufferings can be stopped.
4. There is a way to stop sufferings.

1. Life is full of Sufferings: According to Lord Buddha, suffering is the first and absolute truth. No person can deny that this life is full of suffering. Any person who takes birth in the world is bound to suffer from the disease, old age and death. It is great suffering. Besides these, there are several other sufferings faced by man. As an example, if a man does not achieve what he desires, he is depressed. Some are distressed because of poverty while some others suffer even when they are rich because they desire more riches.

Some suffer because they do not have children while others suffer because they have too many children. If some one is hungry, he is distressed and on 147 the other hand, overeating also causes suffering. Some are distressed on being separated from a beloved while some suffer when they see the face of their enemy.

What man considers happiness is actually the cause of suffering because happiness is short lived. Infact suffering is an important part of one’s life. It accompanies man from birth till death. According to Lord Buddha, the death is not the end to sufferings because death is not the end of life. It is just the end of the story. Old virtues are attached to new life. In brief, life is a long journey of sufferings.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

2. There is a Cause of Sufferings : The second Noble Truth of Lord Buddha is that there is a cause of sufferings. Each incident has one or the other reason. It is not possible that there is no reason for any incident. Each incident is related to a past event or circumstances due to the presence of which it occurs and due to the absence of which it does not occur. There is no consequence without a cause. Now the question arises as to what is the cause of human suffering.

According to Lord Buddha desire and illiteracy are the main sources of all sufferings. It is because of desire that we take birth again and again and suffer a lot. Desire is the cause of suffering because where there is desire, there the human being is unsatisfied. If he is satisfied, then there is no desire.

There is desire throughout life. It does not die even after death and through the next birth it rejuvenates itself with double effort. This desire is of three kinds

  • desire to enjoy
  • desire to live
  • desire to undo. Illiteracy employs lack of knowledge.

It is for this reason that man remains gripped in the vicious cycle of transmigration and there is no end to his sufferings. It is lack of knowledge that man supposes this life, world, wealth and family as permanent whereas all this is mortal. Whatever takes birth, dies one day.

3. Sufferings can be Stopped : The third Noble Truth is that these sufferings can be stopped. There is no doubt about the fact that the sufferings of life are based on the harsh realities. But it does not mean that Buddhist philosophy is pessimistic. Actually this acts like a lamp for a suffering man. It says that sufferings.can be stopped. As mentioned above, every suffering has a cause. If one can overcome these causes, then one can obtain freedom from all sufferings.

The main cause for desire is suffering. If one can get rid of desire completely one can get rid of one’s sufferings. To put an end to desire means to put an end to one’s lusts and greed. By doing so, man can obtain freedom from all his sufferings and attain salvation.

4. There is a way to stop Sufferings : The fourth Noble Truth of Lord Buddha is that there is a way to stop sufferings. According to him, both Pravirti (the path of consumption) and Nivriti (the path of ascetism) are incorrect because they are based on extremes. According to the path of Pravriti a man should not kill his desires, rather he should fulfil them. According to Buddha, the fulfilment of desires does not put an end to it, rather it increases day by day. Each fulfilment of desires acts like adding fuel to fire. Desires only lead to the attainment of temporary happiness which only leads to sufferings in turn.

On the other hand, according to the path of Nivriti, man has to suppress his desires. According to Lord Buddha, the suppression of desires does not mean that desires stop following man. They keep boiling inside and blaze out when given an opportunity. Besides this, the suppression of desires leads to several mental and physical sufferings.

Hence Lord Buddha has called both the paths incorrect. He has propagated in favour of the adoption of the Middle Path. By treading on the Middle Path, the desires slowly come under one’s control and one acquires extreme peace. Lord Buddha’s Middle Path is based on the eight virtues for which reason, it is also called the Ashta Marga.

These eight virtues are

  1. Right View
  2. Right Intention
  3. Right Speech
  4. Right Action
  5. Right Livelihood
  6. Right Effort
  7. Right Mindfulness
  8. Right Concentration.

In brief, man can acquire freedom from sufferings by following the Middle Path and can attain salvation. Harbans Singh and L.M. Joshi have rightly remarked, “The four holy truths thus teach that there is suffering and that there is a way leading beyond suffering.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

Question 2.
Describe the Ashta Marga of Buddhism.
Or
Examine critically the Ashtang Marga of Buddhism.
Or
“Basic teachings of Buddhism are incorperated in Ashtang Marga. Elucidate.
Or
Discuss in brief but meaningful Ashta Marga of Lord Buddha.
Or
“Ashta Marga is the key to Buddhism.” Elucidate.
Or
Discuss the Ashtang Marga of Buddhism.
Or
In Buddhism the key to way of life is middle way which is realized through Ashtang Marga. Explain.
Or
Discuss in detail the Ashtang Marga.
Or
Write about the Ashtang Marga in Buddhism.
Or
Which way has been told by Lord Buddha to stop sufferings? Explain its features and importance.
Or
What do you know about Madhya Marga in Buddhism.
Or
Ashta Marga is the basis of Buddhist ethics.
Or
Write a note on Ashta Marga of Buddhism.
Or
Write a detailed note on the Ashta Marga of Buddhism.
Or
Write about the Ashtang Marga of Buddhism.
Or
Describe the Middle Path of Buddhism.
Or
What is the meaning of Ashta Marga? Answer in brief.
Or
Describe the way of Nirvana according to Buddhism.
Or
Explain briefly about Ashta Marga.
Or
What is Ashtang Marga of Buddhism? Discuss.
Answer:
Lord Buddha inspired people to follow the Eightfold Path to obtain peace by putting an end to sufferings, acquisition of wisdom, knowledge and attainment of Nirvana. According to him, both the paths of consumption and asceticism Eire incorrect because they are based on extremes. A life spent in great luxury or spent in great deprivation are both painful and futile. Lord Buddha had seen both, the aspects of worldly consumption and hard meditation in his lifetime.

He said that one could not overcome one’s desires by following any of these paths. One should overcome desires with control. Hence, Lord Buddha discovered the Eightfold Path. Because it is the way between the two extremes, hence it is also called the Middle Path. This path tells us how we should lead our moral and religious life. The following are the eight paths

  1. Right View
  2. Right Intention
  3. Right Speech
  4. Right Action
  5. Right Livelihood
  6. Right Effort
  7. Right Mindfulness
  8. Right Concentration.

1. Right View: Right View 14 the foundation of moral life. It is also called the true knowledge. If man’s ideas are incorrect, then his life is surrounded by sufferings. He can never attain salvation and keep wandering in the cycle of transmigration. Lack of knowledge is responsible for this. According to Lord Buddha, belief in the Four Nobel Truths is the true belief because it opens the path to put an end to the sufferings.

2. Right Intention: According to Lord Buddha, man’s character should be honest. Determination to perform good deeds is called true character. Man should always stay away from worldly pleasures. He should lead a life in the world in a manner just as the lotus grows in a puddle of mud. Man should adopt a feeling of kindness and non-violence towards others.

3. Right Speech : According to Lord Buddha, man’s speech should always be honest and sweet. Words should be such that they should not hurt other’s feelings. Even while punishing a criminal, we should observe respect towards him. We should stay away from all kinds of lies, criticism, insult and wrong testimony. Sweet words render peace to the heart on one hand, and mutual love among men on the other.

4. Right Action : Right Action means to perform the right deeds. According to Lord Buddha, there are two kinds of deeds (a) evil deeds (6) pious deeds. Those deeds which cause man to take a rebirth are called evil deeds. Whereas those deeds which help a man to get relief from the cycle of transmigration are called pious deeds. Lord Buddha emphasises on sacred deeds by following Ahimsa, not indulging in stealing, speaking the truth, not consuming intoxicants and escape sexual pleasures. Following these four pious truths is the foundation of pious,Jdeeds.

5. Right Livelihood : Lord Buddha has emphasised upon Right Livelihood. He believed that one should earn one’s livelihood honestly. We should not earn such a livelihood which employs the use of betrayal, violence, stealing and corruption etc. The trade of weapons, intoxicants, flesh and humans are not means to earn the Right Livelihood because they are the cause of all human sufferings.

6. Right Effort: Right Effort helps to control the rise of vices. It means that the evil thoughts that rise in a man’s heart should be brought to an end and the mind should be taken in the right direction. According to Lord Buddha one should always cross-examine one’s mind and should always be alert towards one’s thoughts. A moment’s carelessness can cause an evil thought to enter our mind and man can fall into the pit of vices. Hence we should introspect our vices and should put in an effort to generate good thoughts.

7. Right Mindfulness : Right Mindfulness is the foundation of Buddhist yoga and dhyana. It means that one should be mindful towards the actions of one’s body and heart. If mindfulness is right, good thoughts and good behaviour flourish on their own. According to Lord Buddha, man should always observe the four sacred truths. He should be alert towards physical insanctity and mental vices.

8. Right Concentration : According to Lord Buddha right concentration can help a man attain salvation. Hence, he has emphasised on Right Concentration (samadhi). Hence, it is important to transcend four stages. In the first stage, man should keep one’s heart pure and should always be occupied in concentration, to acquire happiness. In the second stage, all the doubts of man are cleared and he experiences inner peace and happiness.

In the third stage, pleasure comes to an end and the heart rises above all happiness and suffering. This is called nirvikar dhyana. There is nothing left in the fourth stage and the living being reaches the zero stage i.e. it attains Nirvana. This is the last stage of concentration. Dr. S.B. Shastri has aptly remarked “This noble Eightfold path forms the keynote of Buddha’s teachings for emancipating oneself from the ills of life.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

Question 3.
Which are the Four Noble Truths of Buddhism? Describe Ashta Marga.
Or
Discuss in brief but meaningful the Ashtang Marga and Four Noble Truths of Buddhism.
Answer:
(a) Four Noble Truths : The Four Noble Truths of Buddhism are as follows :

  1. Life is full of sufferings.
  2. There is a cause of sufferings.
  3. Sufferings can be stopped.
  4. There is a way to stop sufferings.

Lord Buddha inspired people to follow the Eightfold Path to obtain peace by putting an end to sufferings, acquisition of wisdom, knowledge and attainment of Nirvana. According to him, both the paths of consumption and asceticism Eire incorrect because they are based on extremes. A life spent in great luxury or spent in great deprivation are both painful and futile. Lord Buddha had seen both, the aspects of worldly consumption and hard meditation in his lifetime.

He said that one could not overcome one’s desires by following any of these paths. One should overcome desires with control. Hence, Lord Buddha discovered the Eightfold Path. Because it is the way between the two extremes, hence it is also called the Middle Path. This path tells us how we should lead our moral and religious life. The following are the eight paths

  1. Right View
  2. Right Intention
  3. Right Speech
  4. Right Action
  5. Right Livelihood
  6. Right Effort
  7. Right Mindfulness
  8. Right Concentration.

1. Right View: Right View 14 the foundation of moral life. It is also called the true knowledge. If man’s ideas are incorrect, then his life is surrounded by sufferings. He can never attain salvation and keep wandering in the cycle of transmigration. Lack of knowledge is responsible for this. According to Lord Buddha, belief in the Four Nobel Truths is the true belief because it opens the path to put an end to the sufferings.

2. Right Intention: According to Lord Buddha, man’s character should be honest. Determination to perform good deeds is called true character. Man should always stay away from worldly pleasures. He should lead a life in the world in a manner just as the lotus grows in a puddle of mud. Man should adopt a feeling of kindness and non-violence towards others.

3. Right Speech : According to Lord Buddha, man’s speech should always be honest and sweet. Words should be such that they should not hurt other’s feelings. Even while punishing a criminal, we should observe respect towards him. We should stay away from all kinds of lies, criticism, insult and wrong testimony. Sweet words render peace to the heart on one hand, and mutual love among men on the other.

4. Right Action : Right Action means to perform the right deeds. According to Lord Buddha, there are two kinds of deeds (a) evil deeds (6) pious deeds. Those deeds which cause man to take a rebirth are called evil deeds. Whereas those deeds which help a man to get relief from the cycle of transmigration are called pious deeds. Lord Buddha emphasises on sacred deeds by following Ahimsa, not indulging in stealing, speaking the truth, not consuming intoxicants and escape sexual pleasures. Following these four pious truths is the foundation of pious,Jdeeds.

5. Right Livelihood : Lord Buddha has emphasised upon Right Livelihood. He believed that one should earn one’s livelihood honestly. We should not earn such a livelihood which employs the use of betrayal, violence, stealing and corruption etc. The trade of weapons, intoxicants, flesh and humans are not means to earn the Right Livelihood because they are the cause of all human sufferings.

6. Right Effort: Right Effort helps to control the rise of vices. It means that the evil thoughts that rise in a man’s heart should be brought to an end and the mind should be taken in the right direction. According to Lord Buddha one should always cross-examine one’s mind and should always be alert towards one’s thoughts. A moment’s carelessness can cause an evil thought to enter our mind and man can fall into the pit of vices. Hence we should introspect our vices and should put in an effort to generate good thoughts.

7. Right Mindfulness : Right Mindfulness is the foundation of Buddhist yoga and dhyana. It means that one should be mindful towards the actions of one’s body and heart. If mindfulness is right, good thoughts and good behaviour flourish on their own. According to Lord Buddha, man should always observe the four sacred truths. He should be alert towards physical insanctity and mental vices.

8. Right Concentration : According to Lord Buddha right concentration can help a man attain salvation. Hence, he has emphasised on Right Concentration (samadhi). Hence, it is important to transcend four stages. In the first stage, man should keep one’s heart pure and should always be occupied in concentration, to acquire happiness. In the second stage, all the doubts of man are cleared and he experiences inner peace and happiness. In the third stage, pleasure comes to an end and the heart rises above all happiness and suffering. This is called nirvikar dhyana.

There is nothing left in the fourth stage and the living being reaches the zero stage i.e. it attains Nirvana. This is the last stage of concentration. Dr. S.B. Shastri has aptly remarked, “This noble Eightfold path forms the keynote of Buddha’s teachings for emancipating oneself from the ills of life.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-1):

Question 1.
What do you know about Four Noble Truths of Buddhism?
Or
Four Noble Truths of Buddhism.
Answer:
The core of Buddhism are the Four Noble Truths or Arya Satyas.

  • The world is full of sorrows. Birth, illness, old age and death are the chief causes of sorrow,
  • Desires and attachment are the causes of sorrows. Due to these desires man is caught in the cycle of birth and death,
  • Desires or sorrows can be ended.
  • Desires can be overcome by following the Eightfold Path.

Question 2.
Eightfold Path or Middle Path.
Answer:
Mahatma Buddha guided the people to follow the eightfold path to attain mokhsa. This path was called Madhya Marga because it is the middle path between meditation and worldly affairs. The Eightfold path includes

  • Right Action
  • Right Thought
  • Right Belief
  • Right Living
  • Right Speech
  • Right Efforts
  • Right Recollection
  • Right Meditation.

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-2):

Question 1.
What are the Four Noble Truths of Buddhism?
Answer:
The Four Noble Truths form the basis of Buddhism. These truths had been acquired by Lord Buddha through his own life’s experience. These Four Noble Truths are a philosophy in themselves. These are also called the Four Aryan Truths because they are immortal and are based on truth. Lord Buddha was of the belief that man could get a permanent relief from his sorrows if he tread on them and could attain Nirvana. To follow these, man do not necessarily have to be a priest and do not need to indulge in other formal rituals. Leading a pious life is its basic foundation.

The Four Noble Truths are as follows :

  1. Life is full of sufferings.
  2. There is a cause of sufferings.
  3. Sufferings can be stopped.
  4. There is a way to stop sufferings.

Question 2.
According to Lord Buddha is life full of sufferings?
Answer:
According to Lord Buddha, suffering is the first and absolute truth. No person can deny that this life is full of sufferings. Any person who takes birth in the world is bound to suffer from disease, old age and death. It is a great suffering. Besides these, there are several other sufferings faced by man,

As an example, if a man does not achieve what he desires, he is depressed. Some are distressed because of poverty while some others suffer even when they are rich because they desire more riches. Some suffer because they do not have children while others, suffer because.they have too many children.

If some one is hungry, he is distressed and on the other hand, overeating also causes suffering. Some are distressed on beirig separated from a beloved while some suffer when they see the face of their enemy. What man considers happiness is actually the cause of suffering because happiness is short lived. Infact suffering is an important part of one’s life. It accompanies man from birth till death. According to Lord Buddha, the death is not the end to sufferings because death is not the end of life. It is just the end of the story. Old virtues are attached to new life. In brief, life is a long journey of sufferings.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

Question 3.
According to Lord Buddha is there a cause of sufferings?
Answer:
The second Noble Truth of Lord Buddha is that there is a cause of sufferings. Each incident has one or the other reason. It is not possible that there is no reason for any incident. Each incident is related to a past event or circumstances due to the presence of which it occurs and due to the absence of which it does not occur. There is no consequence without a cause. Now the question arises as to what is the cause of human suffering.

According to Lord Buddha desire and illiteracy are the main sources of all sufferings. It is because of desire that we take birth again and again and suffer a lot. Desire is the cause of suffering because where there is desire, there the human being is unsatisfied. If he is satisfied, then there is no desire. There is desire throughout life. It does not die even after death and through the next birth it rejuvenates itself with double effort. This desire is of three kinds

  • desire to enjoy
  • desire to live
  • desire to undo.

Illiteracy employs lack of knowledge. It is for this reason that man remains gripped in the vicious circle of transmigration and there is no end to his sufferings. It is lack of knowledge that man supposes this life, world, wealth and family as permanent whereas all this is mortal. Whatever takes birth, dies one day.

Question 4.
According to Lord Buddha can sufferings be stopped?
Answer:
The third Noble Truth is that these sufferings can be stopped. There is no doubt about the fact that the sufferings of life are based on the harsh realities. But it does not mean that Buddhist philosophy is pessimistic. Actually this acts like a lamp for a suffering man. It says that sufferings can be stopped. As mentioned above, every suffering has a cause. If one can overcome these causes, then one can obtain freedom from all sufferings. The main cause for desire is suffering. If one can get rid of desire completely one can get rid of one’s sufferings. To put an end to desire means to put an end to one’s lusts and greed. By doing so, man can obtain freedom from all his sufferings and attain salvation.

Question 5.
According to Lord Buddha is there a way to stop sufferings?
Answer:
The fourth Noble Truth of Lord Buddha is that there is a way to stop sufferings. According to him, both Pravirti (the path of consumption) and Nivriti (the path of ascetism) are incorrect because they are based on extremes. According to the path of Pravriti a man should not kill his desires, rather he should fulfil them. According to Buddha, the fulfilment of desires does not put an end to it, rather it increases day by day.

Each fulfilment of desires acts like adding fuel to fire. Dfesires only lead to the attainment of temporary happiness which only leads to sufferings in turn. On the other hand, according to the path of Nivriti, man has to suppress his desires. According to Lord Buddha, the suppression of desires does not mean that desires stop following man.

They keep boiling inside and blaze out when given an opportunity. Besides this, the suppression of desires leads to several mental and physical sufferings. Hence Lord Buddha has called both the paths incorrect. He has propagated in favour of the adoption of the Middle Path. By treading on the Middle Path, the desires slowly come under one’s control and one acquires extreme peace. Lord Buddha’s Middle Path is based on the eight virtues for which reason, it is also called the Ashta Marga.

These eight virtues are

  1. Right View
  2. Right Intention
  3. Right Speech
  4. Right Action
  5. Right Livelihood
  6. Right Effort
  7. Right Mindfulness
  8. Right Concentration.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

Question 6.
What do you understand by Middle Path or Eightfold Path of Lord Buddha?
Or
What is the Astha Marga of Buddhism? Elucidate.
Or
What is Ashtang Marga of Buddhism?
Answer:
Lord Buddha preached that men should tread on the Eightfold Path. The Eightfold Path is also called the Middle Path because it was the path in between strict penance and a luxurious life. The following were the principles of the Eightfold Path :

  • Right Action : Man should perform pious deeds. He should keep away from stealing, luxury and killing of creatures. He should love all mankind.
  • Right Thought: All men should have the right thoughts. They should keep away from all worldly evils and futile customs and traditions.
  • Right Belief : Man should have a strong belief that by sacrificing all his desires he can put an end to all his sufferings. They should not deviate from the Eightfold Path.
  • Right Living : All men should have the right living. They should not indulge in unscrupulous activities.
  • Right Speech: Man’s speech should be pious and sweet. He should not criticize anyone nor should talk evil and should always speak the truth.
  • Right Efforts : Man should make the right efforts to condemn evil deeds and work for the welfare of others.
  • Right Recollection: Man should spendhis life in right recollection and lead a simple life.
  • Right Meditation : Man should not think about the vices and should adopt right meditation.

Question 7.
Explain any two Margas of Buddhism.
Answer:
(1) Right Speech. According of Lord Buddha, man’s speech should always be honest and sweet. Words should be such that they should not hurt other’s feelings. Even while punishing a criminal, we should observe respect towards him. We should stay away from all kinds of lies, criticism, insult and wrong testimony. Sweet words render peace to the heart on one hand, and mutual love among men on the other.

(2) Right Action. Right Action means to perform the right deeds. According to Lord Buddha, there are two kinds of deeds

  • evil deeds
  • pious deeds

Those deeds which cause man to take a rebirth are called evil deeds. Whereas those deeds which help a man to get relief from the cycle of transmigration are called pious deeds. Lord Buddha emphasises on sacred deeds by following Ahimsa, not indulging in stealing, speaking the truth, not consuming intoxicants and escape sexual pleasures. Following these four pious truths is the foundation of pious deeds.

Answer in One Word to One Sentence:

Question 1.
Buddlhism believed in how mainy Noble Truths?
Answer:
Four.

Question 2.
State any one Noble Ttuth of Huddhisno.
Answer:
Life iti full of sufferings.

Question 3.
According to Buddhism how can sufferings be put to an end?
Answer:
Sufferings can be put to an end by treading on the Ashta Marga.

Question 4.
Who started Ashta Marga?
Or
What is Ashta Marga?
Answer:
Mahatma Buddha.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

Question 5.
What do you mean by Ashta Marga?
Answer:
Ashta Marga means those eight paths, treading on which a man could Nirvana.

Question 6.
By what other name is the Ashta Marga known?
Answer:
Middle Path.

Question 7.
How many parts are of Ashta Marga and what is its another name?
Answer:

  • There are eight parts of Ashta Marga.
  • Its another name was Middle Path.

Question 8.
What is the foundation of moral life according to Buddhism?
Answer:
Right View.

Question 9.
What is ‘Right View’ in Ashta Marga?
Answer:
Four Noble Truths are Right View in Ashta Marga.

Question 10.
Which path should necessarily be followed to attain salvation according to Buddhism?
Answer:
It is necessary to follow the Ashta Marga to attain salvation according to Buddhism.

Question 11.
To which religion is Ashta Marga associated?
Answer:
Ashta Marga is associated to Buddhism.

Question 12.
How many types of Karmas are there according to Buddhism?
Answer:
Two types.

Question 13.
Name two types of Karmas according to Buddhism.
Answer:
The two types of Karmas according to Buddhism are :

  • Holy (Punya) Karma,
  • Unholy (Papa) Karma.

Fill in the Blanks:

1. Buddhism believed in …………….. Noble Truths.
Answer:
Four.

2. Four Noble Truths are also known as Four …………..
Answer:
Aryan Truths.

3. According to Buddhism, life is full of ………….
Answer:
sufferings.

4. According to Buddhism, desire is of …………. kinds.
Answer:
three.

5. Illiteracy means ………….
Answer:
lack of knowledge.

6. Ashta Marga is related to ………….
Answer:
Buddhism.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 7 Ashta Marga of Buddhism

7. Ashta Marga (Eight Fold Path) is also called ………….
Answer:
Middle Path.

8. According to Buddhism, …………. is the foundation of moral life.
Answer:
Right view.

9. According to Lord Buddha, man’s character should be ………….
Answer:
honest.

10. According tb Buddhism, deeds are of …………. kinds.
Answer:
two.

11. Right …………. is the foundation of Buddhist yoga and dhyana.
Answer:
Mindfulness

Ture Or False:

1. The four Noble Truths are the basic of the Buddhism.
Answer:
True

2. Mahatma Buddha told that suffering is the first and absolute truth.
Answer:
True

3. According to Buddhism, desire is of five types.
Answer:
False

4. Suffering can never be stopped as considered by Buddhism.
Answer:
False

5. The Eight Fold Path is associated with Jainism.
Answer:
False

6. According to Buddha religion, Karmas are of two types.
Answer:
True

7. According to Buddha religion, Right effort helps to control the rise of vices in a man’s heart.
Answer:
True

8. According to Lord Buddha, the Eight Fold Path is must to end the sufferings.
Answer:
True

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. Buddhism believed in how many Noble truths?
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 8
Answer:
(b) 4

2. Which is the first noble Truth in Buddhism?
(a) There is a cause of sufferings
(b) Life is full of sufferings
(c) Sufferings can be stopped
(d) There is a way to stop sufferings
Answer:
(b) Life is full of sufferings

3. Buddhism believed in how many paths?
(a) 5
(b) 6
(c) 7
(d) 8
Answer:
(d) 8

4. The Eight Fold Path is associated to which religion?
(a) Jainism
(b) Buddhism
(c) Hinduism
(d) Islam
Answer:
(b) Buddhism

5. By what other name is the Ashta Marga (The Eight Fold Path) known as?
(a) Peace Path
(b) Middle Path
(c) Parviti Path
(d) Nivriti Path
Answer:
(b) Middle Path

6. Which of the following path is the foundation of Buddhist Yoga and Dhyana?
(a) Right effort
(b) Right Intention
(c) Right View
(d) Right Mindfulness
Answer:
(d) Right Mindfulness

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Religion Book Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Religion Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Describe the Editorial Scheme of Sri Guru Granth Sahib adopted by Sri Guru Arjan Dev Ji.
Or
Discuss the Editing Art of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
Who compiled, how compiled, when compiled and where was compiled Guru Granth Sahib? Discuss.
Or
Who and how did the editing work of Sri Guru Granth Sahib? Discuss.
Or
Give number of the Sikh Gurus whose composition are included in the Guru Granth Sahib. Write a note on the Editorial Scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Examine critically the Editorial Scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Discuss the history of Compilation and Editing Scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Describe the Editing Art of Guru Arjan Dev Ji in the context of editing Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Write a note on the Editorial Scheme of Guru Arjan Dev on the basis of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Describe about the editing of Gurubani.

Or
Write a brief history of the compilation of the Guru Granth Sahib. Give the number of musical measures under which hymns are included in the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Write a brief history of the compilation of the Guru Granth Sahib. Give names of any five Bhaktas, whose hymns are included in the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Throw light on the history of the compilation of the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Sahib? What do you know about its editorial scheme?
Or
Guru Arjan Dev Ji made a significant contribution to the development of the Sikh faith by providing it with a scripture. Discuss.
Or
Write about the editorial scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Write a brief history of the compilation of the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Why was Adi Granth compiled? Also, explain its importance.
Or
Write a note on Guru Arjan Dev’s editing of the Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Throw light on the editorial scheme of Guru Granth Sahib.
Or
Discuss the contents of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
Describe the compilation and editing Art of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji.
Answer:
The compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib in 1604 A.D. was undoubtedly the greatest achievement of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Its main objective was to give a new direction not only to the Sikhs but to the entire humanity. Its compilation work was done by Bhai Gurdas Ji under the supervision of Guru Arjan Sahib. It includes the Bani of the first 5 Gurus, 15 Bhagats and Sufi Saints, 11 Bhatts and 4 devotees of the Guru’s house without any caste or religious discrimination.

Guru Arjan Dev Ji made the greatest contribution in the Bani of Adi Granth Sahib Ji. The Bani of Adi Granth Sahib has been divided according to 31 Ragas. The Bani is full of Shabads of admiration for God. It holds no place for vain customs and superstitions. The first illumination of

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth Img 1

the Adi Granth Sahib was done in Amritsar on 16th August, 1604 A.D. and Baba Buddha Ji was appointed as its first Granthi. In 1706 A.D. Guru Gobind Singh Ji prepared the second edition of Adi Granth Sahib at Damdama Sahib. He included in it 116 Shabads and Salokas of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji. It was compiled by Bhai Mani Singh Ji under the supervision of Guru Gobind Singh Ji. Adi Granth Sahib, thus have the Banis of 37 great personalities. On 6th October, 1708 A.D. Guru Gobind Singh Ji honoured Adi Granth Sahib Ji with the name of Guru Granth Sahib Ji.

The Guru Granth Sahib Ji holds the same respect for the Sikhs, as does the Bible for the Christians, the Quran for the Muslims and Vedas and Gita for the Hindus. In reality, it is not just a sacred religious scripture of the Sikhs but is an invaluable heritage for the entire humanity.

I. Editiorial Scheme

1. Need for its Compilation : There were many reasons responsible for the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib. During the time of Guru Arjan Dev Ji, Sikhism was spreading very fast. It was essential to compile a religious scripture to guide them. Secondly, Prithia, Guru Arjan Dev Ji’s elder brother wanted to acquire the Gurgaddi. With this objective, he started propagating his own teachings in the name of the Bani of Guru Ji. Guru Arjan Sahib wanted to put the Bani in record in its pure form, so that the Sikhs had no doubt.

Thirdly, if the Sikhs wanted to establish their own independent state, it was essential for them to have their own religious scriptures. Fourthly, Guru Amar Das Ji also encouraged the Sikhs to read the divine Bani of Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib says in the Anand Sahib, Come, ye beloved disciples of the Guru, sing ye the true word. Sing ye the word of the Guru, which is the most sublime of all. They, on whom is the Lord’s Grace, cherish it in the mind.

So drink in ye the Lord’s Nectar and be ever imbued with His love and dwell on the lord the support of the earth. Says Nanak, “Sing ye ever the word of the True Guru.” Due to these reasons, Guru Arjan Dev Ji felt the need for the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib.

2, Collection of Hymns: Guru Arjan Dev Ji used various sources for writing the Bani. The Bani of the first three Gurus—Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Guru Angad Dev Ji and Guru Amar Das Ji was with the eldest son of Guru Amar Das Ji i.e. Baba Mohan Ji. To compile the Bani, Guru Arjan Dev Ji first sent Bhai Gurdas Ji and then Baba Buddha Ji to Baba Mohan Ji but they were not successful in their objective. After this, Guru Sahib himself went from Amritsar to Goindwal Sahib barefooted. Impressed by the humility of Guru Ji, Baba Mohan Ji gave away the entire Bani to Guru Ji.

Guru Arjan Dev Ji already had the Bani of Guru Ram Das Ji with him. Guru Sahib included his own Bani in it. After this Guru Sahib called upon the devotees of Hindu Bhagats and Muslim Saints and asked them to recite the hymns of their saints correctly. The hymns of only those Bhagats and Saints were included in the Guru Granth Sahib which were similar to the Bani of the Gurus. The works of Kahna, Chhajju, Shah Hussain and Pilu were rejected.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth Img 2

3. Compilation of Adi Granth Sahib : For the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib, Guru Arjan Sahib was on a look out for a silent and beautiful place towards the south of Amritsar. At this place Guru Sahib got the Ramsar tank built. Along the banks of this sarovar, under a pipal tree, the Guru Ji got a tent erected. Guru Arjan Dev Ji sat here to compile the work of Adi Granth Sahib.

Guru Arjan Dev Ji kept dictating the hymns and Bhai Gurdas Ji kept writing. This great work came to an end in August, 1604 A.D. The first illumination of Adi Granth Sahib Ji was done in Harmandir Sahib Ji in Amritsar and Baba Buddha Ji was appointed as its First Head Granthi.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

4. Contributors in the Granth Sahib : The Adi Granth Sahib is a vast Granth. The contributors in the Granth Sahib can be divided into four classes :

(a) Sikh Gurus : The greatest contribution towards the Adi Granth Sahib Ji is made by the Sikh Gurus. It consists of 976 Sabads of Guru Nanak Dev Ji, 62 Sabads of Guru Angad Dev Ji, 907 Sabads of Guru Amar Das Ji, 679 Sabads of Guru Ram Das Ji and 2216 Sabads of Guru Arjan Dev Ji. Thereafter, during the time of Guru Gobind Singh Ji, 116 Sabads and Salokas of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji were included in it.

(b) Bhagats and Saints : Adi Granth Sahib Ji includes the Bani of 15 Hindu Bhagats and Saints. Important among these Bhagats and Saints are Bhagat Kabir Ji, Sheikh Farid Ji, Guru NamdevJi, Ravidas Ji, Bhagat Dhanna Ji, Bhagat Ramanand Ji and Bhagat Jaidev Ji. Of them all, the maximum number of Sabads, are those of Kabir Ji i.e. 541 Sabads. ‘

(c) Bhatts : The Adi Granth Sahib Ji has the hymns of 11 Bhatts. The total number of these hymns is 125. Some popular Bhatts are Nal, Bal, Jalap, Bhikha and Harbans.

(d) Others : Besides the above great personalities, the Ballads of Satta, Balwand, Mardana and Sunder are also included in the Adi Granth Sahib Ji.

5. Arrangement of the Matter : The Adi Granth Sahib Ji has a total of. 1430 pages. The hymns registered in it can be divided into three parts. The first part includes Japji Sahib, Rehras Sahib and Sohila. They are described in pages 1-13 of the Guru Granth Sahib. The second part which is called the main part of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji is divided into 31 parts on the basis of 31 Ragas.

One thing to take notice of is that the Ragas that represent extreme joy or extreme sorrow are not included in the Guru Granth Sahib Ji. Each Raga after the praise of God consists of the Shabads of first Guru, Guru Nanak Dev Ji and then the rest of the Gurus in chronological order.

Since the hymns of all the Gurus had the name of ‘Nanak’ in them hence to distinguish between the hymns of different Gurus, the Mahalas are used. The Bani of Guru Nanak Sahib comes under the first Mahala and we use the second Mahala with Guru Angad Sahib Ji.

In every Rag Mala, after the hymns of Guru Sahibs, the creations of Bhagats and Sufi Saints is given in chronological order. It is covered in pages from 14 to 1353. The third part includes the Sawaiyas and the Shalokas of the Sikh Gurus and Bhagats that cannot be further divided into Ragas. The Adi Granth Sahib ends with two Shalokas of the ‘Mundavani’. These Shalokas are recited by Guru Arjan Sahib. Here he gives the summary of Adi Granth Sahib Ji and thanks God. In the end, is the Antika under the title of‘Rag Mala’. The third part includes the pages 1354 to 1430 of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji.

Japji Sahib 1 – 8
Rehras Sahib 8 – 12
Sohila 12 – 13
Sri-Rag 14 – 93
Majh 94 – 150
Guari 151 – 346
Asa 347 – 488
Gujri 489  – 526
Devgandhari 527  – 536
Bihagra 537  – 556
Wadahans 557  – 594
Sorath 595  – 659
Dhanasri 660  – 695
Jait Sri 696  – 710
Todi 711  – 718
Bairari 719  – 720
Tilang 721  – 727
Suhi 728  – 794
Bilaval 795  – 858
Gaund 859  – 875
Ramkali 876  – 974
Natnarain 975  – 983
Mah Gaura 984  – 988
Maru 989  – 1106
Tukhari 1107  – 1117
Kedara 1118  – 1124
Bhairav 1125  – 1167
Basant 1168  – 1196
Sarang 1197  – 1253
Malar 1254  – 1293
Kanra 1294  – 1318
Kalyan 1319  – 1326
Prabhati 1327  – 1351
Jaijawanti 1352  – 1353
S&ialoka Sahskriti 1353 – 1360
Gatha 1360  – 1361
Funhe 1361  – 1363
Chaubole 1363  – 1364
Shaloka Kabir 1364  – 1377
Shaloka Farid 1377  – 1384
Swaiyas Guru Aijan 1385  – 1389
Swaiyas Bhats 1389  – 1409
Shalokas Gurus 1409  – 1426
Shalokas Guru Tegh Bahadur 1426  – 1429
Mundavani 1429
Rag Mala 1429  – 1430

6. Synthesis of Bani and Music: The Sikh Gurus had profound knowledge and taste for music. Rababi Mardana always accompanied Guru Nanak Sahib. Guru Aijan Sahib performed the kirtan using Saranda. He was well versed with music. He gave order to a major part of the Bani according to the Ragas during the compilation of Adi Granth Sahib. The Bani consists of 31 Ragas. 30 Ragas from Sri Raga to Prabhati Raga have been composed by Guru Aijan Dev Ji himself. The Bani of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji is composed in Jaijawanti Rag. It is quite significant to note that Ragas expressing deep sorrow or joy are not included in the Adi Granth Sahib.

7. Subject: The Adi Granth Sahib was written in the praise of God. It renders light on Jap, attainment of Sachch Khand and importance of Guru. It gives the message of welfare of mankind, unity of God and world peace. It does not mention the lives and miracles or any of the worldly associations of the Gurus. The subject matter of Guru Granth Sahib Ji is purely religious.

8. Language: The Adi Granth has been written in the Gurmukhi script. It makes use of the words from Punjabi, Hindi, Marathi, Gujarati, Sanskrit and Persian languages spoken in 15th, 16th and 17th centuries. The hymns of the Gurus are in Punjabi while those of the other Bhagats and Sikh Saints are in other languages.

Significance of Adi Granth Sahib:

The Adi Granth Sahib is a unique religious scripture not only of the Sikhs but of j the entire world. The compilation of this scripture gave the golden principles of life to the Sikh community and also further consolidated it. The hymns of Guru Granth Sahib Ji gives the message of unity of God and brotherhood of mankind.

1. Importance for the Sikhs: The compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji is a great landmark in the history of the Sikhs. It provided the Sikhs with a unique religious scripture. The Hindu scriptures now held no importance for them. It initiated a feeling of a separate communal entity and they totally disintegrated from Hinduism. After Guru Gobind Singh Ji left for his heavenly abode, the Guru Granth Sahib Ji was considered as their Guru by the Sikhs.

These days each Gurdwara in the world has Guru Granth Sahib Ji installed at a higher platform wrapped in silk cloth under a canopy. All the Sikhs revere it and bow before it with great respect. All Sikh ceremonies right from birth till death are done in the presence of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji. For the Sikhs, Guru Granth Sahib is not only a lighthouse but also the main source of inspiration for them. According to Dr. Wazir Singh, “The Adi Granth was indeed his most precious gift to the Sikh world.”

2. Message of Brotherhood: Adi Granth Sahib is the only sacred book of the world which contains hymns without any distinction on the basis of caste, colour or creed. By doing so Guru Arjan Dev Ji has given the message of brotherhood to all human beings. In the present age, when the feeling of communal harmony is disappearing and the whole world is overclouded with the fear of war, the importance of this Granth has increased to a great extent.

In the words of Dr. G.S. Mansukhani, “As long as mankind lives, it will derive peace, wisdom and inspiration from this scripture. It is a unique treasure, a noble heritage for the whole human race.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

3. Literary Importance: From the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib is a unique work. It occupies the highest place in Punjabi literature. It contains beautiful similies and embellishments. It has a form and finish not equalled by subsequent writers. Therefore, from the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib carries immense importance.

4. Historical Importance: No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political and economic life of 16th and 17th centuries. In the political sphere Guru Nanak Sahib has severely criticised the administrative system of the Lodi rulers. Ruling class had become barbarian. Qazi gave justice after taking bribe. The moral standard of Mughal rulers and other courtiers had touched its lowest ebb.

At the time of Babar’s invasion the people of Punjab were leading a miserable life which is described in Guru Nanak Sahib’s ‘Babar Bani.’ In social field women’s position was miserable. They occupied a very low place in the society. The evils of Sati and Purdah system had further worsened their lot. A widow was cursed by one and all. Hindu society was divided into a number of castes and sub-castes. People of higher castes were provided with special privileges. So they had become very haughty.

They treated very the people of low castes harshly. The spirit of both Hinduism and Islam was hidden beneath a mass of formalities and extraneous observances. Brahmans of the Hindu society and Mullas of the Muslim society were fleecing people in the name of religion. Being related to the ruling class the Muslims enjoyed all types of privileges while the Hindus were exploited in all possible ways.

Guru Granth Sahib also throws a good deal of light on the agriculture and trade and commerce in that period. According to Dr. AC. Bannerjee, “The Adi Granth is a rich mine of information on political, religious, social and economic conditions in the Punjab from the last years of the fifteenth to the beginning of the seventeenth century.”

5. Other Importances : Besides the above, there are several other importances of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji. It gives us direction to better our lives now and hereafter. Women who were treated like a shoe were given a new respect. Guru Nanak Sahib says, “Why belittle her who gives birth to Rajas?”

The Adi Granth vehemently opposed the prevalent superstitions in the society thus lending the human race a new direction. It also tells us that we should keep ourselves detached from the materialism of the world just as a dove keeps its wings dry while swiflalniifg in water. It instructs us to do kirtan, recite Nam and get baptised.

The music that accompanies the Bani has the capacity to take the human beings to mysterious heights. Nowhere else nor in any religion can we find such an example as of giving the’Guru Granth Sahib, the due respect of the Guru. To conclude it can be said that the Guru Granth Sahib instructs us righteously in all the spheres of life thereby showering his rich jewels in our lap. In the end, we agree with the words of Dr. H.R. Gupta, “The compilation of the Adi Granth formed an important landmark in the history of the Sikhs.”

Question 2.
Write a brief note on the contributors of Guru Granth Sahib prepared by Guru Arjan Dev.
Or
How many are the contributors of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji? Give description of them.
Answer:
No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political and economic life of 16th and 17th centuries. In the political sphere Guru Nanak Sahib has severely criticised the administrative system of the Lodi rulers. Ruling class had become barbarian. Qazi gave justice after taking bribe. The moral standard of Mughal rulers and other courtiers had touched its lowest ebb.

At the time of Babar’s invasion the people of Punjab were leading a miserable life which is described in Guru Nanak Sahib’s ‘Babar Bani.’ In social field women’s position was miserable. They occupied a very low place in the society. The evils of Sati and Purdah system had further worsened their lot. A widow was cursed by one and all. Hindu society was divided into a number of castes and sub-castes. People of higher castes were provided with special privileges. So they had become very haughty.

Question 3.
Sri Guru Granth Sahib is a sacred Granth of all common people. Discuss.
Answer:
The Adi Granth Sahib is a unique religious scripture not only of the Sikhs but of j the entire world. The compilation of this scripture gave the golden principles of life to the Sikh community and also further consolidated it. The hymns of Guru Granth Sahib Ji gives the message of unity of God and brotherhood of mankind.

1. Importance for the Sikhs : The compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji is a great landmark in the history of the Sikhs. It provided the Sikhs with a unique religious scripture. The Hindu scriptures now held no importance for them. It initiated a feeling of a separate communal entity and they totally disintegrated from Hinduism. After Guru Gobind Singh Ji left for his heavenly abode, the Guru Granth Sahib Ji was considered as their Guru by the Sikhs.

These days each Gurdwara in the world has Guru Granth Sahib Ji installed at a higher platform wrapped in silk cloth under a canopy. All the Sikhs revere it and bow before it with great respect. All Sikh ceremonies right from birth till death are done in the presence of the Guru Granth Sahib Ji. For the Sikhs, Guru Granth Sahib is not only a lighthouse but also the main source of inspiration for them. According to Dr. Wazir Singh, “The Adi Granth was indeed his most precious gift to the Sikh world.”

2. Message of Brotherhood : Adi Granth Sahib is the only sacred book of the world which contains hymns without any distinction on the basis of caste, colour or creed. By doing so Guru Arjan Dev Ji has given the message of brotherhood to all human beings. In the present age, when the feeling of communal harmony is disappearing and the whole world is overclouded with the fear of war, the importance of this Granth has increased to a great extent. In the words of Dr. G.S. Mansukhani, “As long as mankind lives, it will derive peace, wisdom and inspiration from this scripture. It is a unique treasure, a noble heritage for the whole human race.”

3. Literary Importance : From the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib is a unique work. It occupies the highest place in Punjabi literature. It contains beautiful similies and embellishments. It has a form and finish not equalled by subsequent writers. Therefore, from the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib carries immense importance.

4. Historical Importance : No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political and economic life of 16th and 17th centuries. In the political sphere Guru Nanak Sahib has severely criticised the administrative system of the Lodi rulers. Ruling class had become barbarian. Qazi gave justice after taking bribe. The moral standard of Mughal rulers and other courtiers had touched its lowest ebb. At the time of Babar’s invasion the people of Punjab were leading a miserable life which is described in Guru Nanak Sahib’s ‘Babar Bani.’ In social field women’s position was miserable.

They occupied a very low place in the society. The evils of Sati and Purdah system had further worsened their lot. A widow was cursed by one and all. Hindu society was divided into a number of castes and sub-castes. People of higher castes were provided with special privileges. So they had become very haughty.

They treated very the people of low castes harshly. The spirit of both Hinduism and Islam was hidden beneath a mass of formalities and extraneous observances. Brahmans of the Hindu society and Mullas of the Muslim society were fleecing people in the name of religion. Being related to the ruling class the Muslims enjoyed all types of privileges while the Hindus were exploited in all possible ways.

Guru Granth Sahib also throws a good deal of light on the agriculture and trade and commerce in that period. According to Dr. AC. Bannerjee, “The Adi Granth is a rich mine of information on political, religious, social and economic conditions in the Punjab from the last years of the fifteenth to the beginning of the seventeenth century.”

5. Other Importances: Besides the above, there are several other importances of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji. It gives us direction to better our lives now and hereafter. Women who were treated like a shoe were given a new respect. Guru Nanak Sahib says, “Why belittle her who gives birth to Rajas?” The Adi Granth vehemently opposed the prevalent superstitions in the society thus lending the human race a new direction. It also tells us that we should keep ourselves detached from the materialism of the world just as a dove keeps its wings dry while swiflalniifg in water. It instructs us to do kirtan, recite Nam and get baptised.

The music that accompanies the Bani has the capacity to take the human beings to mysterious heights. Nowhere else nor in any religion can we find such an example as of giving the’Guru Granth Sahib, the due respect of the Guru. To conclude it can be said that the Guru Granth Sahib instructs us righteously in all the spheres of life thereby showering his rich jewels in our lap. In the end, we agree with the words of Dr. H.R. Gupta, “The compilation of the Adi Granth formed an important landmark in the history of the Sikhs.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-1):

Question 1.
Write a note on the compilation and importance of Adi Granth Sahib (Guru Granth Sahib Ji).
Or
Write a note on Adi Granth Sahib Ji.
Answer:
The most important work during Guru Arjan DeV Ji’s pontificate was the compilation of Adi Granth Sahib. The objective was to compile the Bani of Gurus in one place. Guru Arjan Dev Ji initiated this great work at Ramsar. The Bani of the first five Guru Sahibs, Saints, and Bhagats was included in it. The job of writing Guru Granth Sahib was done by Bhai Gurdas Ji. This great work was completed in 1604 A.D. Later on, the Bani of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji was also included in it. Adi Granth Sahib occupies a special place in the history of Sikhism.

Question 2.
Briefly explain the importance of Adi Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
What is the importance of Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political, and economic life of the 16th and 17th centuries. Guru Nanak Sahib gave a vivid account of the political condition o- that time in Babar Vani. In the social field, women’s position was miserable. The compilation of Adi Granth Sahib is a landmark in the history of the Sikhs. It gave the message of the universal brotherhood of mankind to the world.

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-2):

Question 1.
Write a note on the compilation and importance of Adi Granth Sahib Ji.
Answer:
The most important work during Guru Aijan Dev Ji’s pontificate was the compliation of Adi Granth Sahib. The objective was to compile the Bani of Gurus at one place and provide the Sikhs with a separate scripture. Guru Arjan Dev Ji initiated this great work at Ramsar. The Bani of Guru Nank Dev Ji, Guru Angad Dev Ji, Guru Amar Das Ji, Guru Ram Das Ji and Guru Aijan Dev Ji was included in it. Guru Aijan Dev Ji’s Sabads are maximum in number. Its number is 2216. Besides, Guru Aijan Dev Ji included the Bani of some other Saints and Bhagats. The job of writing Guru Granth Sahib was done by Bhai Gurdas Ji.

This great work was completed in 1604 A.D. Later on, the Bani of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji was also included in it. The compilation of Adi Granth Sahib is a great landmark in Sikh history. With its compilation, the Sikhs got a separate scripture of their own. Guru Arjan Dev Ji set a new example by including the Bani written by people of various religions and castes. Adi Granth Sahib is the main source for our information regarding the political, social, religious and economic condition of people of Punjab in the 15th and 16th centuries. Moreover, Adi Granth Sahib is am invaluable treasure of India’s spirituality, culture, literature and languages.

Question 2.
What was the need of the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
There were many reasons responsible for the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib. During the time of Guru Aijan Dev Ji, Sikhism was spreading very fast. It was essential to compile a religious scripture to guide them. Secondly, Prithia, Guru Aijan Dev Ji’s elder brother wanted to acquire the Gurgaddi. With this objective, he started propagating his own teachings in the name of the Bani of Guru Ji. Guru Aijan Sahib wanted to put the Bani in record in its pure form, so that the Sikhs had no doubt. Thirdly, if the Sikhs wanted to establish their own independent state, it was essential for them to have their own religious scriptures.

Fourthly, Guru Amar Das Ji also encouraged the Sikhs to read the divine Bani of Guru Sahib. Guru Sahib says in the Anand Sahib, Come, ye beloved disciples of the Guru, sing ye the true word. Sing ye the word of the Guru, which is the most sublime of all. They, on whom is the Lord’s Grace, cherish it in the mind. So drink in ye the Lord’s Nectar and be ever imbued with His love and dwell on the lord the support of the earth. Says Nanak, “Sing ye ever the word of the True Guru.” Due to these reasons, Guru Aijan Dev Ji felt the need for the compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib.

Question 3.
How were the hymns collected for Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
Or
Describe the compilation and editing of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji.
Or
How Guru Arjan Dev Ji edited Adi Granth Sahib? Discuss.
Or
Which sacred Granth was edited by Sri Guru Arjan Dev Ji? Discuss.
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji used various sources for writing the Bani. The Bani of the first three Gurus—Guru Nanak Dev Ji, Guru Angad Dev Ji and Guru Amar Das Ji was with the eldest son of Guru Amar Das Ji i.e. Baba Mohan Ji. To compile the Bani, Guru Arjan Dev Ji first sent Bhai Gurdas Ji and then Baba Buddha Ji to Baba Mohan Ji but they were not successful in their objective. After this, Guru Sahib himself went from Amritsar to Goindwal Sahib barefooted. Impressed by the humility of Guru Ji, Baba Mohan Ji gave away the entire Bani to Guru Ji.

Guru Arjan Dev Ji already had the Bani of Guru Ram Das Ji with him. Guru Sahib included his own Bani in it. After this Guru Sahib called upon the devotees of Hindu Bhagats and Muslim Saints and asked them to recite the hymns of their saints correctly. The hymns of only those Bhagats and Saints were included in the Guru Granth Sahib which were similar to the Bani of the Gurus. The works of Kahna, Chhajju, Shah Hussain and Pilu were rejected.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Question 4.
What do you know about the importance of Adi Granth Sahib Ji?
Answer:
1. Importance for the Sikhs : The compilation of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji is a great landmark in the history of the Sikhs. It provided the Sikhs with a unique religious scripture. The Hindu scriptures now held no importance for them. It initiated a feeling of a separate communal entity and they totally disintegrated from Hinduism.

2. Message of Brotherhood : Adi Granth Sahib is the only sacred book of the world which contains hymns without any distinction on the basis of caste, colour or creed. By doing so Guru Arjan Dev Ji has given the message of brotherhood to all human beings.

3. Literary Importance : From the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib is a unique work. It occupies the highest place in Punjabi literature. It contains beautiful similies and embellishments. It has a form and finish not equalled by subsequent writers. Therefore, from the literary point of view Guru Granth Sahib carries immense importance.

4. Historical Importance : No doubt Guru Granth Sahib is a religious scripture, yet it furnishes valuable information regarding the social, religious, political and economic life of 16th and 17th centuries.

5. Other Importances : Besides the above, there are several other importances of the Adi Granth Sahib Ji. It gives us direction to better our lives now and hereafter. Women who were treated like a shoe were given a new respect. Guru Nanak Sahib says, “Why belittle her who gives birth to Rajas?” The Adi Granth vehemently opposed the prevalent superstitions in the society thus lending the human race a new direction.

Answer in One Word to One Sentence:

Question 1.
Why was the Adi Granth compiled? Give one reason.
Answer:
Compilation was essential to guide the Sikhs.

Question 2.
From whom did the hymns of First three Gurus collected by Guru Arjan Dev Ji?
Answer:
Baba Mohan Ji.

Question 3.
Who was Baba Mohan Ji?
Answer:
The eldest son of Guru Amar Das Ji.

Question 4.
When and by whom was the Adi Granth compiled?
Or
When and by whom did the first compilation of Guru Granth Sahib takes place?
Or
By which Guru Sahib, Guru Granth Sahib was compiled?
Answer:
The Adi Granth Sahib was compiled by Guru Aijan Dev Ji in 1604 A.D.

Question 5. In which year and at what place was Guru Granth Sahib compiled?
Answer:
Guru Granth Sahib was compiled in 1604 A.D. at Ramsar.

Question 6.
Whom did Guru Arjan Dev Ji appoint to write the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
Bhai Gurdas Ji.

Question 7.
Who was the first editor of Guru Granth Sahib?
Answer:
Guru Aijan Dev Ji was the first editor of Guru Granth Sahib.

Question 8.
Who compiled the First ‘Bir’ and where?
Answer:
Guru Aijan Dev Ji compiled the First ‘Bir’ at Ramsar.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Question 9.
In which year and at what place was the First Bir compiled?
Answer:
The First Bir was compiled in 1604 A.D. at Ramsar.

Question 10.
When and where was Second ‘Bir’ compiled?
Answer:
The Second Bir was compiled by Guru Gobind Singh Ji at a place called Damdama Sahib.

Question 11.
Who was writer of Second ‘Bir’?
Answer:
Bhai Mani Singh Ji.

Question 12.
Where was first illumination of the Adi Granth Sahib done?
Answer:
At Harmandir Sahib Ji in Amritsar.

Question 13.
When was first illumination of the Adi Granth Sahib was done?
Or
In which year First Parkash of Sri Guru Granth Sahib Ji took place?
Answer:
The first illumination of the Adi Granth Sahib was done on 16th Aug. 1604 A.D.

Question 14.
Who was the First Head Granthi of Harmandir Sahib, Amritsar?
Answer:
The First Head Granthi of Harmandir Sahib, Amritsar was Baba Buddha Ji.

Question 15.
How many great people contributed to the Guru Granth Sahib?
Or
Who was contributors towards the Guru Granth Sahib?
Or
How many composers of Bani are there in Guru Granth Sahib?

Question 16.
The Bani of how many Sikh Gurus have been incorporated in the Guru Granth Sahib?
Answer:
6 Gurus.

Question 17.
Name the Sikh Gurus whose Bani has been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:

  • Guru Nanak Dev Ji,
  • Guru Angad Dev Ji,
  • Guru Amar Das Ji,
  • Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

Question 18.
How many Sabads of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are there in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
976 Sabads.

Question 19.
Whose Shabads are incorporated the maximum in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

Question 20.
How many Shabads of Guru Arjan Dev Ji are included in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
2216 Shabads.

Question 21.
The Bani of how many Bhagats have been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
The Bani of 15 Bhagats has been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib.

Question 22.
Of all the Bhagats, whose Bani has been incorporated in Guru Granth Sahib? Name any four.
Answer:

  • Bhagat Kabir Ji,
  • Bhagat Farid Ji,
  • Bhagat Namdev Ji,
  • Guru Ravidas Ji.

Question 23.
Which Bhagat has contributed maximum Shabads to the Adi Granth Sahib?
Or
In Sri Guru Granth Sahib which Bahgat-Bani is included most.
Answer:
Bhagat Kabir Ji.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Question 24.
How many Shabads of Kabir Ji are there in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
541 Shabads.

Question 25.
The Bani of how many Bhatts has been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
The Bani of 11 Bhatts.

Question 26.
Whose Bani has not been included in the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:

  • Kanha,
  • Chhajju,
  • Shah Hussain,
  • Pilu.

Question 27.
How many pages are there in Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
The Adi Granth Sahib contains a total of 1430 pages.

Question 28.
Give the total number of Ragas used in Guru Granth Sahib.
Answer:
31 Ragas.

Question 29.
Name any two Ragas used in the Guru Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Ramkali and Basant.

Question 30.
With which composition does the Guru Granth Sahib begin?
Answer:
The Mul Mantra is at the beginning of the Guru Granth Sahib.

Question 31.
Who is the composer of Japji Sahib?
Answer:
Guru Nanak Dev Ji.

Question 32.
Who was composer of Sukhmani Sahib?
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji was composer of Sukhmani Sahib.

Question 33.
What is main subject of the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
The main subject of the Adi Granth Sahib is the devotion towards the Absolute.

Question 34.
Which is the script of the Adi Granth Sahib?
Answer:
Gurmukhi is the script of the Adi Granth Sahib.

Question 35.
Name two languages whose Salads are contributed in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:

  • Punjabi,
  • Persian.

Question 36.
Name the main religious book of the Sikhs.
Answer:
The name of the main religious book of the Sikhs is the Adi Granth Sahib or Guru Granth Sahib.

Question 37.
Who gave Guru Granth Sahib the position of Guru in Sikhism?
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji gave Guru Granth Sahib the position of Guru in Sikhism.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

Question 38.
Who gave the Guru Granth Sahib its position and when?
Answer:
The Adi Granth Sahib was given the position of Guru on 6th Oct., 1708 A.D. by Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

Question 39.
Give anyone importance of the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Adi Granth Sahib gave the message of unity of the whole mankind.

Fill in the Blanks:

1. Adi Granth Sahib was compiled in ……………
Answer:
1604 A.D.

2. Adi Granth Sahib was compiled by ……………..
Answer:
Guru Arjan Dev Ji.

3. Adi Granth Sahib was written at ………………
Answer:
Ramsar.

4. Adi Granth Sahib was written by ……………..
Answer:
Bhai Gurdas Ji.

5. The first illumination of Adi Granth Sahib was done at ……………….
Answer:
Harmandir Sahib.

6. ……………. was the first Head Granthi.
Answer:
Baba Buddha Ji.

7. ……………. compiled the second Bir of Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Singh Ji.

8. ……………. gave the the position of Guru to Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Gobind Sahib Ji.

9. Adi Granth Sahib contains the Bani of ………….. great people.
Answer:
36.

10. ……………. Shabads of Guru Nanak Dev Ji are present in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
976.

11. The maximum Shabads of …………….. are incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Guru Aijan Dev Ji.

12. Bani of ……………… Bhagats have been incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
15.

13. …………….. Shabads of Kabir are given in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
541.

14. The Adi Granth Sahib has a total of …………… pages.
Answer:
1430.

15. Bani of Adi Granth Sahib is divided into ……………. Ragas.
Answer:
31.

16. ……………….. is the script of Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
Gurmukhi.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

True Or False:

1. Adi Granth Sahib was compiled by Guru Ramdas Ji.
Answer:
False

2. Adi Granth Sahib was compiled in 1675 A.D.
Answer:
False

3. Bhai Gurdas Ji did the work of writing Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
True

4. The first illumination of Adi Granth Sahib was done at Anandpur Sahib.
Answer:
False

5. Baba Buddha Ji was the first Head granthi of the Harmandir Sahib.
Answer:
True

6. The Second Bir of Adi Granth Sahib was compiled by Guru Gobind Singh Ji.
Answer:
True

7. 36 great persons contributed to the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
True

8. The largest number of Shabads of Guru Nanak Dev Ji were in the Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
False

9. Adi Granth Sahib contains the Banis of the Six Sikh Gurus.
Answer:
True

10. The Bani of five Hindu Bhagats and Muslim Saints is included in Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
False

11. 541 Shabads of Kabir are present in Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
True

12. The Bani of 11 Bhatts have been included in Adi Granth Sahib.
Answer:
True

13. Adi Granth Sahib has total of 1420 pages.
Answer:
False

14. The Bani of Adi Granth Sahib is divided according to 31 Ragas.
Answer:
True

15. Adi Granth Sahib is written in Gurmukhi.
Answer:
True

16. Adi Granth Sahib gives us historical knowledge.
Answer:
True

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. Who compiled the Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Amar Das Ji
(c) Guru Arjan Dev Ji
(d) Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji
Answer:
(c) Guru Arjan Dev Ji

2. When was the Adi Granth Sahib compiled?
(a) 1604 A.D.
(b) 1605 A.D.
(c) 1606 A.D.
(d) 1675 A.D.
Answer:
(a) 1604 A.D.

3. Where was the Adi Granth Sahib compiled?
(a) Gangsar
(b) Ramsar
(c) Kartarpur
(d) Kiratpur
Answer:
(b) Ramsar

4. Who of the following helped Guru Arjan Dev Ji during the compilation of Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) Baba Buddha Ji
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
(c) Bhai Gurdas Ji
(d) Bhai Deep Singh Ji
Answer:
(c) Bhai Gurdas Ji

5. Where was the first illumination of Adi Granth Sahib done?
(a) Harmandir Sahib
(b) Nankana Sahib
(c) Anandpur Sahib
(d) Punja Sahib
Answer:
(a) Harmandir Sahib

6. Who was the first head Granthi of Harmandir Sahib?
(a) Bhai Gurdas Ji
(b) Baba Buddha Ji
(c) Syfu Saint Mian Mir Ji
(d) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
Answer:
(b) Baba Buddha Ji

7. The Bani of how many Sikh Gurus have been incorporated in the Guru Granth Sahib?
(a) 5
(b) 6
(c) 8
(d) 10
Answer:
(b) 6

8. How many shabads of Guru Aijan Dev Ji are incorporated in the Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) 689
(b) 907
(c) 976
(d) 2216
Answer:
(d) 2216

9. Which of the following Bhagats has contributed maximum shabads to the Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) Farid Ji
(b) Namdev Ji
(c) Kabir Ji
(d) Ravidas Ji
Answer:
(c) Kabir Ji

10. In how many Ragas the Bani of Adi Granth has been divided?
(a) 11
(b) 21
(c) 30
(d) 31.
Answer:
(d) 31

11. What is the total number of pages of the Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) 1405
(b) 1420
(c) 1430
(d) 1440
Answer:
(c) 1430

12. Who gave the Adi Granth Sahib the position of Guru Granth Sahib?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev Ji
(b) Guru Aijan Dev Ji
(c) Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji
Answer:
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 6 The Adi Granth

13. When was the Adi Granth Sahib given the status of Guru Granth Sahib?
(a) 1604 A.D.
(b) 1675 A.D.
(c) 1705 A.D.
(d) 1708 A.D.
Answer:
(d) 1708 A.D.

14. Who wrote the Second Bir of Adi Granth Sahib?
(a) Bhai Gurdas Ji
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji
(c) Baba Buddha Ji
(d) Guru Gobind Singh Ji
Answer:
(b) Bhai Mani Singh Ji

15. In which language was the Adi Granth Sahib written?
(a) Gurmukhi
(b) Hindi
(c) English
(d) Sanskrit
Answer:
(a) Gurmukhi

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Punjab State Board PSEB 10th Class English Book Solutions English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages Exercise Questions and Answers, Notes.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

नोट : परीक्षा-पत्र में Unseen Reading Comprehension के लिए दिया जाने वाला पैरा प्रायः व्याकरण की निर्धारित पुस्तक में से ही लिया जाता है। इसलिए विद्यार्थियों को ऐसे पैरे बहुत ध्यान से तैयार कर लेने चाहिएं।

(A) Passages From Grammar Book Note :

In all the passages, questions have been changed according to new pattern of Testing.

Passage – 1

One evening a boy of three was out for a walk with his father. There was also an elderly man with the father. Chatting, they walked on and went beyond the village. The green crops delighted the eyes. The elders were walking along the edge of a field. Not hearing the footsteps of the boy, the father looked back. The boy was sitting on the ground and seemed to be planting something. The father became curious. “What are you doing?” said he. “Look, Father, I shall grow guns all over the field,” was the innocent reply of the boy. His eyes shone with the strong faith that guns would grow in the field. Both the elders were struck with wonder at the little boy’s words. The boy was Bhagat Singh who later fought like a hero for India’s freedom and sacrificed his life.

Word-meanings : 1. elderly – बुजुर्ग 2. chatting – बातचीत करते हुए ; 3. curious – उत्सुक; 4. sacrificed – बलिदान दे दिया

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Where were the elders walking?
(a) Along the bank of a canal.
(b) Along the edge of a well.
(c) Along the bank of the river.
(d) Along the edge of a field.
Answer:
(d) Along the edge of a field.

Question 2.
What was the boy doing when his father looked back?
(a) He was sitting on the ground.
(b) He was planting something.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 3.
What faith did the boy have?
(a) He believed that bombs would grow in the field.
(b) He believed that guns would grow in the field.
(c) He believed that green crops would grow in the field.
(d) He believed that brave men would grow in the field.
Answer:
(b) He believed that guns would grow in the field.

Question 4.
Father looked back because …………
(a) he did not hear the footsteps of his son.
(b) his son was calling him.
(c) his son was left behind.
(d) his son asked him to do so.
Answer:
(a) he did not hear the footsteps of his son.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
Bhagat Singh sacrificed his life for …..
(a) his family
(b) truth
(c) India’s freedom
(d) his ideals.
Answer:
(c) India’s freedom

Passage 2

Dr. C.V. Raman was, a genius? who won the Nobel Prize for Physics, using simple equipment barely worth $300. He was the first Asian scientist to win the Nobel Prize. He was a man of boundless curiosity and had a lively sense of humour. His spirit of inquiry and devotion to science laid the foundation for scientific research in India. And he won honour as a scientist, and affection as a teacher and a man. Raman was studious. He kept in touch with the latest developments in science in the world around him. He had personal contacts with many scientists. He used to read new books and research papers from different centres. “The equipment which brought me the Nobel Prize did not cost more than three hundred rupees. A table drawer can hold all my research equipment,” he used to say with pride. It was his conviction that if the research worker is not inspired from within, no amount of money can bring him or her success in research.

Word meanings : 1. genius – प्रतिभाशाली ; 2. equipment – साज-सामान, उपकरण; 3. inquiry – जांच, उत्सुकता ; 4. studious – अध्ययनशील ; 5. conviction – दृढ़-विश्वास।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What kind of a man was Dr. C.V. Raman?
(a) He was a man of unlimited curiosity.
(b) He had a lively sense of humour.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 2.
What is he famous for ?
(a) For being the first American scientist to win the Nobel Prize.
(b) For being the first Asian scientist to win the Nobel Prize.
(c) For being the first African scientist to win the Nobel Prize.
(d) For being the first Japanese scientist to win the Nobel Prize.
Answer:
(b) For being the first Asian scientist to win the Nobel Prize.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 3.
He believed that if the research work is not ……… any amount of money cannot make the research successful.
(a) applauded by people
(b) done deeply
(c) inspired from within
(d) done thoughtfully.
Answer:
(c) inspired from within

Question 4.
The equipment that won him the Nobel Prize
(a) did not cost more than five hundred rupees.
(b) did not cost more than three hundred rupees.
(c) did not cost more than four hundred rupees.
(d) did not cost more than six hundred rupees.
Answer:
(b) did not cost more than three hundred rupees.

Question 5.
Which word in the passage means ‘scholarly’?
(a) genius
(b) studious
(c) conviction
(d) barely.
Answer:
(b) studious

Passage 3

Early rising leads to health and happiness. The man who rises late can have little rest in the course of the day. Anyone who lies in bed late is compelled to work till late hours in the evening. He has to go without the evening exercise which is so necessary for his health. In spite of all his efforts, his work will not produce as good results as that of an early riser. The reason for this is that he cannot take advantage of the refreshing morning hours. Some people say that the quiet hours of midnight are the best time for working. Several great thinkers say that they can write best only when they burn the midnight. Yet it is true to say that few men have a clear brain at midnight when the body needs rest and sleep. Those who work at that time soon ruin their health. Bad health must, in the long run, have a bad effect on the quality of their work.

Word-meanings : 1. in the course of — के दौरान; 2. compelled — बाध्या होना ; 3. burn the midnight oil – देर रात तक काम करना

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What leads to health and happiness ?
(a) Late rising.
(b) Early rising.
(c) Brisk walk.
(d) Long walk.
Answer:
(b) Early rising.

Question 2.
What is a late riser compelled to do ?
(a) To work for a short while.
(b) To work early in the morning.
(c) To stop working at all.
(d) To work till late hours in the evening.
Answer:
(d) To work till late hours in the evening.

Question 3.
Why can’t we have a clear brain at midnight?
(a) Because we are fully fresh at that time.
(b) Because we want to go for walk at that time.
(c) Because at that time our body needs rest and sleep.
(d) Because at that time we are fully disturbed.
Answer:
(c) Because at that time our body needs rest and sleep.

Question 4.
The man who rises late cannot take advantage of ………
(a) the refreshing sunny hours.
(b) the refreshing midnight hours.
(c) the refreshing evening hours.
(d) the refreshing morning hours.
Answer:
(d) the refreshing morning hours.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
The word ‘essential’ means – …………
(a) compelled
(b) necessary
(c) advantage
(d) ruin
Answer:
(b) necessary

Passage 4.
Each one of us should have a hobby. Sometimes boys and girls are encouraged in schools to take up hobbies. They work at certain things in schools such as collecting stamps, or carpentry, but this so-called hobby is a thing for schools only. They do not pay any attention to it at their homes. Sometimes this is because of poverty, sometimes because of lack of interest. But a hobby is not really a hobby unless we are so interested in it that we want to carry it on whenever we have spare time. According to the dictionary meaning, a hobby is a favourite subject or occupation that is not one’s main business. It is something in which we are more interested than in anything else.

Word-meanings : 1. encouraged – प्रोत्साहित; 2. poverty – निर्धनता

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What is the dictionary meaning of ‘hobby’ ?
(a) A skill that is one’s source of earning.
(b) Favourite subject or occupation that is not one’s main business.
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(b) Favourite subject or occupation that is not one’s main business.

Question 2.
When does a hobby become a thing for schools only?
(a) It is when no attention is paid to it at home.
(b) It is when full attention is paid to it at home.
(c) It is when no attention is paid to it at school.
(d) It is when full attention is paid to it at school.
Answer:
(a) It is when no attention is paid to it at home.

Question 3.
Name the hobbies mentioned in the passage.
(a) Stamp collecting.
(b) Carpentry.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 4.
We should carry on our hobby whenever we have ……..
(a) no time
(b) spare time
(c) golden time
(d) busy time
Answer:
(b) spare time

Question 5.
Sometimes students cannot pay attention to their hobbies due to ……….
(a) over work and studies
(b) lack of spare time
(c) poverty or lack of interest
(d) none of these three.
Answer:
(c) poverty or lack of interest

Passage – 5

Ashoka, the most trusted son of Bindusara and the grandson of Chandragupta Maurya, was a brave soldier. He was the most famous of the Mauryan kings and was one of the greatest rulers of India. Ashoka extended the Mauryan Empire to the whole of India, reaching out even into Central Asia. Ashoka succeeded in conquering Kalinga after a bloody war in which 100,000 men were killed, 150,000 injured and thousands were captured and retained as slaves. The sight of the slaughter involved in his conquest’ deeply affected his mind. He renounced war and sought peace in Buddha’s preachings of love and non-violence. So he gave up hunting.

Word-meanings: 1. extended – फैलाया; 2. in conquering- जीतने में; 3. retained – बंदी बना लिए गए ; 4. slaughter- हत्याकाण्ड; 5. conquest- जीत ; 6. renounced- त्याग दिया|

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What was the name of Ashoka’s grandfather ?
(a) Bindusara Maurya.
(b) Rishabh Maurya.
(c) Chandragupta Maurya.
(d) Bhisham Maurya.
Answer:
(c) Chandragupta Maurya.

Question 2.
What happened in the war of Kalinga ?
(a) 100,000 men were killed.
(b) 150,000 men were injured.
(c) Thousands were captured and retained as slaves.
(d) All of these three.
Answer:
(d) All of these three.

Question 3.
Write the changes in Ashoka’s life after the war.
(a) He gave up war.
(b) He sought peace in love and non-violence.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 4.
Ashoka was one of the …………..
(a) greatest saints of India
(b) greatest rulers of India
(c) greatest preachers of India
(d) greatest yogis of India
Answer:
(b) greatest rulers of India

Question 5.
For Ashoka the war of Kalinga was a ……………
(a) bloody massacre
(b) great war
(c) great victory for him
(d) turning point of his life.
Answer:
(d) turning point of his life.

Passage 6

“Brothers and sisters, the long night is at last drawing to a close. Miseries and sorrows are disappearing. Ours is a sacred country. She is gradually waking up, thanks to the fresh breeze all around. Are you prepared for all sacrifices for the sake of your mother-land ? If you are, then you can rid the land of poverty and ignorance. You should develop a strong physique? You should shape your mind through study and meditation. Only then will victory be yours. I loved my motherland dearly before I went to America and England. After my return, every particle of the dust of this land seems sacred to me.” Do you know who carried this message to the whole continent of Asia ? It was Swami Vivekananda.

Word meanings : 1. miseries – दुःख ; 2. gradually-धीरे-धीरे ; 3. physique – डील-डौल ; 4. meditation – चिन्तन।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
How can we rid the land of poverty and ignorance?
(a) By fighting for our rights.
(b) By doing our duties.
(c) By making sacrifices for our family.
(d) By making sacrifices for the sake of our motherland.
Answer:
(d) By making sacrifices for the sake of our motherland.

Question 2.
How can you shape your mind ?
(a) Through study.
(b) Through meditation.
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b)

Question 3.
Where did Swami Vivekananda carry the message ?
(a) To the whole continent of Antarctica.
(b) To the whole continent of Asia.
(c) To the whole continent of Africa.
(d) To the whole continent of Europe.
Answer:
(b) To the whole continent of Asia.

Question 4.
India is gradually. …….
(a) waking up
(b) sleeping
(c) lagging behind
(d) preparing for the war.
Answer:
(a) waking up

Question 5.
Who speaks the above lines ?
(a) Mahavira
(b) Gautama Buddha
(c) Swami Vivekananda
(d) Guru Nanak Dev.
Answer:
(c) Swami Vivekananda

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Passage 7.

A Nation’s Strength :
Not gold, but only men can make
A nation great and strong
Men who, for truth and honour’s sake,
Stand fast and suffer long.

Brave men who work while others sleep,
Who darewhile others fly,
They build a nation’s pillars deep,
And lift them to the sky. – R.W. Emerson

Word-meanings : 1. stand fast – डटे रहना ; 2. dare – सामना करते हैं ; 3. fly – भाग जाते हैं ; 4. pillars – स्तम्भ।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What makes a nation great and strong ?
(a) Its youth.
(b) Its soldiers.
(c) Its people.
(d) Its government.
Answer:
(c) Its people.

Question 2.
What do brave men do while others sleep?
(a) They work hard.
(b) They suffer long.
(c) They also sleep.
(d) They run away.
Answer:
(a) They work hard.

Question 3.
How can they lift a nation to the sky ?
(a) Through their sacrifices.
(b) Through their faith.
(c) Through their duty.
(d) Through their hard work.
Answer:
(d) Through their hard work.

Question 4.
Complete the line :
Who dare while ……………..!
(a) others fly
(b) others laugh
(c) others die
(d) others challenge.
Answer:
(a) others fly

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
Who are the real pillars of a nation ?
(a) Common people.
(b) Rich people.
(c) Brave people.
(d) Poor people.
Answer:
(c) Brave people.

Question 6.
The word ‘dare’ means –
(a) endure
(b) challenge
(c) raise
(d) reality
Answer:
(b) challenge

Passage 8

My Books :

I love my books
They are the homes
of queens and fairies,
Knights? and gnomes.

Each time I read I make a call
On some quaint person large or small,
Who welcomes me with a hearty hand
And leads me through his wonderland.
Each book is like

A city street
Along whose winding
Way I meet
New friends and old who laugh and sing
And take me off adventuring.

Word-meanings : 1. knights – योद्धा ; 2. gnomes – बौने ; 3. quaint – अजीब ; 4. winding – बल-खाती।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
The poet loves his books because through them he …………
(a) meets new friends
(b) sees new lands
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) neither (a) nor (b)
Answer:
(c) both (a) and (b)

Question 2.
How does the quaint person welcome the poet ?
(a) With no smile.
(b) With a sad heart.
(c) With a hearty hand.
(d) Any of these three.
Answer:
(c) With a hearty hand.

Question 3.
The poet is led through a …….. each time he reads a book.
(a) homeland
(b) wonderland
(c) woodland
(d) farmland.
Answer:
(b) wonderland

Question 4.
In the books, the poet meets new and old friends in the ……
(a) city streets
(b) wonderland
(c) villages
(d) farmhouses.
Answer:
(a) city streets

Question 5.
The antonym of the word ‘winding’ is ……
(a) straight
(b) round
(c) curved
(d) feeble
Answer:
(a) straight

Passage 9

Stone Walls Do Not A Prison Make:
Stone walls do not a prison make
Nor iron bars a cage :
Mind’s innocence and quiet take
That for a hermitage?

If I have freedom in my love,
And in my soul am free,
Angels alone that soar above
Enjoy such liberty. -R. Lovelace

Word-meanings : 1. hermitage – आश्रम; 2. angel – देवदूत

choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What does not make a prison ?
(a) Strong walls.
(b) Stone walls.
(c) Weak walls.
(d) Brick Walls.
Answer:
(b) Stone walls.

Question 2.
According to the poet, what does not make a cage ?
(a) Iron bars.
(b) Wooden bars.
(c) Golden bars.
(d) Silver bars.
Answer:
(a) Iron bars.

Question 3.
Which quality of the mind makes a hermitage ?
(a) Innocence of the mind.
(b) Quiet acceptance.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 4.
‘Such liberty’ is enjoyed only by ……….
(a) birds
(b) angels
(c) devils
(d) animals.
Answer:
(b) angels

Question 5.
The word ‘liberty’ means – ……….
(a) spirit
(b) freedom
(c) jail
(d) rise
Answer:
(b) freedom

Passage 10

A child’s Evening Prayer :
Erel on my bed my limbs I lay,
God grant me grace my prayers to
say:
O God ! preserve? my mother dear
In strength and health for many a year;

And, O ! preserve my father too,
And may I pay him reverence due;
And may I my best thoughts employ
To be my parents’ hope and joy;
And O ! preserve my brothers both

From evil doings and from sloth,
And may we always love each other,
Our friends, our father, and our mother :
And still, O Lord, to me impart
An innocent and grateful heart,

That after my great sleep I may
Awake to Thy eternal day! – Samuel Taylor Coleridge

Worst-meanings : 1. ere – से फूर्व ; 2. preserve – सुरक्षित रखना ; 3. reverence – सम्मान ; 4. sloth — सुस्ती; 5. Thy — your.

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
When does the child pray ?
(a) Before going to bed.
(b) After going to bed.
(c) Before getting up.
(d) After getting up.
Answer:
(a) Before going to bed.

Question 2.
The child prays to God that his mother ……………. .
(a) may remain strong
(b) may remain healthy
(c) live long
(d) all of these three.
Answer:
(d) all of these three.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 3.
What does he ask for himself ?
(a) An innocent heart.
(b) A grateful heart.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 4.
The child pays ………… to his father.
(a) reverence
(b) strength
(c) wealth
(d) attention.
Answer:
(a) reverence

Question 5.
The child wants to be the hope and joy of ………
(a) God
(b) his parents
(c) his siblings
(d) his teachers.
Answer:
(b) his parents

Question 6.
Give the rhyme-scheme of the last four lines.
(a) abab
(b) abba
(c) aabb
(d) baba.
Answer:
(c) aabb

Passage 11.

The Rainbow :
Boats sail on the rivers,
And ships sail on the seas;
But clouds that sail across the sky
Are prettier? than these.
There are bridges on the rivers,
As pretty as you please;
But the bow that bridges heaven,
And overtops the trees,
And builds a road from earth to sky,
Is prettier far than these. – Christina Rossetti

Word-meanings : 1. sail – तैरना; 2. prettier — जयादा सुन्दर; 3. bow – कमान, इन्दूधनुष ; 4. overtops – के ऊपर से गुजाती है

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Where does the rainbow build a road?
(a) From the sky to the sea.
(b) From the earth to the sky.
(c) From the land to the sea.
(d) None of these three.
Answer:
(b) From the earth to the sky.

Question 2.
What are prettier than boats and ships ?
(a) Aeroplanes.
(b) Raindrops.
(c) Clouds.
(d) Trains.
Answer:
(c) Clouds.

Question 3.
According to the poet, the …… is the prettiest.
(a) sky
(b) rainbow
(c) rain
(d) cloud.
Answer:
(b) rainbow

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 4.
The rainbow bridges ………..
(a) hell
(b) aboder
(c) heaven
(d) sky.
Answer:
(c) heaven

Question 5.
The word ‘far’ means – ……….
(a) a little.
(b) much more.
(c) many a.
(d) the few.
Answer:
(b) much more.

Passage 12 

The Noble Nature :
It is not growing like a tree
In bulk?, doth make man better be;
Or standing long an oak, three hundred year,
To fall a log at last, dry, bald and sere?:

A lily of a day
Is fairer far in May,
Although it falls and dies that night;
It was the plant and flower of light.
In small proportions we just beauties see:

And in short measures life may perfect be. -Ben Jonson

Word-meanings : 1. bulk — आकार में बड़ा ; 2. bald — गंजा; 3. sere – बेकार के; 4. proportions — मात्रा

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Passage 1.
What does not make a man a better being ?
(a) Being wealthy
(b) Becoming famous.
(c) Growing in size.
(d) Being kind-hearted.
Answer:
(c) Growing in size.

Passage 2.
Which thing in nature can live up to three hundred years ?
(a) A lily flower.
(b) An oak tree.
(c) A sunflower.
(d) A willow tree.
Answer:
(b) An oak tree.

Passage 3.
How long does a lily live ?
(a) For a day.
(b) For a week.
(c) For a month.
(d) For a year.
Answer:
(a) For a day.

Passage 4.
The message of this poem is that a …………. but ………… life is far better than a worthless life of long years.
(a) long, virtuous.
(b) long, vicious.
(c) short, virtuous.
(d) short, vicious.
Answer:
(c) short, virtuous.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Passage 5.
In short measures also, life may be …….
(a) pious
(b) perfect
(c) impious
(d) imperfect.
Answer:
(b) perfect

Passage 13.

The great advantage of early rising is the good start it gives us in our day’s work. The early riser has done a large amount of hard work before other men have got out of bed. In the early morning, the mind is fresh and there are few sounds or other distractions, so that the work done at that time is generally well-done. In many cases, the early riser also finds time to take some exercise in fresh morning air, and this exercise supplies him with a fund of energy that will last until the evening . By beginning so early, he knows that he has plenty of time to do thoroughly all the work he can be expected to do, and is not tempted to hurry over any part of it. All his work being finished in good time, he has a long interval of rest in the evening before the timely hour when he goes to bed. He gets to sleep several hours before midnight, at the time when sleep is most refreshing and after a sound night’s rest, rises early next morning in good health and spirits for the labour of the next day.

Word-meanings : 1. advantage – लाभ ; 2. distractions – भटकाव ; 3. thoroughly – अच्छी तरह।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
……….. gives our day’s work a good start.
(a) Late rising.
(b) Going to bed late.
(c) Early rising.
(d) Going to bed early.
Answer:
(c) Early rising.

Question 2.
Why is the work done in the early hours generally well-done ?
(a) Because the mind is fresh
(b) Because the mind is free from noises.
(c) Because the mind is free from distractions.
(d) All of these three.
Answer:
(d) All of these three.

Question 3.
When is the mind fresh ?
(a) Late at night.
(b) In the evening.
(c) In the early morning.
(d) At midnight.
Answer:
(c) In the early morning.

Question 4.
We can find ample time of rest in the evening by …
(a) taking exercise
(b) finishing our work at night
(c) rising late
(d) finishing our work in good time.
Answer:
(d) finishing our work in good time.

Question 5.
The word ‘tempted’ means –
(a) suitable
(b) benefit
(c) usually
(d) attracted
Answer:
(d) attracted

(B) Some Other Passages

Passage 1

Of all the trees, of southern Asia, the banyan is unique, not only for the manner of its growth, but for the area of shade it provides from the burning sun. Its close relationship with man has evolved? over the years to make the banyan a popular meeting place, a focal point of worship and a source of practical materials for commerce. Known as the strangler fig because of its unusual manner of growth, the banyan is an epiphyte6 or air plant, that has its birth in the branches of a host tree and lives on airborne moisture and nutrients. Banyan seeds are deposited by birds, bats or monkeys in the rich soil collected in the crevices? of host-tree branches. As the banyan grows, it sends aerial roots down the trunk of the supporting tree. In time, the roots that reach the ground choke the host tree by preventing its trunk from enlarging. The two best-known species of banyans are : the Indian (Ficus benghalensis), one of the world’s largest tropicalo trees; and the Chinese (Ficus retusa), a smaller species with fewer aerial roots.

Word-meanings : 1. provides – देता है, टिंटा 7 ; 2. evolved – धीरे-धीरे विकसित हुआ ; 3. focal – केन्द्रीय ; 4. strangler – जो किसी चीज़ की वृद्धि को दबाता या रोकता है ; 5. fig – चौड़े पत्तों वाला पेड़; 6. epiphyte – एक पौधा जो दूसरे पौधे या कभी-कभी दूसरी चीज़ पर बढ़ता है; 7. crevices – दरारें; 8. aerial – आकाश में लटका हुआ ; 9. tropical – उष्ण कटिबन्धी।

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Why is the banyan called the strangler fig?
(a) Because it chokes the host tree.
(b) Because it chokes other trees.
(c) Because it chokes the drains.
(d) Any of these three.
Answer:
(a) Because it chokes the host tree.

Question 2.
In what ways is the banyan tree unique ?
(a) It is unique in the manner of its growth.
(b) It is unique in terms of the area of shade it provides.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

Question 3.
The banyan tree is a popular meeting place because ……….
(a) it provides cool shade.
(b) it provides sweet fruit.
(c) it provides a focal point of worship.
(d) none of these three.
Answer:
(c) it provides a focal point of worship.

Question 4.
The Indian banyan is one of the world’s tropical trees.
(a) oldest
(b) smallest
(c) youngest
(d) largest
Answer:
(d) largest

Question 5.
The antonym of the word ‘enlarging’ is –
(a) enhancing
(b) following
(c) contracting
(d) forgiving.
Answer:
(c) contracting

Passage 2

Sir Alexander Fleming was a very humble? and modest? man. He found penicillin by chance. He was very hard-working. He tried all his life to fight for killing germs in the human body. Before the invention of penicillin, carbolic acid and sulpha drugs were used as disinfectants. These things killed the germs of many diseases, but they also harmed the cells of human body. Penicillin saved the lives of millions of human beings.

Word-meanings : 1. humble – नम्र, विनीत ; 2. modest – विनम् संकोची; 3. by chance – संयोग से ; 4. cells – कोशिकाएं।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What was the nature of Sir Alexander Fleming ?
(a) A very humble man.
(b) A very hardworking man.
(c) A very modest man.
(d) All of these three.
Answer:
(d) All of these three.

Question 2.
What did he find ?
(a) Penicillin.
(b) Radium.
(c) Carbolic acid.
(d) Sulpha drugs.
Answer:
(a) Penicillin.

Question 3.
Penicillin saved the lives of ……………….. human beings.
(a) hundreds
(b) thousands
(c) millions
(d) any of these three.
Answer:
(c) millions

Question 4.
……… harmed the cells of human body.
(a) Carbolic acid
(b) Sulpha drugs
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(c) Both (a) and (b).

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
The word ‘invention’ means –
(a) medicines
(b) Sulpha drugs
(c) noble
(d) discovery
Answer:
(d) discovery

Passage 3

The elephant is the only animal with a trunk?. It uses its trunk in many ways. It pulls leaves of trees with its trunk and then puts them into its mouth. It can use its trunk to get water. The trunk can hold a lot of water to drink. An elephant needs to drink more than three pints of water every day. In Africa, men have hunted elephants for their tusks. The ivory from tusks is made into many beautiful things.
heavy things over long distances.

Word-meanings : 1. trunk- हाथी की सूंड ; 2. pint- तरल पदार्थ नापने की इकाई ; 3. tusk- हाथी का लम्बा दांत जो मुंह से बाहर निकला होता है ; 4. ivory- हाथीदांत।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
An elephant uses its trunk to …..
(a) pull leaves
(b) put food into its mouth
(c) get water
(d) all of these three.
Answer:
(d) all of these three.

Question 2.
How much water does an elephant need to drink in a day?
(a) More than one pint of water.
(b) More than three pints of water.
(c) Less than two pints of water.
(d) Less than four pints of water.
Answer:
(b) More than three pints of water.

Question 3.
Which is the only animal who has a trunk ?
(a) The lion.
(b) The horse.
(c) The leopard.
(d) The elephant
Answer:
(d) The elephant

Question 4.
The ivory from ………… is used to make many beautiful things.
(a) trunk
(b) tusks
(c) tail
(d) trumpet.
Answer:
(b) tusks

Question 5.
Which word in the passage means ‘teeth?
(a) tusks
(b) trunk
(d) ivory.
Answer:
(b) tusks

Passage 4.

Guru Gobind Singh, the last of the ten Sikh Gurus, was a great son of India. He led India to sublime heights of glory. He brought about moral resurgences and created order out of disorderly social conditions. He was a multi-faceted personality. He was a poet, a soldier, a statesman, a leader and a true socialist, all in one. He put life into the dying social order by giving it a wholly new outlook.

Word-meanings : 1. sublime – उत्कृष्ट, भव्य; 2. glory – यश, गौरव: ; 3. resurgence – एक बार फिर से अधिक ताक़तवर तथा अधिक प्रसिद्ध होना।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Who was the last Sikh Guru ?
(a) Guru Nanak Dev.
(b) Guru Gobind Singh.
(c) Guru Arjun Dev.
(d) Guru Ram Das.
Answer:
(b) Guru Gobind Singh.

Question 2.
What did he do to improve the social order ?
(a) He brought about financial prosperity.
(b) He brought about moral resurgence.
(c) Both (a) and (b).
(d) Neither (a) nor (b).
Answer:
(b) He brought about moral resurgence.

Question 3.
How did he put life into the dying social order ?
(a) By working for the poor and weak people.
(b) By leading it to heights of glory.
(c) By giving it a wholly new outlook.
(d) None of these three.
Answer:
(c) By giving it a wholly new outlook.

Question 4.
Guru Gobind Singh was ……..
(a) a great soldier
(b) a great poet
(c) a true socialist
(d) any of these three.
Answer:
(d) any of these three.

Question 5.
The antonym of the word ‘disorderly’ is ……..
(a) ordered
(b) disorder
(c) orderly
(d) disordered.
Answer:
(c) orderly

Passage 5

True Friendship:

Everyone that flatters thee
Is no friend in misery.
Words are easy like the wind
Faithful friends are hard to find.

Every man will be thy friend,
Whilst thou hast wherewithal to spend.
But if store of crowns” be scant,

No man will supply thy want’.
He that is thy friend indeed,
He will help thee in thy need.
If thou sorrow, he will weep,
If thou wake, he cannot sleep.
Thus of every grief in heart,
He with thee doth bear a part.

These are certain signs to know,
Faithful friends from flattering foe. -William Shakespeare

Word-meanings : 1. flatter – चापलूसी करना, खुशामद करना; 2. thee, thou – तुम्हें, तुम; 3. easy like the wind – कुछ खर्च नहीं होता; 4. wherewithal – सम्पत्ति; 5. crowns – पुराने समय में ब्रिटेन में प्रचलित सिक्के; 6. scant – कम, थोड़ा; 7. want – ज़रूरत, आवश्यकता; 8. doth bear – लेता है; 9. foe – शत्रु।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What is this poem about ?
(a) About the love of money.
(b) About true friendship.
(c) About great leaders.
(d) About foolish persons.
Answer:
(b) About true friendship.

Question 2.
What does the poet say about flatterers ?
(a) He calls them friends.
(b) He calls them enemies.
(c) He calls them teachers.
(d) He calls them poets.
Answer:
(b) He calls them enemies.

Question 3.
When do people become our friends ?
(a) When we have the money to spend.
(b) When we have the time to spare.
(c) When we have the power to rule.
(d) When we have the wisdom to judge.
Answer:
(a) When we have the money to spend.

Question 4.
How will a true friend feel when we are in grief?
(a) He will feel a sense of relief.
(b) He will feel bored and disturbed.
(c) He will feel very indifferent.
(d) He will feel very unhappy.
Answer:
(d) He will feel very unhappy.

Question 5.
What distinction does the poet want us to understand ?
(a) The distinction between poverty and riches.
(b) The distinction between high and low.
(c) The distinction between friends and flatterers.
(d) The distinction between purity and impurity.
Answer:
(c) The distinction between friends and flatterers.

Passage 6

The Centipede

The little creature
with a hundred feet
was on its journey
to where

only it knew
My civilised foot
dressed in polished leather
came down upon it
ever so gently

there was only a soft sound
signifyings
the end
of a creature of God
my Maker.

I looked to see
if my sole was soiled?
and walked away.

word-meanings : 1. centipede – कनखजूरा ; 2. creature – जीव ; 3. civilised – सभ्य ; 4. polished leather – पॉलिश किए चमड़े के जूते ; 5. signifying – व्यक्त करते हुए ; 6. sole – तलवा ; 7. soiled – गन्दा होना।

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
What little creature does the poet talk of ?
(a) The scorpion.
(b) The wasp.
(c) The ringworm.
(d) The centipede.
Answer:
(d) The centipede.

Question 2.
Why does the poet call his foot civilised ?
(a) Because he was wearing polished shoes.
(b) Because his foot had crushed the little creature.
(c) Because his polished shoes had come down gently upon the little creature.
(d) None of the above.
Answer:
(c) Because his polished shoes had come down gently upon the little creature.

Question 3.
What kind of poem would you say this is ?
(a) Romantic.
(b) Satirical.
(c) Humorous.
(d) Religious.
Answer:
(b) Satirical.

Question 4.
What happened when the poet’s foot came down upon the little creature ?
(a) There was a soft sound.
(b) There was a loud sound.
(c) There was a sharp cry.
(d) There was no sound at all.
Answer:
(a) There was a soft sound.

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
The poet walked away. What does this show ?
(a) He was full of repentance on what he had done.
(b) He was full of pity for the little creature.
(c) He was indifferent to what had happened.
(d) He was full of praise for God.
Answer:
(c) He was indifferent to what had happened.

Passage 7.

Who Loved The Best :
‘I Love you, mother,’ said little John;
Then, forgetting his work his cap went on,
And he was off to the garden swing?,
Leaving his mother, the wood to bring.
‘I love you, mother,’ said little Nell,
‘I love you better than tongue can tell.’
Then she teased and pouted half the day,
Till mother rejoiced when she went to play.
‘I love you, mother,’ said little Fan,

“To-day I’ll help you all I can’.
To the cradle then she did softly creep
And rocked the baby till it fell asleep.
Then stepping softly she took the broom
And swept floor and dusted the room.
Busy and happy all day was she,
Helpful and cheerful as child can be.
‘I love you, mother,’ again they said,
Three little children going to bed.
How do you think the mother guessed”,
Which of them really loved the best?

Word-meanings : 1. little – नन्हा; 2. swing— झूला; 3. pouted – मुंह फुला लिया; 4. rejoiced – बहुत खुश हो गई; 5. cradle – पालना; 6. cheerful- प्रसन्न guessed–अंदाज़ा लगाया

Choose the correct option to answer each question :

Question 1.
Who said, “I love you, mother’?
(a) John.
(b) Nell.
(c) Fan.
(d) All the three.
Answer:
(d) All the three.

Question 2.
Who had to bring the wood ?
(a) Mother.
(b) John
(c) Nell.
(d) Fan.
Answer:
(a) Mother.

Question 3.
Who was lying in the cradle ?
(a) John.
(b) Nell.
(c) Fan.
(d) None of these three.
Answer:
(d) None of these three.

Question 4.
Who was busy and happy all day ?
(a) Little John.
(b) Little Nell.
(c) Little Fan.
(d) The mother.
Answer:
(c) Little Fan.

Question 5.
Who do you think loved mother the best ?
(a) John.
(b) Nell.
(c) Fan
(d) None of these three.
Answer:
(c) Fan

Passage 8

The storm came on before its time,
She wandered? up and down;
And many a hill did Lucy climb;
But never reached the town.

The wretched parents all that night,
Went shouting far and wide;
But there was neither sound nor sight,
To serve them for a guide.

Word-meanings : 1. wandered — इधर-इधर भटकती रही; 2. wretched – दुःखी, शोक-संतप्त; 3. far and wide – दूर-दूर तक।

Choose the correct answer for each question :

Question 1.
When did the storm come ?
(a) Before its time.
(b) After its time.
(c) At midnight.
(d) Early in the morning.
Answer:
(a) Before its time.

Question 2.
Why did Lucy not reach the town?
(a) Because she didn’t want to travel in the storm.
(b) Because she didn’t want to leave her native place.
(c) Because she drowned in the river.
(d) Because she lost her way in the storm.
Answer:
(d) Because she lost her way in the storm.

Question 3.
What did the parents do?
(a) They went to the town.
(b) They searched for Lucy all night.
(c) They waited for her return from the town.
(d) They went to the police station for help.
Answer:
(b) They searched for Lucy all night.

Question 4.
She wandered ………..
(a) up and down
(b) here and there
(c) far and wide
(d) near and far.
Answer:
(a) up and down

PSEB 10th Class English Reading Comprehension Unseen Passages

Question 5.
But there was …..
(a) neither heat nor light
(b) neither sound nor sight
(c) either heat or light
(d) either sound or sight.
Answer:
(b) neither sound nor sight

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Punjab State Board PSEB 11th Class Political Science Book Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 11 Political Science Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Discuss the qualifications, mode of election and procedure for impeachment of the President of India.
Or
How is the President of India elected?
Answer:
Since India is a Republic, the President of India is elected by the people in an indirect manner for a fixed time. As to what method should be adopted for the election of the President, there was no unanimity of opinion in the Constituent Assembly. One suggestion was that the President should be directly elected by the people.

It will not only be in consonance with the democratic principles but it will also make the President the direct representative of the people. This proposal was rejected on the ground that such a method will unnecessarily convulse the nation, particularly when he was being made the nominal head of the State. The other proposal was that the President should be elected only by the members of the Union Parliament.

This proposal was equally rejected because in that case the President would become a puppet in the hands of the majority party. That would rob him of all his appearance of independence and dignity. In order to uphold the federal principle, it was finally agreed that the States should also be given a share in the election of the President.

Qualifications:
The Constitution prescribes the following qualifications for a presidential candidate-

  • He should be a citizen of India.
  • He must have completed the age of 35 years.
  • He must be qualified to be elected as a member of the Lok Sabha.
  • He must not hold any office of profit under the Government of India or any State Government or local authority.However, this provision is not applicable to a person who holds the office of the President, Vice-President, Governors and Ministers of the Central and State Government.
  • He cannot at the same time be a member of the Parliament or a member of State Legislature; his seat will be deemed to have been vacated on the date he assumes his office as President.
  • According to Presidential and Vice-Presidential Elections Act, the candidate for the office of president must deposit Rs. 15,000 as security.
  • The name of the candidate for the office of President must be proposed by 50 electors and seconded by 50 electors.

Method of Election:
Following are the features of the election of the President of India-

1. President elected by an Electoral College:
The President of India is elected by an electoral college consisting of the elected members of the Lok Sabha, the elected members of the Rajya Sabha and the elected members of the State Legislative Assemblies.

2. System of Proportional Representation:
The election of the President is held in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable vote.

3. Uniformity of Representation:
According to the Constitution, as far as possible, there is to be maintained uniformity of representation of the different States at the presidential election and parity between the States as a whole and the Union. In other words, in the election of the President, the principle of ‘One member- One-vote’ had not been and could not be adopted. In different States different ratios prevail between the population and the number of legislators.

The Constituencies in the different States are unequal in the matter of population. For example, in one State it may be one representative for every 50,000 of the population while in another the proportion may be one to 75,000 or more. Thus since the States differ in their population, the strength of the elected members of the State Legislative Assemblies also differs. Then, the total strength of the elected members of the State Legislative Assemblies is far greater than that of the elected members of both the Houses of Parliament. That being so, the problem was to ensure that the votes cast will have a value in proportion to the population that the votes represented.

4. Procedure of determining the votes of the Members of the State Assembly:
Article 55(4) of the Constitution lays down the procedure of determining the votes of the member of the State Assembly, which is as follows:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 1
If the remainder is less than 500, it is ignored.
If it is more than 500, then the vote of each member shall be further increased by one.
For example, in 2017 population of Punjab was 27,704,236 and the Legislative Assembly of Punjab consists of 117 members. Hence each member was entitled to cast 237 votes:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 2
5. Procedure of determining the votes of the Members of the Parliament:
The Constitution lays down the following procedure of determining the votes of the member of Parliament.
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 3
Fraction exceeding one-half being counted as one. Let us explain this formula also by taking an example. Suppose the total number of votes assigned to the elected members of all the State Legislative Assemblies is 424856 and the total strength of elected members of the Parliament is 705. Now to obtain the number of votes which elected member of the Parliament will have at the election of the President:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 4
In the presidential election in July 2017, the number of votes of each member of the Parliament entitled to vote was 708.
Total votes of the elected member of State Assemblies = 5,49,495
No. of elected members of the Parliament = 776 (Lok Sabha 543 + Rajya Sabha 233)
No. of votes of each member of the Parliament = \(\frac {5,49,495 }{776}\) = 708
Total votes of the members of the Parliament = 708 x 776 = 5,49,408
Total votes of the electoral college = 5,49,495 + 5,49,408 = 10,98,903

6. Vacant Seats in Electoral College:
The President of India, as said, is elected by an electoral college. Now the question arises if the electoral college is not complete, how to proceed with the election of the President. Our Constitution was not clear on this point. To remove this flaw 11th Amendment (1961) was made in the Constitution.
According to this amendment, the election of the President or the Vice-President cannot be challenged on the ground of any vacancy in the electoral college for whatever reason among the members of the electoral college electing him.

7. Method of Fixing the Quota:
Under the system of Proportional Representation a candidate to be elected, must secure the necessary quota of votes. The quota is determined by the following formula:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 5
Suppose the total number of valid votes polled at the presidential election is 8,00,000. Applying the above-mentioned formula, the quota shall be:
\(\frac {800000}{1+1}\) + 1 = 4,00,001
In order to be elected, the candidate must secure 4,00,001 votes-an absolute majority of votes. If the first counting does not give any candidate the quota of votes, the candidate who got the least number of votes is eliminated and his votes transferred to the remaining candidates on the basis of the preferences shown. The process is repeated until one candidate gets the requisite number of votes. Let us explain the system in detail.

Assuming that there are four candidates and the total number of valid votes cast are 15,000.
To be declared elected President, a candidate must secure a minimum of 7501 votes. Now suppose the first preference votes secured by the four candidates are as follows:
A—5250
B—4800
C—2700
D—2250
Since the candidate D gets the least number of votes, hence he is eliminated. Now the second preference votes on his 2250 ballot papers shall be counted.
Suppose A gets 300, B gets 1050 and C gets 900.

Now the total votes of A are 5250 + 300 = 5550, of B are 4800 + 1050 = 5800 and of C are 2700 + 900 = 3600. It means even now no candidate is securing the requisite quota of 7501 votes.

Now candidate C shall be eliminated because he got the least number of votes. Now third preference votes on the 3600 votes of C shall be counted. In the third preference suppose A gets 1700 and B gets 1900.
Now the total votes of A are 5550 + 1700 = 7250
Total votes of B are = 5850 + 1900 = 7750

According to the Proportional Representation system, B shall be declared President. The system proves the doctrine that candidate B is preferred by a numerically large number of electors than candidate A. It may be recalled that the election of Mr. V. V. Giri was decided in the Second Count. “It made the people realise the significance of the system of proportional represenataion by means of single transferable vote.”

So far fifteen presidential elections have been held in India:

  1. First election was held in 1952 and Dr. Rajendra Prasad was elected.
  2. Second election was held in 1957 and again Dr. Rajendra Prasad was elected.
  3. Third election was held in 1962 and Dr. Radhakrishnan was elected.
  4. Fourth election was held in 1967 and Dr. Zakin Hussain was elected.
  5. Fifth election was held in 1969 and Shri V. V. Giri was elected.
  6. Sixth election was held in 1974 and Shri Fakhruddin Ali Ahmed was elected.
  7. In July, 1977, for the first time, Shri Sanjiva Reddy was nominated by a consensus of all paries and was elected unopposed.
  8. Eighth election was held in July, 1982 and Congress (I) candidate Giani Zail Singh was elected and opposition candidiate Justice Khanna was defeated.
  9. Ninth Presidential election was held in July, 1987 and Congress (I) candidate R. Venkataraman was elected and opposition candidate Justice V. R. Krishna Iyer was defeated.
  10. Tenth Presidential election was held in July, 1992 and Congress (I) candidate Dr. Shankar Dyal Sharma was elected and opposition candidate was defeated.
  11. Eleventh Presidential election was held in July 1997. Joint candidate of United Front and Congress Mr. K. R. Narayanan supported by BJP and others was elected and Mr. T. N. Seshan was defeated. Mr. K. R. Narayanan secured 94.97 per cent of the votes.
  12. Twelfth Presidential election was held in July, 2002. Joint candidate of rulling National Democratic Alliance Dr. A.P. J. Abdul Kalam supported by Indian National Congress, Bahujan Samaj Party, Samajvadi Party, Janata Dal and others was elected and Capt. Lakshmi Sahgal, the opposition candidate supported by Communist Parties was defeated.
  13. 13th Presidential election was held in July 2007, joint candidate of United Progressive Alliance Mrs. Pratibha Devi Singh Patil was elected and Independent Candidate Mr. Bhairon Singh Shekhawat was defeated.
  14. 14th Presidential election was held in July 2012. Candidate of UPA and Supported by S.P., B.S.P., Janata Dal (U) and Shiv Seva, Mr. Pranab Mukherjee was elected and independent candidate Mr. P.A. Sangma was defeated.
  15. 15th Presidential election was held in July 2017. Candidate of N.D.A. Sh. Ram Nath Kovind was elected and U.P.A. candidate Smt. Meera Kumar was defeated.

The election of the President is conducted by the Chief Election Commissioner. He issues the notification and fixes dates for nomination, scrutiny of nomination and withdrawal of candidature. Only those eligible to vote in the election of the President, i.e. elected members of Parliament and elected members of the State Legislative Assemblies can propose a candidate for election. The Chief Election Commissioner counts the votes cast and declares the result.

The validity of the election of the President can be challenged by the electors only. The election of the President can be challenged only after the completion of the election, i.e., after a candidate is declared to be elected to the office of the President. If a petition is allowed before such election, it would involve the non-compliance with the mandatory provisions of Art. 62 which says that an election to fill a vacancy caused by the expiration of the term of the office of the President shall be completed before the expiration of the term.

Oath of the President:
Before entering upon his office, the President elected or any person acting as President for discharging the functions of President, is required to take an oath in the presence of the Chief Justice, or in his absence, the senior-most judge of the Supreme Court available.

Tenure:
The President is elected for a period of five years. The period of five years begins from the day he enters upon his office. The President is eligible for re-election.

Removal by Impeachment:
The President can be removed from office by impeachment only. The Constitution lays down a detailed procedure for the impeachment of the President. He can be impeached “for violation of the Constitution”.

When a President is to be impeached for the violation of the Constitution, the charges can be prepared by either House of the Parliament. In other words, the impeachment charged may be initiated by the Lok Sabha or the Rajya Sabha. (in the United States of America, this right belongs exclusively to the Lower House, i.e., the House of Representatives). But no such charge is to be preferred unless the proposal to prefer such a charge is contained in a resolution which has been moved after at least 14 days’ notice in writing signed by not less than one-fourth of the total number of members of the House.

The resolution must be passed by a two-third majority of the total membership of the House. If passed by the requisite majority in one house, it is sent to the other House for investigation. The other House is empowered to entrust this job of investigation to a court or tribunal.

However, the resolution had got to be passed by the other house by a two-third majority of the total membership of this House. If the other House also passes the resolution by a two-third majority of the total membership of this House, then it means the charge is proved and the President is removed from his office from the ‘date’ (word ‘time has not been used’) on which the investigating House passes the resolution.

However, the President has the right to be heard and defended when the charges against him are being investigated. He may defend himself in person or through his council. One thing to be noted here is that there is no provision for suspension of the President under impeachment. He continues to hold his office during the period of investigation.

Salary and Allowances:
The President of India gets a salary of Rs. 5,00,000 per month and an official residence (called Rashtrapati Bhavan in New Delhi) free of rent. In addition to the salary, the President also gets handsome allowances of various kinds as determined by Parliament. According to the President’s Pension Act, a person who ceases to hold office as President, either by expiration of his term of office or by resignation, is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,50,000. The Government may also allow him a free medical aid as was done in the case of Dr. Rajendra Prasad.

The salary and other allowances of the President are charged on the Consolidated Fund of India. According to Art. 59 (4), the emoluments and allowances of the President shall not be diminished during his term of office.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 2.
Describe the powers of the President of India
Or
Discuss the executive and judicial powers of the President.
Or
Explain the powers of the President of India other than emergency powers.
Answer:
The Constitution of India establishes a federal form of government.
According to Art. 53, the executive powers of the Union have been vested in the President which shall be exercised by him directly or through officers subordinate to him in accordance with the Constitution. However, India being a parliamentary form of government, the President is only a nominal head and the working executive is the Council of Ministers headed by the Prime Minister.
The powers of the President can be divided into two categories-
(A) Powers in normal times and
(B) Emergency powers.

(A) POWERS IN NORMAL TIMES:
During normal times the President exercises four types of powers:
1. Executive Powers
2. Legislative Powers
3. Financial Powers
4. Judicial Powers.

1. Executive Powers:
The President is the Chief Executive or Head of the State. According to Art. 53 (1) of the Constitution, the executive powers of the Union have been vested in the President. He may exercise these powers himself or get them exercised through officers subordinate to him.

(i) Appointments:
The President is authorised to make a number of appointments. He appoints the Prime Minister and the other Ministers on the advice of the Prime Minister, the Attorney General, the Comptroller and the Auditor General, Judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts, the Chairman and Members of Joint Public Service Commission, the Chairman and members of Joint Public Service Commission, the Election Commission, Finance Commission, the Official

Language Commission and Commission for the Scheduled Castes, Tribes, Backward Classes, etc. He also appoints the State Governors, Lt. Governors and Chief Commissioners of the Union Territories. He also sends and receives diplomatic representatives. He makes rule for the convenient transaction of business of the Government of India and allocates this business among the Ministers. Under Art. 78, the Prime Minister is bound to communicate to the President all decisions of the Cabinet relating to administration and such proposals for legislation as the President may call for.

(ii) Military Powers:
The President is the Supreme Commander of the Defence Forces, but the exercise of military powers of the President is regulated by the Parliament. The President cannot declare war or deploy forces without the sanction of the Parliament or in anticipation of the sanction by the Parliament.

(iii) Power Relating to Foreign Affairs:
The President has extensive diplomatic powers. He represents his country in international affairs. He appoints Indian representatives to foreign countries and also receives diplomatic representatives of other States which have been recognised by Parliament.

(iv) Power of Direction, Control and Co-ordination:
The President has the power of direction, control and co-ordination of the work in the States. He can issue directions to the States for the compliance of Union laws. In particular, he can direct a State or States to construct and maintain communications of national or military importance and for the protection of railways. He can establish an Inter-State council to advise him upon co-ordination of policy and settlement of disputes between the States.

(v) Administration of Union Territories:
Art. 239 provides that every Union Territory shall be administered by the President acting through an administrator. The administrator, given any designation by the President, is appointed by the President. The President may appoint the Governor of a State as the administrator of an adjoining Union Territory. When the Governor is discharging the duties of the administrator he shall exercise his functions as administrator independently of his Council of Ministers.

The Parliament by law can establish democratic institutions in the Union Territories. The President can make regulations for the peace, progress and good government of the Union Territory of the Andaman and Nicobar Islands and the Laccadive, Minicoy and Amindivi Islands. The regulations made by the President have the same effect as an act of Parliament. The President is also competent to repeal or amend, through such regulations, any existing Act dealing with the administration of these Islands.

(vi) Informative Powers:
The President had a right to ask for information with regard to the decision of the Council of Ministers. The Prime Minister is required to keep in touch with the President for this purpose.

(vii) Sending back the decision of the Council of Ministers for reconsideration:
Under 44th amendment the President is empowered to send back the decision of the Council of Ministers for reconsideration, but if the council of Ministers repeats the decision, then the President is bound to accept the decision.

(viii)Link between the Centre and States:
The President is the link between the centre and the states. He is the executive head both of the union and of the federation.

2. Legislative Powers:
The President enjoys many legislative powers. He is a part of the Parliament. Besides the Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha, the President is also a part of the Parliament. The legislative powers of the President are provided by Article 123.

(i) Power to Summon:
Prorogue and Dissolve the Parliament. The President can convene, prorogue and dissolve the Parliament. He can order fresh elections to the Lok Sabha on the recommendation of the Prime Minister. He must call the session of the Parliament within 6 months.

(ii) Address to the Parliament:
He can address the two Houses of the Parliament jointly or he may address them independently. The first session of the Parliament after the General elections is inaugurated by the President. He also addresses the first session of the Parliament every year. In his address the President explains the policy of the Government to the House.

(iii) Nominates the Members of the Parliament:
He nominates 12 persons to the Rajya Sabha. These persons must have distinguished themselves in the fields of art, literature, science and social service. He can nominate two persons of the Anglo-Indian community to the Lok Sabha if he feels that the community has not got adequate representation.

(iv) Assent on Bills:
No bill passed by the Parliament can become an Act without the assent of the President. He can reject an ordinary bill only once and when passed for the second time, the President is to give his assent.

(v) He gives approval to many bills passed by the State Legislatures.

(vi) Joint Session:
He can call a joint session of the two Houses of the Parliament. If the two Chambers differ on an ordinary bill, only then he calls a joint session.

(vii) Power to Send Messages: He can send messages to any House from time to time.

(viii)Ordinance:
During the intervals of the sessions of the Parliament he can issue ordinances. These ordinances have the force of laws. The ordinance is put before the Parliament as soon as it meets. The Parliament has the authority to reject the ordinance. It can be withdrawn by the President also. If it is neither rejected by the Parliament nor withdrawn by the President, it will automatically end six weeks after the first meeting of the Parliament. On Sept. 22, 1980 the President promulgated the National Security Ordinance to enable the government to detain any person to prevent him from acting against the defence or security of the country.

(ix) Constitutional Amendment Bill:
A Constitutional Amendment Bill is finally sent to the President for his assent. The President is bound to give his assent to the Constitutional Amendment Bilk

3. Financial Powers:
The financial powers of the President as mentioned in the Constitution are as follows:

(i) It is the duty of the President to place the Budget for the current year before the Parliament. It is to be presented before the beginning of the financial year. Normally the budget is presented to the Parliament by the Finance Minister on behalf of the President.

(ii) Money Bills can only be introduced in the Parliament on the recommendation of the President.

(iii) The President has full control over the contingency fund and he can spend it according to his sweet will.

(iv) He distributes the share of income tax among the States.

(v) He appoints Finance Commission. 15th Finance Commission was appointed on 27 Nov.- 2017 in the Chairmanship of Sh.N.K. Singh.

4. Judicial Powers:
The President has some judicial power also. It is provided by Article 122 of the Constitution.

  • The President appoints the judges and the chief justice to the Supreme Court and the State High Courts.
  • The President cannot be sured in any court of India in connection with any matter concerning his office.
  • He has the power to pardon, reprieve and commute punishment.

(B) EMERGENCY POWERS
Besides powers in normal times the President of India has Emergency Powers as well. The President enjoys three types of emergency powers:
1. Emergency due to external aggression or armed rebellion.
2. Emergency arising out of failure of the constitutional machinery a State.
3. Financial emergency.

For detailed study of Emergency Powers:
1. Emergency arising out of external aggression or Armed Rebellion:
According to Art. 352 if the President is satisfied that a grave emergency exists whereby the security of India or any part of India is threatened by war, external aggression or armed rebellion, he may proclaim a state of emergency. Under 59th amendment in Punjab emergency can be declared on the ground of internal disturbances. The President can declare emergency even before the actual occurrence of war, external aggression or armed rebellion.

But in the 44th Amendment it is provided that the President shall not issue a proclamation of Emergency unless the decision of the Cabinet that such a proclamation may be issued has been communicated to him in writing. According to 42nd Amendment, President can declare emergency in the whole of India or in such part of the territory there of as may be specified in the proclamation. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a consequent proclamation. If the proclamation has not been approved within one month by both the Houses of Parliament by two-thirds of the majority of the members present and voting, it will become ineffective. If such a

proclamation is issued at a time when the Lok Sabha has been dissolved or the dissolution of the Lok Sabha takes place during the period of one month, and if the Rajya Sabha has approved the proclamation within one month, but it had not been approved by the Lok Sabha, the proclamation shall cease to operate at the expiration of 30 days from the date on which the Lok Sabha sits after its reconstitution. However, if within 30 days the Lok Sabha approves the proclamation, it continues.

After approval of the Parliament emergency continues till the President revokes it by a subsequent proclamation. But it is provided in the 44th Amendment that for the continuance of the emergency, approval by resolution of both Houses would be required every six months. Provision is also made in the 44th Amendment that the proclamation of Emergency would cease to be opeative whenever a resolution to that effect is adopted by the Lok Sabha by a simple majority of the members of the House present and voting.

Ever since the operation of the Constitution (Jan. 26, 1950), such an emergency has been declared three times. First, when India was attacked by China in October, 1962 and second when all of a sudden, Pakistan attacked India on December 3, 1971. Third time internal emergency was declared on 26th June, 1975 and this emergency was-removed on 21st March, 1977 whereas external emergency declared in 1971 was lifted on 27th March, 1977.

Effects of this Proclamation:
1. The most significant effect of this proclamation is that the federal form of the Constitution is converted into unitary form of government. The authority of the Centre is increased till the emergency lasts. It should be remembered the State Governments do not cease to function. They continue, to function as before under normal conditions. But the Centre gets the authority to give directions to the States as the manner in which the executive power of the States is to be exercised. The legislative power of the Centre is also widened.

2. Parliament will have the power to make laws for the whole or part of India with respect to any of the matters given in the State List. Laws so made by Parliament shall cease to operate six months after the Proclamation of Emergency has come to an end.

3. The President, may by an order, modify the provisions relating to distribution of revenues between the Union and the States.

4. The Fundamental Rights given under Art. 19 (six freedoms) are automatically suspended throughout the country. The suspension of Art. 19 continues until the proclamation of emergency ends. However, under 59th Amendment this right can be suspended when emergency is declared in Punjab.

5. The President by order can also suspend the right to move the courts to enforce any Fundamental Rights. All proceedings pending in any court for the enforcement of the rights so mentioned may remain suspended for the period during which Proclamation is in force or for such short period as may be specified in the order. But according to 44th Amendmenl the enforcement of the right to life and personal liberty under Article 21 cannot be suspended. The order so made may extend to the whole or to any part of the territory of India. However, the order of the

parliament is required to be laid before each House of Parliament “as soon as may be after it is made.” And what is the definition of ‘as soon as may be’, the constitution does not fix any time limit for the order to be laid before Parliament.

2. Emergency arising out of the failure of constitutional machinery in a State. (Art. 356):
The second type of emergncy powers given to the President deal with the failure of constitutional machinery in the State. If the President, either on the receipt of a report from the Governor of a State or otherwise, is satisfied that a situation has arisen in which the Government of the State cannot be carried on in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the President can proclaim emergency in that state.

In May, 1994, the Supreme Court had declared that dismissal of a state government by the President under Article 356 of the Constitution is open to judicial scrutiny. The apex Court had held that presidential proclamation under Article 356 could be challenged only on the ground that the exercise of power was malafide or based on wholly extraneous and irrelevant grounds.

Any proclamation made under Art. 356 may be revoked or varied by a subsequent Proclamation. The Proclamation issued by the President is required to be laid before each House of Parliament and it ceases to operate after the expiry of two months unless before the expiration of that period it has been approved by resolutions of both Houses of Parliament. If approved by Parliament, the Proclamation, remains in force for six months after the parliamentary approval. The duration of the proclamation can be extended for six months at a time and the maximum period is one year.

According to 44th Amendment, a resolution with respect to the continuance in force of a Proclamation under the article for any period beyond the expiration of one year from the date of issue of such proclamation shall not be passed by either House of Parliament unless a Proclamation of Emergency is in operation at the time of the passing of such resolution and the Election Commission certifies that the continuance in force of the proclamation under the Article during the period specified in such resolution is necessary on account of difficulties in holding elections to the Legislative Assembly of the State concerned.

Under 59th Amendment in Punjab President’s rule can be extended up-to three years. Under 64th Amendment President’s rule in Punjab was extended six months more beyond three years. By 68th amendment President’s rule in Punjab can be extended up-to 5 years.

Effects of this Proclamation:
(i) The President can assume to himself all or any of the functions of the State or he may vest all or any of those functions in the Governor or any other executive authority.

(ii) The President can suspend or dissolve the State Legislative Assembly. He may declare that the powers of the State Legislature shall be exercisable by or under the authority of Parliament. However, Parliament will be competent to confer that power on the President and also authorise him to delegate those powers to anybody he thinks fit. .

(iii) The President can make any other incidental or consequential provisions necessary to give effect to the object of the Proclamation.

(iv) If the Lok Sabha is not in session then the President sanctions the expenditure from the consolidated fund of the State.

President’s rule has been promulgated almost 121 times in states since the enforcement of the Constitution. Almost all the States have been, at one time or the other, been put under President’s Rule.

3. Financial Emergency (Art. 360):
If the President is satisfied that a situation has arisen whereby the financial stability or credit of India or any part of it is threatened, he may declare a Financial Emergency under Art. 360 of the Constitution. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a subsequent Proclamation. The proclamation has to be laid before each House of Parliament.

It ceases to operate at the expiration of two months unless it is approved earlier by a resolution of both Houses of Parliament. The Proclamation in this case also should be approved by Parliament as in the other two cases of emergency. Like the Proclamation of war-emergency, Financial Emergency also continues for an indefinite period. Fortunately, this kind of Emergency has not been declared so far.

Effects of this Proclamation:
(i) During the Financial emergency, the executive authority of the union shall extend to the giving of directions to any State to observe such canons of financial property as may be specified in the direction or any other directions which the President may deem necessary for this purpose.

(ii) The President can ask a State to reduce salaries and allowances of all or any class of public servants connected with the affairs of a State.

(iii) The President can give direction to a State to reserve all Money Bills for the consideration of the President after they have been passed by the State Legislature.

(iv) The President shall be competent to issue directions for the reduction of salaries and allowances of all or any class of persons serving in connection with the affairs of the Union including the judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.

Criticism:
Evidently the Constitution gives the President very drastic powers to deal with Emergency. Emergency powers of the President were criticised within and outside the Constituent Assembly. It has been said that these powers are not compatible with democracy. When the provisions relating to Emergency powers were passed, Sh. H. V. Kamath, member of the Constituent Assembly, declared, “ It is a day of shame and sorrow, God save the Indian people.”

Sh. K. T. Shah described Article 359, which empowers the President to suspend the right to seek enforcement of fundamental rights “as the grand final and crowning glory of this chapter of reaction and retrogression.” The power to abrogate fundamental rights of citizens during Emergencies can easily be abused for depriving the people of their liberty and imposing a totalitarian rule on the country.

According to H. V. Kamath, “ There is no parallel to the chapter of Emergency in any Constitution of democratic countries of the world”. He further said,, “I fear that by the single chapter we are seeking to lay the foundation of a totalitarian State, a police State, State completely opposed to all the ideas and principles that we have held aloft during the last few decades, a State where the rights and liberties of millions of innocent men and women will be in continuous jeopardy, a State where if there be peace it will be the peace of the grave and the void of the desert. I only pray to God that He may grant us wisdom, wisdom to avert any such catastrophe, grant us fortitude and courage.”

Another point of criticism is that during Emergency federal structure is changed into unitary one. T. T. Krishnamachari said, “The Constitution of India is designed to work as a federal system in normal times and as a unitary system in war and other emergencies.” Moreover, ruling party at the Centre by using Article 356 can declare President’s rule in a particular State simply because some other party is ruling the State. Article 356 was misused when nine state governments were dismissed on 30th April 1977 and in Feb 1980.

Justification of Emergency Powers. Emergency powers of the President are defended on the ground that Strong Centre is needed for security of the country. V. N. Shukla writes, “ These provisions may appear to be harsh, particularly in a constitution which professes to be built upon an edifice of fundamental rights and democracy. But the provisions may be studied in the light of India’s past history. India has had her inglorious days whenever the Central power was weak.

It is well that the Constitution guards against the forces of disintegration. Events may take place threatening the very existence of the State, together with all that is desired to remain basic and immutable will be swept away.” Country’s security is more important than the federal system. In the words of Dr. Ambedkar, “ It is only the Centre which can work for the common purpose and for the general interest of the country as a whole. Herein lies the justification of giving to the Centre overriding power to be used in the Emergency.”

It is not possible for the President to become a dictator. In India there exists a parliamentary form of Government. The essence of parliamentary form of Government is that the Head of the State is a nominal head. It is the Council of Ministers which is the real executive.

According to 44th Amendment, an Emergency can be proclaimed only on the basis of written advice tendered by the cabinet. In addition a Proclamation of Emergency must be approved by the two Houses of parliament by two-thirds majority within a period of one month.

As a further check against the misuse of the emergency powers and to put the right to life and liberty on a secure footing, it is provided in 44th Amendment Act that the power to suspend the right to move the court for the enforcement of a fundamental right cannot be exercised in respect of the fundamental right to life and liberty.

According to 44th Amendment the provisions of Article 19 will become suspended only in the case of a proclamation of Emergency issued on the ground of war or external aggression and not in the case of a Proclamation of Emergency issued on the ground of armed rebellion. Moreover, if the President tries to become a despot, he will be impeached by the Parliament.

There is no question of autocracy under any circumstances. Only State autonomy may suffer temporarily.” Sh. Amar Nandi rightly remarked that the power conferred on the central executive to meet national emergencies is, so as to say, a loaded gun which can be used both to protect and to destroy the liberty of citizens. The gun must be used, therefore, with extreme caution.

Position of the President:
What exactly is the position of the President in the Indian Constitution? Different writers have taken different and sometimes radical views. A lay man who reads the provisions of the Constitution may literally interpret them and come to the conclusion that he has been armed with drastic powers. His Emergency Power “is a bottomless well of dictatorial possibilities”. Under Art. 53 of the Constitution,
“The Executive power of the Union shall be vested in the President and shall be exercised by him either directly or through officers subordinate to him in accordance with the Constitution.”

It means the President can use the executive powers himself. Under Art. 74 of the Constitution there shall be a Council of Ministers to aid and advise the President in the exercise of his functions. But nowhere it had been stated that the President shall be bound to act in accordance with the advice of the Council of Ministers. Then, the President of India can dissolve Parliament, issue ordinances, declare emergency and can take into his hands the administration of the whole of the country. Being the Supreme Commander of all the forces he can establish his personal rule with the help of the armed forces of the country.

But this is a legal view. And the fact is a legal truth, may be a political untruth. In India, there exists parliamentary form of government. The essence of the parliamentary form of government is that the Head of the State is a titular head, a constitutional head. His powers are formal. It is the Council of Ministers which is the real functionary.

By 42nd amendment even legal position of the President has changed. Under this amendment he was bound to accept the advice of the Council of Ministers. But according to 44th Amendment the President may require the Council of Ministers to reconsider any advice tendered by them and that the President shall act in accordance with the advice tendered after such reconsideration, Thus, the critics argue that the position of the Indian President is one of honour and dignity but not of power.

Commenting upon the position of the President, Dr. Ambedkar had himself said in the Constituent Assembly: “The President occupies the same position as the King under the British Constitution. He is the head of the State but not of the Executive. He represents the nation but does not rule the nation.” To quote him again: “The President of the Indian Union will be generally bound by the advice of ministers.

He can do nothing contrary to their advice nor can he do anything without their advice.” According to late Pt. Nehru, “We have not given our President any real power but we have made his position one of great authority and dignity’. Expressing his views on the position of the President, Sh. Morarji Desai said, “It is wrong to think that our President is vested with any real power of rulership; in normal times he has none, under the Constitution he is merely a constitutional head, very much like the British King.”

However, all the critics do not subscribe to the view that the President under the Constitution is only a figure head. These critics draw our attention to the Weimar Constitution of Germany. The Weimar Constitution was based on thoroughly democratic lines. Yet it gave rise to a dictator, Hitler who trampled under his feet all the democratic principles of the Constitution. Similarly, Dr. Ambedkar himself used the words “ generally bound”. It shows that the President is not a rubber stamp, he is not a puppet in the hands of the Council of Ministers.

The Constitution allows him opportunities when he can use his discretion. For example, he can use his discretion in the appointment of the Prime Minister when no political party gets absolute majority in the Lok Sabha. After all, the President is a promoted politician. As Jennings has said, “He cannot be expected to play the same role of impartiality as is expected from the British Monarch.”

Under Art. 78 of the Constitution, it shall be the duty of the Prime Minister to communicate to the President all decisions of the Council of Ministers relating to the administration of the affairs of the Union and proposals for legislation, to furnish such information ralting to the administration to the affairs of the Union and proposals for legislation as the President may call for Under Art. Ill the President can use his veto power also.

His emergency powers are so sweeping that, as H. V. Kamath feared, he can lay the foundation of a totalitarian State, a police State…. In his address delivered on the occasion of the laying of the foundation stone of the Indian Law Institute, New Delhi in November, 1960, President Rajendra Prasad urged the Institute to make a study of the powers and functions of the President and find out to what extent they differed from those of the King of England.

He was doubtful that the position of the President is like the position of the British Monarch. He clearly pointed out that because the conditions in India were different from those in England, “ It may not be desirable to treat ourselves so strictly bound by the interpretations which have been given from time to time to expressions in England.”

His successor Dr. Radhakrishnan also expressed publicly similar views. While speaking in the civic reception at Kanpur, he said, “Jpdia was suffering because sufficient care had not been taken to explain our position abroad.” Dr. Radhakrishnan was criticising the foreign policy of the country. At the time of the assumption of his office the President has to take the oath to protect, preserve and defend the Constitution and to devote himself to the service and well-being of the people of India. No wonder, he may veto a Bill which in spirit, runs counter to the Directive Principles of State Policy.

Conclusion:
The conclusion is clear. The President is not a rubber-stamp under the Constitution. Accroding to B. Shiva Rao, the President is more than a figure-head. Even President Giri agreed to this view when he said that the country needed a “really independent and strong President who could see things straight and do justice well without fear or favour.” In his election campaign he clearly said, “If elected he would not be a sleeping partner, nor a rubber stamp

He would be an active partner within the four walls of the Constituion.” Thus, a fairly large section of the educated public opinion in the country feels that the president has a share in the actual government of the country. Even Dr. Radhakrishnan on the the day of his retirement indirectly hinted on such a role of the President when he said, “The President symbolizes national purpose and national unity and can be a great influence for stability and progress.”

The real position of the President depends upon his relationship with the Council of Ministers and, to a great extent, upon his personality. It he is a man of dynamic personality, he will have an edge over the Council of Ministers.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 3.
Explain emergency powers of the President.
Or
Discuss the emergency powers of the President of India. Do you agree with the view that the President can become a dictator by exercising them?
Answer:
Besides powers in normal times the President of India has Emergency Powers as well. The President can use the emergency powers even when there is the likelihood of an emergency.
1. Emergency due to external aggression or armed rebellion.
2. Emergency arising out of the failure of the constitutional machinery in the States.
3. Financial emergency.

1. Emergency arising out of external aggression or Armed Rebellion:
According to Art. 352 if the President is satisfied that a grave emergency exists whereby the security of India or any part of India is threatened by war, external aggression or armed rebellion, he may proclaim a state of emergency. Under 59th amendment in Punjab emergency can be declared on the ground of internal disturbances. The President can declare emergency even before the actual occurrence of war, external aggression or armed rebellion.

But in the 44th Amendment it is provided that the President shall not issue a proclamation of Emergency unless the decision of the Cabinet that such a proclamation may be issued has been communicated to him in writing. According to 42nd Amendment, President can declare emergency in the whole of India or in such part of the territory there of as may be specified in the proclamation. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a consequent proclamation. If the proclamation has not been approved within one month by both the Houses of Parliament by two-thirds of the majority of the members present and voting, it will become ineffective. If such a

proclamation is issued at a time when the Lok Sabha has been dissolved or the dissolution of the Lok Sabha takes place during the period of one month, and if the Rajya Sabha has approved the proclamation within one month, but it had not been approved by the Lok Sabha, the proclamation shall cease to operate at the expiration of 30 days from the date on which the Lok Sabha sits after its reconstitution. However, if within 30 days the Lok Sabha approves the proclamation, it continues.

After approval of the Parliament emergency continues till the President revokes it by a subsequent proclamation. But it is provided in the 44th Amendment that for the continuance of the emergency, approval by resolution of both Houses would be required every six months. Provision is also made in the 44th Amendment that the proclamation of Emergency would cease to be operative whenever a resolution to that effect is adopted by the Lok Sabha by a simple majority of the members of the House present and voting.

Ever since the operation of the Constitution (Jan. 26, 1950), such an emergency has been declared three times. First, when India was attacked by China in October, 1962 and second when all of a sudden, Pakistan attacked India on December 3, 1971. Third time internal emergency was declared on 26th June, 1975 and this emergency was-removed on 21st March, 1977 whereas external emergency declared in 1971 was lifted on 27th March, 1977.

Effects of this Proclamation:
1. The most significant effect of this proclamation is that the federal form of the Constitution is converted into unitary form of government. The authority of the Center is increased till the emergency lasts. It should be remembered the State Governments do not cease to function. They continue, to function as before under normal conditions. But the Center gets the authority to give directions to the States as the manner in which the executive power of the States is to be exercised. The legislative power of the Center is also widened.

2. Parliament will have the power to make laws for the whole or part of India with respect to any of the matters given in the State List. Laws so made by Parliament shall cease to operate six months after the Proclamation of Emergency has come to an end.

3. The President, may by an order, modify the provisions relating to distribution of revenues between the Union and the States.

4. The Fundamental Rights given under Art. 19 (six freedoms) are automatically suspended throughout the country. The suspension of Art. 19 continues until the proclamation of emergency ends. However, under 59th Amendment this right can be suspended when emergency is declared in Punjab.

5. The President by order can also suspend the right to move the courts to enforce any Fundamental Rights. All proceedings pending in any court for the enforcement of the rights so mentioned may remain suspended for the period during which Proclamation is in force or for such short period as may be specified in the order. But according to 44th Amendmenl the enforcement of the right to life and personal liberty under Article 21 cannot be suspended. The order so made may extend to the whole or to any part of the territory of India. However, the order of the

parliament is required to be laid before each House of Parliament “as soon as may be after it is made.” And what is the definition of ‘as soon as may be’, the constitution does not fix any time limit for the order to be laid before Parliament.

2. Emergency arising out of the failure of constitutional machinery in a State. (Art. 356):
The second type of emergency powers given to the President deal with the failure of constitutional machinery in the State. If the President, either on the receipt of a report from the Governor of a State or otherwise, is satisfied that a situation has arisen in which the Government of the State cannot be carried on in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the President can proclaim emergency in that state.

In May, 1994, the Supreme Court had declared that dismissal of a state government by the President under Article 356 of the Constitution is open to judicial scrutiny. The apex Court had held that presidential proclamation under Article 356 could be challenged only on the ground that the exercise of power was malafide or based on wholly extraneous and irrelevant grounds.

Any proclamation made under Art. 356 may be revoked or varied by a subsequent Proclamation. The Proclamation issued by the President is required to be laid before each House of Parliament and it ceases to operate after the expiry of two months unless before the expiration of that period it has been approved by resolutions of both Houses of Parliament. If approved by Parliament, the Proclamation, remains in force for six months after the parliamentary approval. The duration of the proclamation can be extended for six months at a time and the maximum period is one year.

According to 44th Amendment, a resolution with respect to the continuance in force of a Proclamation under the article for any period beyond the expiration of one year from the date of issue of such proclamation shall not be passed by either House of Parliament unless a Proclamation of Emergency is in operation at the time of the passing of such resolution and the Election Commission certifies that the continuance in force of the proclamation under the Article during the period specified in such resolution is necessary on account of difficulties in holding elections to the Legislative Assembly of the State concerned.

Under 59th Amendment in Punjab President’s rule can be extended upto three years. Under 64th Amendment President’s rule in Punjab was extended six months more beyond three years. By 68th amendment President’s rule in Punjab can be extended up-to 5 years.

Effects of this Proclamation:
(i) The President can assume to himself all or any of the functions of the State or he may vest all or any of those functions in the Governor or any other executive authority.

(ii) The President can suspend or dissolve the State Legislative Assembly. He may declare that the powers of the State Legislature shall be exercisable by or under the authority of Parliament. However, Parliament will be competent to confer that power on the President and also authorize him to delegate those powers to anybody he thinks fit.

(iii) The President can make any other incidental or consequential provisions necessary to give effect to the object of the Proclamation.

(iv) If the Lok Sabha is not in session then the President sanctions the expenditure from the consolidated fund of the State.

President’s rule has been promulgated almost 121 times in states since the enforcement of the Constitution. Almost all the States have been, at one time or the other, been put under President’s Rule.

3. Financial Emergency (Art. 360):
If the President is satisfied that a situation has arisen whereby the financial stability or credit of India or any part of it is threatened, he may declare a Financial Emergency under Art. 360 of the Constitution. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a subsequent Proclamation. The proclamation has to be laid before each House of Parliament.

It ceases to operate at the expiration of two months unless it is approved earlier by a resolution of both Houses of Parliament. The Proclamation in this case also should be approved by Parliament as in the other two cases of emergency. Like the Proclamation of war-emergency, Financial Emergency also continues for an indefinite period. Fortunately, this kind of Emergency has not been declared so far.

Effects of this Proclamation:
(i) During the Financial emergency, the executive authority of the union shall extend to the giving of directions to any State to observe such canons of financial property as may be specified in the direction or any other directions which the President may deem necessary for this purpose.

(ii) The President can ask a State to reduce salaries and allowances of all or any class of public servants connected with the affairs of a State.

(iii) The President can give direction to a State to reserve all Money Bills for the consideration of the President after they have been passed by the State Legislature.

(iv) The President shall be competent to issue directions for the reduction of salaries and allowances of all or any class of persons serving in connection with the affairs of the Union including the judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.

Criticism:
Evidently the Constitution gives the President very drastic powers to deal with Emergency. Emergency powers of the President were criticised within and outside the Constituent Assembly. It has been said that these powers are not compatible with democracy. When the provisions relating to Emergency powers were passed, Sh. H. V. Kamath, member of the Constituent Assembly, declared, “ It is a day of shame and sorrow, God save the Indian people.”

Sh. K. T. Shah described Article 359, which empowers the President to suspend the right to seek enforcement of fundamental rights “as the grand final and crowning glory of this chapter of reaction and retrogression.” The power to abrogate fundamental rights of citizens during Emergencies can easily be abused for depriving the people of their liberty and imposing a totalitarian rule on the country.

According to H. V. Kamath, “ There is no parallel to the chapter of Emergency in any Constitution of democratic countries of the world”. He further said,, “I fear that by the single chapter we are seeking to lay the foundation of a totalitarian State, a police State, State completely opposed to all the ideas and principles that we have held aloft during the last few decades, a State where the rights and liberties of millions of innocent men and women will be in continuous jeopardy, a State where if there be peace it will be the peace of the grave and the void of the desert. I only pray to God that He may grant us wisdom, wisdom to avert any such catastrophe, grant us fortitude and courage.”

Another point of criticism is that during Emergency federal structure is changed into unitary one. T. T. Krishnamachari said, “The Constitution of India is designed to work as a federal system in normal times and as a unitary system in war and other emergencies.” Moreover, ruling party at the Centre by using Article 356 can declare President’s rule in a particular State simply because some other party is ruling the State. Article 356 was misused when nine state governments were dismissed on 30th April 1977 and in Feb 1980.

Justification of Emergency Powers. Emergency powers of the President are defended on the ground that Strong Centre is needed for security of the country. V. N. Shukla writes, “ These provisions may appear to be harsh, particularly in a constitution which professes to be built upon an edifice of fundamental rights and democracy. But the provisions may be studied in the light of India’s past history. India has had her inglorious days whenever the Central power was weak.

It is well that the Constitution guards against the forces of disintegration. Events may take place threatening the very existence of the State, together with all that is desired to remain basic and immutable will be swept away.” Country’s security is more important than the federal system. In the words of Dr. Ambedkar, “ It is only the Centre which can work for the common purpose and for the general interest of the country as a whole. Herein lies the justification of giving to the Centre overriding power to be used in the Emergency.”

It is not possible for the President to become a dictator. In India there exists a parliamentary form of Government. The essence of parliamentary form of Government is that the Head of the State is a nominal head. It is the Council of Ministers which is the real executive.

According to 44th Amendment, an Emergency can be proclaimed only on the basis of written advice tendered by the cabinet. In addition a Proclamation of Emergency must be approved by the two Houses of parliament by two-thirds majority within a period of one month. As a further check against the misuse of the emergency powers and to put the right to life and liberty on a secure footing, it is provided in 44th Amendment Act that the power to suspend the right to move the court for the enforcement of a fundamental right cannot be exercised in respect of the fundamental right to life and liberty.

According to 44th Amendment the provisions of Article 19 will become suspended only in the case of a proclamation of Emergency issued on the ground of war or external aggression and not in the case of a Proclamation of Emergency issued on the ground of armed rebellion. Moreover, if the President tries to become a despot, he will be impeached by the Parliament.

Conclusion:
We can conclude safely that it is not possible for the President to become a dictator. No doubt suspension of rights of the citizens is against democratic system but rights of the individual are not more important than the security of the State. To quote K. Santhanam, “The net result of Article 356 is that when there is a proclamation the State Government may come to be temporarily merged with the Government of the Union.

There is no question of autocracy under any circumstances. Only State autonomy may suffer temporarily.” Sh. Amar Nandi rightly remarked that the power conferred on the central executive to meet national emergencies is, so as to say, a loaded gun which can be used both to protect and to destroy the liberty of citizens. The gun must be used, therefore, with extreme caution.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 4.
Discuss the election, powers and functions of the Vice-President of India.
Or
Write a short note on the Vice-President of India.
Answer:
Article 63 of the Constitution lays down that there shall be a Vice-President of India. Like the President of India, the Vice-President is also elected indirectly by the people. Whenever the office of the President falls vacant due to the death, resignation or removal of the President, the Vice-President acts for him. However, he acts for limited period only.

Qualifications:
A candidate for the office of the Vice-President must possess the following qualifications:
1. He should be a citizen of India.

2. He should have completed the age of 35 years.

3. He should be eligible to be elected as a member of the Rajya Sabha.

4. He must not hold any office of profit under any Government—Centre, State of Local. For purposes of this provision, the Constitution lays down that the offices of the President or Vice- President, Governor of a State or Ministers of the Union or State Governments, shall not be considered places of profit.

5. The Vice- President cannot be a member of either House of Parliament or of a State Legislature. If he is a member of either of these Houses at the time when he is elected as Vice- President, his seat in that Legislature is declared vacant from the date he takes over as Vice-President.

6. The name of the candidate for the office of Vice-President must be proposed and seconded by at least 20 electors each.

Election:
The Vice-President of India is elected by an electoral college consisting of the members of both Houses of Parliament in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable vote and the voting at such election shall be by secret ballot. The two Houses need not sit together for this purpose. (The Eleventh Amendment).

It is significant to note that in the election of the Vice-President the nominated members of both the Houses have the right to vote while in the election of the President only the elected members of Parliament are eligible to vote. According to the Eleventh Amedment (1961) of the constitution the election of the President or Vice-President is not to be questioned on the ground that there was a vacancy in the Electoral College.

In August 2017. Sh. Venkaiah Naidu candidate of National Democratic Alliance was elected Vice¬President of India. Sh. Venkaiah Naidu defeated United Progressive Alliance candidate Sh. Gopal Krishna Gandhi. Sh. Venkaiah Naidu secured 516 votes while Sh. Gopal Krishna Gandhi secured 244 votes.

Term:
The Vice-President is elected for a term of five years. The period of five years starts from the date on which he enters upon his office. He is eligible for re-election. The Vice-President may resign his office by writing to the President before the expiry of five years. In 1969 when the Acting President V.V. Giri resigned, he addressed his letter of resignation to the President. This he had done on the advice of the Attorney-General. The office of the Vice-President may also fall vacant either on the death of the Vice-President or when he has been removed from office by impeachment.

Removal by Impeachment:
The Vice-President can be removed from office by impeachment. He can be removed from office if a resolution to that effect is passed by the Rajya Sabha by a majority of its then members and if the resolution is approved by the Lok Sabha. Fourteen days’ notice is necessary for moving such a resolution.

Salary:
As Vice-President of India, he gets no salary. The Vice-President is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and he receives- a salary of Rs. 4,00,000 per month. He is also entitled to the use of offical residence. When the Vice-President acts as President, he has all the privileges, powes and immunities of the President. According to Vice¬President Pension Act, a person who ceases to hold office as Vice-President, either by expiration of his term of office or by resignation, is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,00,000.

Functions:
The duties of the Vice-President are two-fold: 1. He is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and 2. He acts for the President when the office of the President is vacant. Even when the President is ill or otherwise unable to perform the duties of his office, the Vice-President acts for him.

As Vice-President. In the absence of the President or during casual vacancy in the office of the President, the Vice-President shall perform all the functions of the President. If the President is unable to discharge his functions owing to absence, illness or any other cause, the Vice-President will discharge his functions until the date on which the President resumes his duties. Under such circumstances:

  1. The Vice-President performs the duties of the President.
  2. The Vice-President has the authority to exercise all the powers concerning the office of the President.
  3. He can remain for a period of 6 months in the office of the President in the case of President’s resignation, death and removal from office. He cannot continue in the office of the President more than this period.
  4. He makes arrangement for the election of the new President within a period of six months. The new President must be elected within this period.
  5. The Vice-President can himself contest for Presidentship of the country.

The office of the Vice-President is next to the office of the President of the country. But the Vice-President has no functions to perform as the President of the country. He has the functions to perform only in the absence of the President. It is only an office of pride and honour.

As Chairman of Rajya Sabha. The Vice-President is the ex-officio Chairman of Rajya Sabha. That means that being the Vice-President of the country he is the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha. He is to perform various functions in this capacity as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and they are given as follows:

  1. He presides over the meetings of the Rajya Sabha.
  2. He maintains decorum and decency in the House.
  3. He allots time to the members to speak.
  4. He is not a member of the Rajya Sabha. Therefore, he is not entitled to cast his vote but in case of a tie he makes use of his casting vote.

The Vice-President cannot perside over the meeting of the Rajya Sabha when:

  • He is acting as the President of the country and
  • When the Rajya Sabha is considering charges against him.

Position of the Vice-President:
The office of the Vice-President is not of any great importance. No doubt his office is next to the office of the President of India but he does not exercise any powers. The American Vice-President enjoys the remaining tenure of the President in case of President’s death or resignation or removal but in India under such circumstances the Vice-President works only as the acting President till the newly elected President joins.

As acting President the Vice-President will enjoy all the privileges and powers of the President. When a vacancy is caused, new President is to be elected within 6 months. The office of the Vice-President is not of great importance. But we will have to admit this that much depends upon the personality of the person who becomes the Vice-President. A person with a wonderful personality can become a very useful part of administration.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 5.
What do you know of the composition, powers and functions of the Union Council of Ministers?
Answer:
The Constitution of India provides for parliamentary government in the country. At the Centre as well as in the States there is parliamentary government. The President is only the nominal head of the State. He exercises his powers on the advice of the Council of Ministers. It is written in the Constitution that there will be a Council of Ministers headed by the Prime Minister to aid and advise the President. In fact all the powers of the President are actually exercised by the ministers. The Council of Ministers takes decisions and the President can give them a piece of advice. The ministers run the administration according to their sweet will. It is why the parliamentary system of Government is called the Cabinet Government.

Composition:
The only provision made in the constitution for the formation of the Council of Ministers is that the President appoints the Prime Minister and the other ministers are appointed by him with the consultation of the latter. But the fact is that the President does not appoint, the Prime Minister of his own sweet will. Normally the leader of the majority party in the Lok Sabha is made the Prime Minister and all other ministers are appointed by the President on the recommendation of the Prime Minister. The President cannot make any change in the list of ministers.

It is again the Prime Minister who distributes portfolios among the ministers. The ministers are taken out of the members of the legislature. If any outsider is appointed a minister, he must become the member of the legislature within 6 months. In Feb. 1988, Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi reorganized his Council of Ministers and there were 60 members in the Council of Ministers. In the Constitution, 91st Amendment Act provides that the total number of ministers including the Prime Minister, shall not exceed 15% of the total number of members of the Lok Sabha.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 6

In May 2019, there were 57 members in the Council of Ministers. It included 24 cabinet ministers, 24 ministers of state and 9 ministers having independent charge.

Term of Office:
It is written in the Constitution that the ministers will remain in the office during the pleasure of the President, It means that the President can remove the ministers from office whenever he likes. But it is not so. If the majority of the members of the Lok Sabha supports the Council of Ministers, it will continue to remain in office and the President cannot remove it. The ministers remain in office so far as they enjoy the confidence of the members of the Lok Sabha.

Salary:
The Constitution of India lays down that the salaries, allowances, etc. of the ministers shall be decided by the Parliament. The ministers are entitled to a salary, daily allowances and constituency allowances at the same rate as the members of Parliament.

Powers and Functions Of The Cabinet:
The Cabinet is the real ruler of the country. All the executive authority of the President is exercised by the cabinet. Following are the powers and functions of the Cabinet:

1. Determination of National Policy:
The polity of the nation is formulated by the Cabinet. After taking office the Cabinet is to formulate its internal and external policy according to which it is to run the administration of the State. It is the Government which is responsible for internal peace and order, and freedom from external aggression and better living of the people of the country. It has, therefore, to formulate policies in a way that they are helpful for the people of the country at large.

2. Control over Administration:
The administration of the country is to be run by the ministers. Every member of the Council of Ministers has one or more departments under his charge and he has to look after its working and administration. No doubt, it is the civil servants who carry on the administration but this administration has to be within the framework of the policies laid down by the Council of Ministers. Departmental administration has to be run by the civil servants but it is the minister who is responsible for the smooth running of the administration.

3. Foreign Relations:
It is the function of the Cabinet to maintain relations with other countries. These relations are established according to the policies laid down by the Cabinet. The ambassadors to foreign countries are appointed on the advice of the cabinet. The correspondence with other countries is done of course in the name of the President but actually it is the Cabinet who performs this function. It is the Cabinet which enters into treaties with other countries.

4. Legislative Powers: In a Parliamentary Government there is a close relationship between the Cabinet and the legislature. It enjoys many legislative powers.

  1. The ministers are taken from among the members of the Parliament and they have a big share in law-making.
  2. The President convenes the meetings of the Parliament on the advice of the Council of Ministers.
  3. The Cabinet prepares the programme of the session.
  4. The ministers introduce the bills in the House and see them through. Most of the bills in a Parliamentary Government are introduced in the Parliament by the ministers. They explain the policy and the purpose of the bills to the Parliament.
  5. Laws in the Parliament are framed in accordance with the wishes of the Cabinet. As the ministers belong to the majority party so they are sure of the support of the members to their bills.
  6. The President issues ordinances on the advice of the ministers.

5. Financial Powers: The Cabinet enjoys many financial powers:

  1. The budget is prepared by the Finance Minister in consultation with other ministers.
  2. It is the ministers who suggest an increase, decrease or abolition in the taxes. Money bills can only be introduced by the ministers.

6. Appointments:
Important appointments are made only on the advice of the ministers. For example, the appointments of Governors, Ambassadors and members of the Union Public Service Commission are made on the recommendations of the ministers.

7. Administrative Justice:
The ministers also exercise judicial powers. They are to decide many administrative matters. They are to give a decision in administrative matters and decisions of the ministers are final. While deciding cases the ministers have the right to adopt judicial methods like all other courts.

Conclusion:
The above mentioned powers and functions of the Cabinet clearly explain that the administration of the State is run according to the wishes of the Cabinet. It can run the administration in a way it likes. It is rightly said that the ‘Cabinet is the steering wheel of the ship of the State’. It is said that the British Cabinet has become the virtual dictator, the State and the Parliament have become subservient to it.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 6.
Distinguish between the Cabinet and the Council of Ministers.
Answer:
There are some differences between the Cabinet and the Council of Ministers. This distinction must be clarified. The Cabinet is a part of the Council of Ministers and the real authority is enjoyed by it.

Council of Ministers:
The Council of Ministers consists of the following types of ministers:
1. Cabinet Ministers:
These are the most important ministers. They control the important departments of administration. They frame policies and decide all other important matters, They are generally 25 to 30 in number. It is these ministers who form the Cabinet. All the powers of the Council of Ministers are exercised according to the wishes of the Cabinet.

2. State Ministers:
The State Ministers also head some departments. But they are not entitled to participate in the meetings of the Cabinet. They can be invited to attend the meetings of the Cabinet when some special issue or the issue concerning their department is to be discussed.

3. Deputy Ministers: The Deputy Ministers are appointed to assist the Cabinet ministers and the State ministers in the performance of their functions. The Deputy Minister is not the head of any department. The Deputy Ministers are appointed almost in each department.

4. Parliament Secretaries:
The Parliamentary Secretaries are not minister and they are not members of the Council of Ministers. Parliamentary Secretaries are not appointed by the President. They are appointed by the Prime Minister. They have no independent powers or functions. They assist the ministers to whom they are attached to do their parliamentary work. They have no control over the administrative departments. They are, infact, probationers under training and may hope to rise to higher ranks if they make good.

5. Deputy Prime Minister:
Neither the Constitution nor any of the Union laws provide for the office of the Deputy Prime Minister. It is the sole discretion of the Prime Minister to bestow the rank and the status of Deputy Prime Minister on any number of members of the Cabinet. Sardar Vallabh Bhai Patel was given the status and rank of Deputy Prime Minister in the Council of Minister headed by Late Pt. Jawaharlal Nehru.

Similarly in the Cabinet headed by Late Mrs. Indira Gandhi, Mr. Morarji Desai was ranked as Deputy Prime Minister of the country. The rank and status’of Deputy Prime Minister was conferred on Sarvashri Charan Singh and Jagjivan Ram in the Council of Ministers headed by Sh. Morarji Desai.

In the Ministery headed by Sh. V.P. Singh, Ch. Devi Lai was sworn in as the Deputy Prime Minister of the country. In June, 2002, Mr. Lai Krishan Adwani sworn in as the Deputy Prime Minister of India in the ministry of Mr. Atal Behari Vajpayee. The office of the Deputy Prime Minister carries neither special responsibilites nor special privileges.

The Council of Ministers consists different types of ministers. Their number is near about 65. But the Cabinet consists of only the Cabinet ministers and all important decisions are taken by them. Whatever decisions are taken by the Cabinet all the ministers are to abide by them. All the members of the Council of Ministers are to carry out those decisions.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 7.
What are the main features of the Cabinet System in India?
Answer:
In India the parliamentary system of government has been adopted. The Council of Ministers exercises all the powers of the President. It performs its functions on the basis of the following principles:

1. President a Constitutional Head:
The first important feature of the parliamentary system of government is that the Head of State enjoys only nominal powers. The entire administration of the State is run in the name of the President but in reality it is the Cabinet which is responsible for running the administration of the State. The President takes all the decisions on the advice of the Prime Minister.

The Prime Minister is the head of the government whereas the President is the head of the State. The President cannot participate in the meetings of the Cabinet and he is kept out of the Cabinet. The President appoints the Prime Minister, but he must appoint the leader of the majority party as the Prime Minister of India. He does not interfere in the formation, meetings and the decisions of the Cabinet.

2. Close relationship between the Cabinet and Parliament:
There is a very close relationship between the Cabinet and the Parliament. The Cabinet is formed from among the members of the Parliament. If any outsider is appointed a minister he must become the member of the Parliament within six months otherwise he will have to quit the office.

3. Leadership of the Cabinet:
The Cabinet performs its functions under the control and guidance of the Prime Minister. The appointments of the ministers are made by the President on the advice of the Prime Minister. The Prime Minister presides over the meetings of the Cabinet. He can remove any minister from office. He also co-ordinates the working of the ministry.

4. Political Homogeneity:
The members of the Cabinet hold the same view point because they belong to the same political party. The Cabinet works like a unit. Therefore, all the members of the. Cabinet must agree with one another. If the ministers are taken from different political parties, they will never agree over policy matters because each political party would like to implement its own policy. It is very necessary that the ministers should be taken from the same party so that administration could be run smoothly.

5. Cabinet works as a Team:
The Cabinet works as a team. The members of the Cabinet swim and sink together. They perform their functions in consultation with one another. All the ministers are individually as well as collectively responsibly for their work. No-confidence motion against a particular minister means a no-confidence motion against the entire ministry and the entire ministry is to resign. The resignation of the Prime Minister means the resignation of the entire ministry. All the ministers are to abide by the decisions taken by the Cabinet. All the ministers remain in office or lose office together.

6. Leadership of the Prime Minister:
Indian Cabinet works under the leadership of the Prime Minister. According to Art. 74, there shall be a Council of Ministers with the Prime Minister at its head to aid and advise the President in the exercise of his functions. Ministers are appointed by the President on the advice of the Prime Minister. Portfolios are distributed by the Prime Minister and he has the power to change the portfolios of the ministers.

He presides over the meetings of the Cabinet. In case of disagreement between a minister and the Prime Minister, the minister will have to resign. No person can remain in the Cabinet against the wishes of the Prime Minister. The resignation of the Prime Minister means the resignation of the whole Council of Ministers.

7. Prime Minister’s right to get the Lok Sabha dissolved:
Another feature of the Indian Cabinet system is that the Prime Minister can advise the president to dissolve the Lok Sabha. On Feb. 6, 2004 the President Dr. A.P.J. Adbul Kalam dissolved the Lok Sabha on the advice of the Prime Minister Atal Behari Vajpayee.

8. Secrecy:
Cabinet keeps the proceedings of its meetings absolutely secret. No minister can convey to anybody the decisions taken by the ministry and the discussion which took place while taking the decisions. The decisions can be announced by the concerned minister at the proper time.

9. Ministerial Responsibility:
The ministers cannot exercise their powers in an arbitrary manner. They are responsible for their actions and policies to the legistature. The members of the Parliament can ask them questions and supplementary questions and they are to answer them on the floor of the House. In case, the Parliament loses confidence in the ministers, they will have to resign. The Parliament can indicate its lack of no-confidence over the ministry by passing a no-confidence resolution. Even if the Parliament passes a no-confidence motion against one minister the entire ministry is to resign.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 8.
How is the Prime Minister appointed? Discuss his powers and functions.
Or
Discuss the position of the Prime Minister.
Answer:
The Prime Minister is the most important and powerful functionary of the State. He can be called the ruler of the State. The Prime Minister is the head of the Council of Ministers and all the powers of the President are actually exercisd by the Prime Minister. He can rule the country in a way which he thinks the best. He is the architect of the fate of State. The Government can do nothing against his will.

Appointment:
The Prime Minister is appointed by the President but while doing so the President is not having a free hand. Only that person can be appointed to the office of Prime Minister who is the leader of majority party in the Lok Sabha. After the general election the President invites the leader of the party which has gained majority in the Lok Sabha to form the Government.

In Dec. 1984, Mr. Rajiv Gandhi was appointed Prime Minister because he was the leader of the majority party (Congress I) in the Lok Sabha. If no political party gets an absolute majority in the Lok Sabha even then the President is not free to appoint anybody the Prime Minister. Under such circumstances only that person will be invited to form the Government who can seek the co-operation of the majority of members in the Lok Sabha.

After the 17th Lok Sabha election held in April-May, 2019, Sh Narender Modi was appointed as the Prime Minister.
Term of Office. The Prime Minister does not have a fixed tenure of offfice. He remains in office so long as he enjoys the support of the majority party. If the majority of members of the Lok Sabha loses confidence in the Prime Minister, he is to resign the office. On 11th April, 1997 Prime Minister H.D. Deve Gowda resigned because his resolution of vote of confidence was rejected by the majority members of the Lok Sabha.

Salary and Allowances. The Prime Minister gets the same salary and allowances which are paid to members of Parliament. He also receives a constituency allowance like other M.Ps. He is also entitled to free official residence, free travels, medical facilities, etc.

Powers And Functions Of The Prime Minister:
The Prime Minister enjoys vast powers which have made his office very important and powerful. His powers and functions are given as follows:
1. Prime Minisiter and the Cabinet:
The Prime Minister is the maker of the Cabinet. The Cabinet has no existence without the Prime Minister. He can make or unmake a Cabinet. The Cabinet performs all its functions under the control and guidance of the Prime Minister. Therefore, he is called “the keystone of the Cabinet arch” or “shining moon among the stars”. He enjoys the following powers in connection with the Cabinet:

(i) Formation of the Council of Ministers:
His first duty after assuming office is the formation of the Council of Ministers. He prepares a list of ministers according to his sweet will. He has a free hand in the selection of ministers. Nobody can be appointed a minister against the wishes of the Prime Minister. Number of Council of Ministers depends upon him. In the Constitution, 91st Amendment Act provides that the total number of ministers including the Prime Minister, shall not exceed 15% of the total number of members of the Lok Sabha. In May 2019, there were 57 members in the Council of Ministers.

(ii) Distribution of Portfolios:
The Prime Minitser distributes work among the ministers. He decides what department is to be allotted to a particular . minister. He controls the working of the departments of his ministers. If the Prime Minister is not satisfied with the working of a department, he can change the department of that minister. He distributes particular departments to ministers in such a way that they can run the departments quite efficiently. He also co-ordinates the working of different departments.

(iii) Removal of the Minister:
The ministers remain in office during the pleasure of the Prime Minister. If the Prime Minister is not satisfied with the working of a minister or the minister does nto run the department in accordance with wishes of the Prime Minister, he can ask him to quit the office and can appoint someone else in his place. In June, 1978 Prime Minister Morarji Desai asked Home Minister Char an Singh and Mr. Raj Narayan to resign from the cabinet and Mr. Charan Singh and Raj Narayan submitted their resignations.

On 1st August, 1990 the Prime Minitser V.P. Singh sacked his Deputy Prime Minister, Mr. Devi Lai, from the Council of Ministers. On April 20, 1998 Prime Minister Vajpayee sacked Communication Minister Buta Singh because he refused to resign. The Prime Minister can make changes in the Cabinet whenever he likes. With the resignation of the Prime Minister the entire ministry falls.

(iv) Leadership of the Cabinet:
The Prime Minister is the leader of the Cabinet. The Cabinet functions under the conrol of the Prime Minister. He can call the meetings of Cabinet whenever he likes. The Prime Minister prepares the agenda of the meeting as well as controls it. He presides over the Cabinet meetings. All the decisions in Cabinet meetings are taken according to the wishes of the council of ministers.

2. Link between the President and the Cabinet:
The Prime Minister is the link between the President and the Cabinet. It is the duty of the Prime Minister to convey the decisions of the Cabinet to the President. No minister can discuss a particular problem with the President without the permission of the Prime Minister. The President can demand information from the Prime Minister regarding the working of administration. The Cabinet can discuss any issue with the President only through the Prime Minister.

3. Leadership of the Cabinet in the Parliament:
The Prime Minister leads the Cabinet in the Parliament. The ministers answer the questions put to them by the members of the Parliament. Whenever a minister is in difficulty, the Prime Minister helps him. The Prime Minster explains the policy and decisions of the Cabinet to the Parliament. All important statements on behalf of the Cabinet are made by the Prime Minister in the Parliament.

4. Principal adviser of the President:
The Prime Minister is the chief adviser of the President. The President seeks the advice of the Prime Minister in all matters of the state. The Prime Minister informs the President regarding all the decisions taken by the Cabinet. If the President requires any information regarding the administration of any department, he would demand such an information from the Prime Minister.

5. Appointments:
All the important appointments in the State are made.by the Prime Minister. The President makes appointments of the State Governors, Ambassadors and members of the Union Pubilc Service Cmmission only on the advice of the Prime Minister. The President cannot make any such appointment of his own accord.

6. Leader of the Parliament:
The Prime Minister is also the leader of the House. Out of the two Houses the position of Lok Sabha is of great importance and the Prime Minister is the leader of the Lok Sabha. The Parliament always depends upon the policy and guidance of the Prime Minister for facing any problem. All the important decisions in the Parliament are taken according to the wishes of the Prime Minister. He can get any law passed by the parliament because he is the leader of the majority party. He can get the Lok Sabha dissolved.

7. Leader of Nation:
The Prime Minister is also the leader of the nation. The President is the head of the State and the Prime Minister is the head of the Government. Gveneral election means the election of the Prime Minister. Each poiltical party has its leader already and the people vote for the party whose leader they want to see as the Prime Minister of the country. During emergency the people have always high hopes on the Prime Minister and they always act upon his advice. His office has become more important for his being the leader of the nation. He is always supported by public and with the help of the public he can do things which he likes.

Position of the Prime Minister:
An analysis of the powers of the Prime Minister proves that “he is the pivot of the whole system of government.” He occupies a position of exceptional authority. K.T. Shah observed in the Constituent Assembly, “This Constitution concentrates so much power and influence in the hands of the Prime Minister that there is every danger to apprehend that the Prime Minister may become a dictator if he chooses to do so.” N.V. Gadgil, former Governor of Punjab said, “The Prime Minister is invested with formidable power and influence unless he be a genuine democrat by nature, he is very likely to become a dictator.”

In the words of Nehru, ‘The Prime Minister is the linchpin of the government.” While the President is the nominal head, the Prime Minister is the real head. The powers of the President are in reality exercised by the Council of Ministers, But the Prime Minister is the head of the Council of Ministers. Without him, the ministers have no entity. To quote Laski, ‘The Prime Minister is central to the formation of the Council of Ministes, central to its birth and central to its death.” For his appointment, he is not dependent upon the favour of the President.

It is his right to form the Council of Ministers because he commands the confidence of the Lok Sabha. In the words of A.C. Dash, “The Indian Prime Minister like the German Chancellor is superior to the entire Cabinet, for under the Constitution he is declared to be the head of Council of Ministers and all other Ministers are appointed and probably will be dismissed on his advice.” The Prime Minister forms the Cabinet and he is its life breath.

He is the leader of the Parliament and the nation and the principal adviser of the President. The decisions of the Cabinet are virtually the decisions of the Prime Minister. There is hardly any elected functionary in the world comparable to the Prime Minister of India. Backed by a stable and substantial majority in the Lok Sabha, he is more powerful than even the President of the United States of America.

However, the Prime Minister’s supremacy is not due entirely to the powers which belong to his office. Much depends upon his personality. If he is a man of dynamic prsonality he will be able to dominate the political scene. A fickle minded person will never be able to impress. Ideally, the Prime Minister should have a personality which earns him not only the loyalty of his own party but also a measure of considerable respect from the opposition.

Mr. Nehru who held the office of the Prime Minister nearly eighteen years, possessed an unparalleld personality. He was an institution. In the words of Norman D. Palmer, “Important and able men have held ministerial posts but with the exception of Vallabhbhai Patel, who served as Deputy Prime Minister until his death in 1950, no one has really shared Nehru’s authority.” Prime Minister Lai Bahadur Shastri gave his country brilliant leadership in terms of war and peace and gave up his life in quest for peace. He served his country with his life.

He did not possess the external symbols of greatness yet he rose to great heights. Though short in stature there was more iron in his soul than appeared on the surface. The manner in which Morarji Desai was relieved of the Finance Department by Prime Minister Indira Gandhi, highlights the fact that not even the ‘tallest’ among the Prime Minister’s colleagues can measure upto the stature of the Prime Minister. After the election of 1971 and 1980, Prime Minister Indira Gandhi was considered the source of all power. According to Ashok Mehta, “Our Cabinet form of Government has come to a near Presidential regime.”

According to Frank Morris, “Mrs. Gandhi was not only the undisputed leader of the Congress Party, but it was her party and she could dominate it in a way which none else had done. She was free to choose her colleagues who were her agents or assistants and in her presence trembled and obeyed.” In the words of Greame C. Moodie, “For many the Prime Minister is the part of the government and at times, may become the personification of the political nation.” Mr. Rajiv Gandhi was very powerful because like Mrs. Indira Gandhi he was also the president of the Congress (I).

The position of the Prime Minister also depends upon the support of his party. Without his party he is nothing. He must maintain close contact with party opinion. His aloofness, reserve and indifference militates against sound leadership. He must rely on co-operation, not coercion. He is to lead the party and not drive it. The manner in which Pt. Nehru had to bow before the party demand on the removal of Mr. Krishna Menon in 1962 proves that there are limits beyond which the Prime Minister cannot carry the party.

To conclude, powerful as he may be, no particular Prime Minister is indispensable, irremovable, or omnipotent. “He is not Caesar, he is not an unchangeable oracle, his views are not dooms; he is always on suffrance and its germs are whether he can render indubitably useful services. At any time a rival may supplant him.” The essence of the powers of the Prime Minister lies in a united Cabinet, a united Parliament and united people.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Short Answer Type Questions 

Question 1.
How is the President of India elected?
Answer:
The President is the head of the state. He is elected indirectly by an electoral college. Elected members of both the Houses of Parliament and elected members of legislative assemblies of the States constitute the electoral college. The nominated members of the Parliament and the assemblies do not take part in the election. The voting is held on’ the basis of proportional representation by the single transferable vote system. Only an Indian citizen, who has attained the age of 35 years, and whose name has been proposed and seconded by a definite number of the electors, can contest election.

Question 2.
Explain in brief the composition of the Electoral College constituted for the election of the President.
Answer:
According to Article 54 of Indian Constitution, the President shall be elected indirectly by an electoral college consisting of the elected members of the union and state legislatures in accordance with the principle of proportional representation with single transferable vote system.

Question 3.
Describe the formula by which the value of the vote of the members of State Legislative Assembly is determined.
Answer:
Article 55 (4) of the Constitution lays down the procedure of determining the votes of the members of the State Assembly, which is as follows:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 7
If the remainder is less than 500, it is ignored.
If it is more than 500, then the vote of each member shall be further increased by one.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 4.
Describe the procedure of determining the value of votes of the members of the Parliament.
Answer:
The constitution lays down the following procedure of determining the votes of the members of Parliament.
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 8
Fraction exceeding one-half being counted as one.

Question 5.
Describe the tenure of the President.
Or
Discuss in brief the removal of the President.
Answer:
The President is elected for a period of five years. But he can be removed from his office before the expiry date. The President can be removed from office by impeachment only. The Constitution lays down a detailed procedure for the impeachment of the President. He can be impeached “for violation of the Constitution.” When a President is to be impeached for the violation of the Constitution, the charges can be prepared by either House of the Parliament.

But no such charge is to be preferred unless the proposal to prefer such a charge is contained in a resolution which has been moved after at least 14 days notice in writing signed by not less than one-fourth of the total number of members of the House. The resolution must be passed by a two-thirds majority of the total number of members of the House. If passed by the requisite majority in one house, it is sent to the other House for investigation. If the other House also passes the resolution by a two- thirds majority of the total membership of this House, then it means the charge is proved and the President is removed from his office.

Question 6.
Describe the method of fixing the quota for the election of the President.
Answer:
Under the system of Proportional Representation, a candidate to be elected must secure the necessary quota of votes. The quota is determined by the following formula:
PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister 9
Suppose the total number of valid votes polled at the Presidential election is 8,00,000. Applying the above-mentioned formula, the quota shall be
\(\frac {8,00,000}{1+1}\) +1 = 4,00,001

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 7.
Describe the salary and allowances of the President.
Answer:
The President of India gets a salary of Rs. 5,00,000 per month and an official residence (called Rashtrapati Bhavan in New Delhi) free of rent. In addition to the salary, the President also gets handsome allowances of various kinds as determined by Parliament. According to the President’s Pension Act, a person who ceases to hold office as President, either by expiration of his term of office or by resignation, is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,50,000. The Government may also allow him a free medical aid as was done in the case of Dr. Rajendra Prasad.

The salary and other allowances of the President are charged on the Consolidated Fund of India. According to Art. 59 (4), the emoluments and allowances of the President shall not be diminished during his term of office.

Question 8.
Describe any four executive powers of the President.
Answer:
Following are the executive powers of the President:

  1. All executive functions of the Union (central) government are performed in the name of the President.
  2. He appoints the Governors, Chief Justice and other judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.
  3. He appoints the Attorney General of India and the members and Chairman of the Union Public Service Commission.
  4. He is the supreme commander of the armed forces.

Question 9.
Mention four legislative powers of the President.
Answer:
Following are the legislative powers of the President:

  1. He can address both the Houses of the Parliament and can send messages to either house at any time.
  2. He can summon any House of the Parliament at any time.
  3. He can dissolve the Lok Sabha.
  4. He nominates two members of the Anglo-Indian community to the Lok Sabha.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 10.
Describe financial powers of the President.
Answer:

  1. It is the duty of the President to place the Budget for the current year before the Parliament. It is to be presented before the beginning of the financial year. Normally the budget is presented to the Parliament by the
  2. Finance Minister on behalf of the President.
  3. Money Bill can only be introduced in the Parliament on the recommendation of the President.
  4. The President has full control over the contingency fund and he can spend it according to his sweet will. He distributes the share of income tax among the States.

Question 11.
Describe judicial powers of the President.
Answer:
The President has some judicial powers also. It is provided by Article 122 of the Constitution.

  • The President appoints the judges and the chief justices to the Supreme Court and the State High Courts.
  • The President cannot be sued in any court of India in connection with any matter concerning his office.
  • He has power to pardon, reprieve and commute punishment.
  • The President can seek the advice of the supreme court of India over any legal matter or a bill of Republic Importance.

Question 12.
What do you know about the emergency powers of the President?
Ans.
The President can declare emergency in three special circumstances :
1. If the President thinks that the security of the country is threatened by a war or external aggression or armed rebellion threatening the integrity of India, he can declare an emergency for the whole of India or any part of it. But the advice should come from the Council of Ministers in writing.

2. In case of the failure of the constitutional machinery in a state or states, the President can take over the entire work of the executive and dissolve or suspend the state assembly.

3. If the President thinks that there is an economic situation in which the financial stability or the credit of India is threatened, he can declare a financial emergency.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 13.
Discuss about the power of the President to issue an ordinance.
Answer:
During the intervals of the sessions of the Parliament he can issue ordinance. These ordinances have the force of laws. The ordinance is put before the Parliament as soon as it meets. The Parliament has the authority to reject the ordinance. It can be withdrawn by the President also. If it is neither rejected by the Parliament nor withdrawn by the President, it will automatically end six weeks after the first meeting of the Parliament.

Question 14.
Discuss in brief about various emergencies provided in the Constitution of India.
Answer:
There are three types of emergencies provided into the Constitution of India. These are:

  • National Emergency (Article 352) or Emergency arising out of external aggression or armed rebellion.
  • Emergency arising out of the failure of constitutional machinery in a state (Art. 356).
  • Financial Emergency (Art. 360).

Question 15.
What do you understand by National Emergency?
Answer:
According to Art. 352, if the President is satisfied that a grave emergency exists whereby the security of India or any part of India is threatened by war, external aggression or armed rebellion, he may proclaim a state of emergency. But the President can declare such type of emergency if the cabinet decision that such a proclamation may be made has been communicated to him in writing.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 16.
Under which condition the Constitutional Emergency is imposed?
Answer:
According to article 356, if the President, either on the receipt of a report from the Governor of a State or otherwise, is satisfied that a situation has arisen in which the Government of the State cannot be carried on in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the President can proclaim emergency in that state.

Question 17.
What is the Financial Emergency?
Answer:
According to Article 360, if the President is satisfied that a situation has arisen whereby the financial stability or credit of India or any part of it is threatened, he may declare a Financial Emergency under Article 360 of the constitution. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a subsequent Proclamation. The Proclamation has to be laid before each House of-Parliament.

It ceases to operate at the expiration of two months unless it is approved earlier by a resolution of both the Houses of Parliament. The Proclamation in this cases should also be approved by Parliament as in the other two cases of emergency. Like the Proclamation of war-emergency, Financial Emergency also continues for an indefinite period. Fortunately, this kind of Emergency has not been declared, so far.

Question 18.
Describe any four points of criticism against the emergency powers of the President.
Answer:
Different persons criticised the emergency powers of the President on different grounds. Following are the points of criticisms against the emergency powers of the President:’

  • Possibility of misuse of emergency powers.
  • Emergency powers are undemocratic.
  • Emergency proclamation is beyond judicial control.
  • Emergency powers can crush the rights and liberties of the individuals.

Question 19.
Describe the justification of emergency powers.
Answer:

  • Historical experiences reveal that emergency powers are necessary to face national crisis.
  • National security is more important than that of the individual liberty.
  • It is the responsibility of the centre to maintain the unity and integrity of the nation.
  • President is a constitutional head.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 20.
Is it possible for the President of India to be a dictator?
Answer:
Emergency powers of the President indicate that he can be a dictator. But it is not possible for the President to become a dictator because:

  1. In India there exists a Parliamentary form of Government. In this system the President is a constitutional head and his role is nominal.
  2. According to 44th Amendment an Emergency can be proclaimed only on the basis of written advice tendered by the cabinet and the advice of the council of ministers is binding on the President.
  3. If President tries to misuse his powers, he can be removed by impeachment.
  4. President’s rule can’t be imposed at the Centre level.

Question 21.
Describe the election method of the Vice-President of India.
Answer:
The Vice-President of India is elected by an electoral college consisting of the members of both Houses of Parliament in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable vote and the voting at such election shall be by secret ballot. The two Houses need not sit together for this purpose.

It is significant to note that in the election of the Vice-President the nominated members of both the Houses have the right to vote while in the election of the President only the elected members of Parliament are eligible to vote.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 22.
Describe in brief the functions of the Vice-President.
Answer:
The duties of the Vice-President are two-fold:1. He is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and 2. he acts for the President when the office of the President is vacant. Even when the President is ill or otherwise unable to perform the duties of his office, the Vice-President acts for him.

As Vice-President. In the absence of the President or during casual vacancy in the office of the President, the Vice-President shall perform all the functions of the President. If the President is unable to discharge his functions owing to absence, illness or any other cause, the Vice-President will discharge his functions until the date on which the President resumes his duties.

As Chairman of Rajya Sabha. The Vice-president is the ex-officio Chairman of Rajya Sabha, that means that by being the Vice-President of the country, he is the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha. He is to perform various functions in his capacity as the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and they are given as follows:

  • He presides over the meetings of the Rajya Sabha.
  • He maintains decorum and decency in the House.
  • He allots time to the members to speak.

Question 23.
Describe any four qualifications to become a member of Union Council of Ministers.
Answer:

  • He must be a citizen of India.
  • He must not hold any office of profit under the Government of India or the Government of any State.
  • He must possess such other qualifications as may be prescribed by the Parliament.
  • No person can be a member of both Houses of Parliament. In case he becomes, he must vacate one of the two seats. Likewise, one person cannot be a member of a House of Parliament and of a State Legislature simultaneously.

Question 24.
How is the Council of Ministers at the centre formed?
Answer:
After the general elections the various parties in the Parliament elect their leaders. The President invites the leader of the majority party and appoints him the Prime Minister. The Prime Minister selects other ministers and sends their names to the President. The President appoints them as ministers. He cannot make any change in the list given to him by the Prime Minister. It might happen that no party has a majority in the Lok Sabha. In such a situation the President invites the leader of the coalition of many parties and appoints him Prime Minister.

The Prime Minister and other ministers have to take oath of loyalty to the Constitution before they assume office.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 25.
Give four features of the Cabinet System in India.
Ans.
1. Nominal Head of the State:
The first important feature of the Cabinet system in India is that the President enjoys only nominal powers. The President is a constitutional head of the State.

2. Close Relations Between the Executive and the Legislature:
There is a close relationship between the Cabinet and the Parliament. All the ministers are members of one or the other house of Parliament. They attend the meetings of Parliament, participate in debates and move the bills in the Parliament.

3. Leadership of the Prime Minister:
The Cabinet works under the control and guidance of the Prime Minister. He is the head of the Council of Ministers. He presides over the meetings of the Cabinet and determines the agenda of the meetings.

4. Collective Responsibility:
The Indian Cabinet is responsible to the Lok Sabha. It remains in office so long as it enjoys the confidence of the Lok Sabha. The moment it loses the majority of the members in the house, it has to quit office.

Question 26.
Distinguish between the Cabinet and the Council of Ministers.
Ans.

  1. In the Constitution the words ‘Council of Ministers’ are used and not the word ‘Cabinet’.
  2. The Cabinet is a part of the Council of Ministers. The Council of Ministers consist of all types of ministers. Their number is about 70. But the cabinet consists of only the cabinet ministers. The cabinet consists of about 25 members.
  3. Cabinet is more important than the Council of Ministers. All decisions of the cabinet are to be carried out by the members of the Council of Ministers.
  4. The cabinet ministers get higher salaries than other ministers.

Question 27.
Discuss various types of Ministers in Union Council of Ministers.
Answer:
The Council of Ministers consists of all the ministers. There are four categories of ministers in-India :
1. Cabinet Ministers:
These are the most important ministers. They control the important departments of administration. They frame policies and decide all other important matters. They are generally 20 to 25 in number. It is these ministers who form the Cabinet. All the powers of the Council of Ministers are exercised according to the wishes of the Cabinet.

2. State Ministers:
The state ministers are also head of some departments. But they are not entitled to participate in the meetings of the Cabinet. They can be invited to attend the meetings of the Cabinet when some special issue or the issue concerning their departments is to be discussed.

3. Deputy Ministers:
The Deputy Ministers are appointed to assist the Cabinet ministers and the State ministers in the performance of their functions. A Deputy Minister is not the head of any department. The Deputy Ministers are appointed almost in each department.

4. Parliament Secretaries: Parliament Secretaries are appointed to assist the ministers in the Parliament. They are not the ministers.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 28.
Discuss any four functions of Council of Ministers.
Ans.
1. Determination of National Policy:
The policy of the Nation is formulated by the Cabinet. After taking office, the Cabinet is to formulate its internal and external policy according to which it is to run the administration of the State.

2. Control over Administration:
The administration of the country is to be run by the ministers. Every member of the Council of Ministers has one or more departments under his charge and he has to look after its working and administration.

3. Foreign Relations:
It is the function of the Cabinet to maintain relations with other countries. These relations are established according to the policies laid down by the Cabinet.

4. Cabinet give a decision in administrative matters.

Question 29.
How is the Prime Minister of India appointed?
Answer:
The President appoints the Prime Minister. He invites the leader of the majority party in the Lok Sabha and appoints him the Prime Minister. If no single party has a majority, many parties may form a coalition to make a majority and elect a leader. Then the leader of the coalition will be appointed as the Prime Minister. After 17th Lok Sabha election in April-May 2019, President appointed Sh. Narender Modi, leader of the National Democratic Alliance as Prime Minister.

Question 30.
What are the functions of Prime Minister?
Answer:
The Prime Minister enjoys vast powers which have made his office very important and powerful. His powers and functions are as ahead:

  1. The first function of the Prime Minister is the formation of Council of Ministers. He has a free hand in the selection of ministers. Number of Council of Ministers depends upon him.
  2. The Prime Minister distributes portfolios among the ministers.
  3. The ministers remain in office during the pleasure of the Prime Minister. The Prime Minister can make changes in the Council of Ministers whenever he likes.
  4. Prime Minister is the leader of the Cabinet. The Cabinet functions under the control of the Prime Minister.

Question 31.
Write down the names of present President, Vice-President and Prime Minister of India.
Answer:
Name of Post – Name of Person

  • President – Sh. Ram Nath Kovind
  • Vice President – Sh. Venkaiah Naidu
  • Prime Minister – Sh. Narendra Modi

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 32.
Write down the salary of President and Vice-President.
Answer:
Name of Post – Salary (Monthly)

  • President – Rs. 5,00,000
  • Vice-President – Rs. 4,00,000

Very Short Type Questions

Question 1.
How is the President of India elected?
Answer:
The President is elected indirectly by an electoral college. Elected members of both the Houses of Parliament and elected members of legislative assemblies of the States constitute the electoral college. The voting is held on the basis of proportional representation by the single transferable vote system.

Question 2.
Describe the tenure of the President.
Answer:
The President is elected for a period of five years. But he can be removed from his office before the expiry date. The President can be removed from office by impeachment only. The Constitution lays down a detailed procedure for the impeachment of the President. He can be impeached “for violation of the Constitution.”

Question 3.
Describe the salary and allowances of the President.
Answer:
The President of India gets a salary of Rs. 5,00,000 per month. According to the President’s Pension Act, a person who ceases to hold office as President, either by expiration of his term of office or by resignation, is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,50,000.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 4.
Write any two privileges of the President.
Answer:

  • The President of India is not answerable to any court for the exercise of his constitutional rights and powers.
  • No criminal proceeding can be launched against him during his term.

Question 5.
Describe any two executive powers of the President.
Answer:
Following are the executive powers of the President:

  • All executive functions of the Union (central) government are performed in the name of the President.
  • He appoints the Governors, Chief Justice and other judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts.

Question 6.
Mention two legislative powers of the President.
Answer:
Following are the legislative powers of the President:

  • He can address both the Houses of the Parliament and can send messages to either house at any time.
  • He can summon any House of the Parliament at any time.

Question 7.
Explain financial powers of the President.
Answer:

  • It is the duty of the President to place the Budget for the current year before the Parliament. It is to be presented before the beginning of the financial year. Normally the budget is presented to the Parliament by the
  • Finance Minister on behalf of the President.
  • Money Bill can only be introduced in the Parliament on the recommendation of the President.

Question 8.
Describe judicial powers of the President.
Answer:
The President has some judicial powers also. It is provided by Article 122 of the Constitution.

  • The President appoints the judges and . the chief justices to the Supreme Court and the State High Courts.
  • The President cannot be sued in any court of India in connection with any matter concerning his office.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 9.
Discuss in brief about various emergencies provided in the Constitution of India.
Answer:
There are three types of emergencies provided into the Constitution of India. These are:

  • National Emergency (Article 352) or Emergency arising out of external aggression or armed rebellion.
  • Emergency arising out of the failure of constitutional machinery in a state (Art. 356).
  • Financial Emergency (Art. 360).

Question 10.
What do you understand by National Emergency?
Answer:
According to Art. 352, if the President is satisfied that a grave emergency exists whereby the security of India or any part of India is threatened by war, external aggression or armed rebellion, he may proclaim a state of emergency.

Question 11.
Under which condition the Constitutional Emergency is imposed?
Answer:
According to article 356, if the President, either on the receipt of a report from the Governor of a State or otherwise, is satisfied that a situation has arisen in which the Government of the State cannot b,e carried on in accordance with the provisions of the Constitution, the President can proclaim emergency in that state.

Question 12.
What is the Financial Emergency?
Answer:
According to Article 360, if the President is satisfied that a situation has arisen whereby the financial stability or credit of India or any part of it is threatened, he may declare a Financial Emergency under Article 360 of the constitution. Such a Proclamation may be revoked by a subsequent Proclamation.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 13.
Explain any two points of criticism against the emergency powers of the President.
Answer:
Different persons criticised the emergency powers of the President on different grounds. Following are the points of criticisms against the emergency powers of the President:

  • Possibility of misuse of emergency powers.
  • Emergency powers are undemocratic.

Question 14.
Describe the justification of emergency powers.
Answer:

  • Historical experiences reveal that emergency powers are necessary to face national crisis.
  • National security is more important than that of the individual liberty.

Question 15.
Is it possible for the President of India to be a dictator?
Answer:
It is not possible for the President to become a dictator because:

  1. In India there exists a Parliamentary form of Government. In this system the President is a constitutional head and his role is nominal.
  2. According to 44th Amendment an Emergency can be proclaimed only on the basis of written advice tendered by the cabinet and the advice of the council of ministers is binding on the President.

Question 16.
Describe the election method of the Vice-President of India.
Answer:
The Vice-President of India is elected by an electoral college consisting of the members of both Houses of Parliament in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable vote and the voting at such election shall be by secret ballot. The two Houses need not sit together for this purpose.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 17.
Describe the term of the Vice-President.
Answer:
The Vice-President is elected for a term of five years. The period of five years starts from the date on which he enters his office. He is eligible for re-election. The Vice¬President may resign his office by writing to the President before the expiry of five years. Vice-President can be removed from office by impeachment.

Question 18.
Describe about the salary of the Vice-President.
Answer:
The Vice-President is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and he receives a salary of Rs. 4,00,000 per month. When the Vice-President acts as President, he has all the privileges, powers and immunities of the President. After retirement Vice-President is entitled to a monthly pension of Rs. 2,00,000.

Question 19.
Describe in brief the functions of the Vice-President.
Answer:
The duties of the Vice-President are two-fold:

  1. He is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha and
  2. he acts for the President when the office of the President is vacant. Even when the President is ill or otherwise unable to perform the duties of his office, the Vice-President acts for him.

Question 20.
Discuss any two qualifications to become a member of Union Council of Ministers.
Answer:

  • He must be a citizen of India.
  • He must not hold any office of profit under the Government of India or the Government of any State.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 21.
How is the Council of Ministers at the centre formed?
Answer:
After the general elections the various parties in the Parliament elect their leaders. The President invites the leader of the majority party and appoints him the Prime Minister. The Prime Minister selects other ministers and sends their names to the President. The President appoints them as ministers.

Question 22.
Give two features of the Cabinet System in India.
Answer:

  1. Nominal Head of the State: The first important feature of the Cabinet system in India is that the President enjoys only nominal powers. The President is a constitutional head of the State.
  2. Close Relations Between the Executive and the Legislature: There is a close relationship between the Cabinet and the Parliament.

Question 23.
Distinguish between the Cabinet and the Council of Ministers.
Answer:

  • In the Constitution the words ‘Council of Ministers’ are used and not the word ‘Cabinet’.
  • The Cabinet is a part of the Council of Ministers. The Council of Ministers consist of all types of ministers. Their number is about 70. But the cabinet consists of only the cabinet ministers. The cabinet consists of about 25 members.

Question 24.
Mention any two functions of Council of Ministers.
Answer:

  1. Determination of National Policy: The pohcy of the Nation is formulated by the Cabinet. After taking office, the Cabinet is to formulate its internal and external pohcy according to which it is to run the administration of the State.
  2. Control over Administration: The administration of the country is to be run by the ministers. Every member of the Council of Ministers has one or more departments under his charge and he has to look after its working and administration.

Question 25.
How is the Prime Minister of India appointed?
Answer:
The President appoints the Prime Minister. He invites the leader of the majority party in the Lok Sabha and appoints him the Prime Minister. If no single party has a majority, many parties may form a coalition to make a majority and elect a leader. Then the leader of the coalition will be appointed as the Prime Minister.

Question 26.
What are the functions of Prime Minister?
Answer:
The Prime Minister enjoys vast powers which have made his office very important and powerful. His powers and functions are as follows:

  • The first function of the Prime Minister is the formation of Council of Ministers. He has a free hand in the selection of ministers. Number of Council of Ministers depends upon him.
  • The Prime Minister distributes portfolios among the ministers.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

One Word to One Sentence Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is the term of the Prime Minister?
Answer:
The Prime Minister does not have a fixed tenure of office. He remains in office so long as he enjoys .the support of the majority party.

Question 2.
Mention any one power of the Prime Minister.
Answer:
The first and significant duty o$ the Prime Minister is the formation of the Council of Ministers.

Question 3.
Who is the leader of the Cabinet?
Answer:
The Prime Minister is the leader of the Cabinet.

Question 4.
Who was the first Prime Minister of India?
Answer:
Pt. Jawahar Lal Nehru was the first Prime Minister of India.

Question 5.
Who is the link between the Council of Ministers and the President? Answer:The Prime Minister is the link between the Council of Ministers and the President.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Fill in the blanks

1. The …………… of India is head of the state.
Answer:
President

2. Minimum age needed for the President is …………… .
Answer:
35 years

3. The term of office of the Indian President is …………… .
Answer:
Five years

4. Sh …………… appointed Prime Minister after 17th Lok Sabha.
Answer:
Narendra Modi.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

True or False statement

1. President is the head of the state.
Answer:
True.

2. Prime Minister is the head of the state.
Answer:
False

3. The tenure of the Cabinet is 10 years.
Answer:
False

4. Prime Minister form the Council of Minsters.
Answer:
True.

5. Prime Minister is the Chief Co-ordinator in the Cabinet.
Answer:
True.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Choose The Correct Answer

Question 1.
Who will administer the oath of office to the person who is to take over as President?
(A) Chief Justice of High Court
(B) Vice-President
(C) Chief Justice of India
(D) Speaker.
Answer:
(C) Chief Justice of India

Question 2.
The Cabinet is responsible to the
(A) Prime Minister
(B) President
(C) Parliament
(D) Speaker.
Answer:
(C) Parliament

Question 3.
The Prime Minister is appointed by the:
(A) President
(B) Parliament
(C) Cabinet
(D) Supreme Court.
Answer:
(A) President

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 4.
The President of India is elected by:
(A) The Parliament
(B) The Assemblies
(C) The People
(D) The Electoral College.
Answer:
(D) The Electoral College.

Question 5.
The term of office of the Indian President is:
(A) 3 years
(B) 5 years
(C) 2 years
(D) 4 years.
Answer:
(B) 5 years

Question 6.
Minimum age needed for president is:
(A) 25 years
(B) 30 years
(C) 21 years
(D) 35 years.
Answer:
(D) 35 years.

PSEB 11th Class Political Science Solutions Chapter 24 The Union Executive-President, Vice-President, Council of Ministers and Prime Minister

Question 7.
The tenure of the Prime Minister is:
(A) 5 yeafrs
(B) 6 years
(C) 4 years
(D) Not fixed.
Answer:
(D) Not fixed.

Question 8.
The Prime Minister presides over:
(A) Lok Sabha
(B) Rajya Sabha
(C) Cabinet
(D) Parliament.
Answer:
(C) Cabinet

 

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class Hindi Book Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 8 Hindi Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

Hindi Guide for Class 8 PSEB पथ की पहचान Textbook Questions and Answers

(क) भाषा – बोध

I. शब्दार्थ-देखिए सप्रंसग व्याख्या में।

बटोही = मुसाफिर।
बाट = रास्ता।
अनगिनत = जिनकी गिनती न की जा सके, असंख्य।
निशानी = चिह्न।
मूक = खामोशी।
पंथी = मुसाफिर।
पंथ = मार्ग।
व्यर्थ = बेकार ।
असम्भव = नामुमकिन।
पथ = रास्ता।
पग = पैर।
अवधान = मन लगाना।
सरित् = नदी।
गिरि = पहाड़।
गह्वर = गड्ढा, खाई।
सुमन = फूल।
कंटकों = कांटों।
शर = तीर।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

II. इन शब्दों/मुहावरों के अर्थ बताकर वाक्यों में प्रयोग करेंपथ, सुमन, अनगिनत, सहसा, बटोही, पैरों की निशानी छोड़ना, मन में बिठाना।

उत्तर:
पथ = मार्ग-व्यक्ति को. महापुरुषों के बताए हुए पथ का अनुसरण करना चाहिए।
सुमन = फूल-वाटिका में खिले हुए सुमन सबको अपनी ओर आकर्षित करते हैं। – अनगिनत = असंख्य, जिनकी गणना न हो सके-अनगिनत कीड़े-मकोड़े खेत पर मंडरा रहे हैं।
सहसा = अचानक-सीढ़ियों से सहसा पाँव फिसलने से मोहन को गम्भीर चोट लगी। बटोही = यात्री, मुसाफिर-थके-हारे बटोही ने वट-वृक्ष के नीचे आराम किया।
पैरों की निशानी छोड़ना = संकेत छोड़ना-श्रीकृष्ण ने गीता में पैरों की निशानी छोड़कर ही हमें कर्म का पाठ पढ़ाया है।
मन में बिठाना = याद रखना-अरे राघव, मन में बिठा लो कि तुम्हें कल तक वापस लौटना ही है।

(ख) विषय – बोध

प्रश्न 1.
कवि ने कविता में किस पथ की पहचान कर लेने का भाव प्रस्तुत किया
उत्तर:
कवि ने कविता में व्यक्ति को जीवन-पथ की पहचान कर लेने का भाव प्रस्तुत किया है।

प्रश्न 2.
‘अनगिनत राहियों’ से कवि ने किस ओर जाने का संकेत दिया है ?
उत्तर:
व्यक्ति के जीवन पथ में अनेक साथी मिलते हैं, परन्तु जो अपने पाँव के निशान छोड़ गए हैं, उन पर ही आगे बढ़ना चाहिए।

प्रश्न 3.
राही पथ पर अपनी निशानी कैसे छोड़ जाते हैं ?
उत्तर:
अपने अच्छे कारनामों से यात्री पथ पर अपनी निशानियाँ छोड़ जाते हैं, जो सबके लिए अनुकरणीय होती हैं।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

प्रश्न 4.
सफल यात्री राह पर कैसे बढ़ता है ?
उत्तर:
सफल यात्री मार्ग की विघ्न-बाधाओं की परवाह किये बिना आगे बढ़ता है। वह अपने मार्ग को पूरी तरह पहचान कर लेता है।

प्रश्न 5.
राही को कब नहीं रुकना चाहिए ?
उत्तर:
साथियों के छोड़ जाने पर और बाधाएं आने पर भी राही को नहीं रुकना चाहिए।

प्रश्न 6.
इन पंक्तियों की व्याख्या करो-
है अनिश्चित किस जगह पर सरित, गिरि, गह्वर मिलेंगे,
है अनिश्चित किस जगह पर बाग़-वन सुन्दर मिलेंगे।
उत्तर:
हे यात्री ! यह पहले से निश्चित नहीं है कि जीवन-पथ पर कहाँ नदी, पर्वत और खाई मिलेंगे, किस समय कौन-सी कठिनाई का सामना करना पड़े, इस विषय में पहले से कोई अनुमान लगाना सम्भव नहीं। किस मार्ग पर सुन्दर बाग और वन मिलेंगे अर्थात् किस समय सुख का अनुभव होगा, इस विषय में भी पहले से कुछ नहीं कहा जा सकता। किस स्थान पर जीवन-यात्रा समाप्त हो जाएगी, यह भी पहले से नहीं जाना जा सकता। यह भी निश्चित नहीं कि कब सुख रूपी फूल और कब तीव्र चुभन पैदा करने वाले दुःख रूपी कांटे मिलेंगे। इस जीवन-पथ पर बढ़ते हुए कौन-से साथी अलग हो जाएंगे और कौन-से नए आ मिलेंगे यह भी पहले से जानना सम्भव नहीं। बस तू केवल इतना फैसला कर ले कि तुम्हारे मार्ग में भले ही कुछ आ जाए पर तू अपने पथ पर रुकेगा नहीं, अपितु निरन्तर आगे बढ़ता जाएगा। अतः हे पथिक ! तू चलने से पूर्व अपने मार्ग की पहचान कर ले। भाव है कि जीवन-पथ के यात्री के लिए यह अनिश्चित होता है कि उसे कहाँ सुख मिलेंगे और कहाँ दुःख।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

(ग) व्यावहारिक व्याकरण

I. इन शब्दों के दो-दो पर्यायवाची शब्द लिखें

आँख – ……………….
पहाड़ – ……………….
नदी – ………………..
मुसाफिर – ………..
वन – ……………….
उत्तर:
आँख – नेत्र, नयन।
पहाड़ – पर्वत, गिरि।
नदी – सरिता, तटिनी।
मुसाफिर – यात्री, बटोही।
वन – अरण्य, कानन।

II. इन शब्दों के आगे ‘अ’ लगाकर विलोम शब्द बनाएँ

ज्ञात – ……………..
निश्चित – ……………..
सम्भव – ……………..
सफल – ……………..
सत्य – ……………..
उत्तर:
ज्ञात – अज्ञात।
निश्चित-अनिश्चित।
सम्भव – असम्भव।
सफल – असफल।
सत्य – असत्य।

III. अनेक शब्दों के लिए एक शब्द लिखें

(1) जो गिना न जा सके
(2) जो निश्चित न हो
(3) पथ पर चलने वाला।
उत्तर:
(1) अनगिनत
(2) अनिश्चित
(3) पथिक।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

IV. ‘अनगिनत’, ‘अनुमान’ शब्द में ‘अन’ और ‘अनु’ उपसर्ग हैंइसी प्रकार ‘अन’ और ‘अनु’ उपसर्ग लगाकर नये शब्द बनाएँ

अन + होनी =………….
अन + जान =…………..
अन + मोल =………….
अन + अन्य =…………..
अनु + सार =………….
अनु + शासन =………….
अनु + मति =………….
अनु + करण। = ……….
उत्तर:
अन + होनी = अनहोनी
अन + जान = अनजान
अन + मोल = अनमोल
अन + अन्य = अनन्य
अनु + सार = अनुसार
अनु + शासन = अनुशासन
अनु + मति = अनुमति
अनु + करण = अनुकरण।

(घ) रचना बोध

प्रश्न 1.
कविता के आधार पर सभी विद्यार्थी जीवन का लक्ष्य’ विषय पर निबन्ध करें।
उत्तर:
‘जीवन का लक्ष्य’ निबन्ध के लिए विद्यार्थी व्याकरण के निबन्ध भाग में देखें।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Guide पथ की पहचान Important Questions and Answers

बहुविकल्पीय प्रश्न निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखें

प्रश्न 1.
चलने से पहले बटोही को किसकी पहचान करनी चाहिए ?
(क) साथी की
(ख) बाट की
(ग) बाहर की
(घ) वातावरण की।
उत्तर:
बाट की।

प्रश्न 2.
कवि किस पथ की पहचान की बात कर रहा है ?
(क) घर के
(ख) वन के
(ग) जीवन के
(घ) समाज के।
उत्तर:
जीवन के।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

प्रश्न 3.
राही पथ पर अपने निशान कैसे छोड़ जाते हैं ?
(क) निशान लगाकर
(ख) धर्मशाला बनाकर
(ग) पक्का रास्ता बनाकर
(घ) अच्छे कार्य करने से।
उत्तर:
अच्छे कार्य करने से।

प्रश्न 4.
सफल यात्री किसकी चिंता नहीं करता ?
(क) साथी की
(ख) रास्ते की
(ग) वस्त्रों की
(घ) विघ्न बाधाओं की
उत्तर:
विघ्न बाधाओं की।

प्रश्न 5.
राही की आन क्या है ?
(क) सड़कें बनाना
(ख) साथी के साथ रहना
(ग) किसी की चिंता नहीं करना
(घ) सदा चलते रहना।
उत्तर:
सदा चलते रहना।

पथ की पहचान Summary

सप्रसंग व्याख्या

1. पूर्व चलने के बटोही, बाट की पहचान कर ले।
पुस्तकों में है नहीं, छापी गई इसकी कहानी,
हाल इसका ज्ञात होता है न औरों की जबानी,
अनगिनत राही गये इस राह से, उनका पता क्या,
पर गए कुछ लोग इस पर छोड़ पैरों की निशानी,
यह निशानी मूक होकर भी बहुत कुछ बोलती है,
खोल इसका अर्थ पंथी, पंथ का अनुमान कर ले,
पूर्व चलने के बटोही, बाट की पहचान कर ले।

शब्दार्थ:
बटोही = मुसाफिर। बाट = रास्ता। अनगिनत = जिनकी गिनती न की जा सके, असंख्य। निशानी = चिह्न। मूक = खामोशी। पंथी = मुसाफिर। पंथ = मार्ग।

प्रसंग:
प्रस्तुत पद्यांश हमारी हिन्दी की पाठ्य-पुस्तक में संकलित श्री हरिवंश राय ‘बच्चन’ द्वारा रचित ‘पथ की पहचान’ नामक कविता में से लिया गया है। इसमें कवि ने जीवन मार्ग पर निरन्तर आगे बढ़ने की प्रेरणा दी है। जीवन-मार्ग पर चलने वाले मनुष्य को सावधान किया गया है।

व्याख्या:
कवि कहता है कि जीवन के मार्ग पर चलने वाले हे यात्री ! तू चलने से पहले रास्ते को समझ ले। इस जीवन के रास्ते की कहानी पुस्तकों में नहीं छापी गई है। दूसरे के मुँह से सुनकर भी इसका हाल ज्ञात नहीं होता। आज तक इस रास्ते पर अनगिनत यात्री जा चुके हैं, परन्तु उन सब का आज कुछ भी पता नहीं कि कहाँ गए, परन्तु कुछ लोग इस रास्ते पर अपने पैरों की निशानी छोड़ गए हैं। यह निशानी चुप रह कर भी बहुत कुछ बताती है। हे यात्री ! तू इसका अर्थ समझ कर अपने रास्ते का अनुमान लगा ले। मुसाफिर ! तू चलने से पहले अपने मार्ग की पहचान कर ले। भाव है कि जीवन-पथ का रास्ता बड़ा विस्तृत है। इस पर सोच-समझ कर चलना चाहिए।

विशेष:

  1. कवि ने मानव को जीवन पथ पर आगे बढ़ते हुए जिन बातों को जानने की आवश्यकता होती है उसका पाठ पढ़ाया है।
  2. भाषा सरल और सरस है।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

2. यह बुरा है या कि अच्छा व्यर्थ दिन इस पर बिताना,
जब असम्भव छोड़ यह पथ दूसरे पर पग बढ़ाना,
तू इसे अच्छा समझ यात्रा सरल इससे बनेगी,
सोच मत केवल तुझे ही, यह पड़ा मन में बिठाना,
हर सफल पंथी यही विश्वास ले इस पर बढ़ा है,
तू इसी पर आज अपने चित्त का अवधान कर ले,
पूर्व चलने के बटोही बाट की पहचान कर ले।

शब्दार्थ : व्यर्थ = बेकार । असम्भव = नामुमकिन। पथ = रास्ता। पग = पैर। अवधान = मन लगाना।

प्रसंग:
यह पद्यांश ‘श्री हरिवंश राय बच्चन द्वारा लिखित ‘पथ की पहचान’ नामक कविता से लिया गया है। इसमें कवि ने मनुष्य को जीवन पथ पर निरन्तर आगे बढ़ने की प्रेरणा दी है। कवि जीवन-मार्ग पर चलने वाले मनुष्य को सावधान करते हुए कहते हैं

व्याख्या:
कवि कहता है कि हे पथिक! यह मार्ग बुरा है या अच्छा, इस बात के लिए सोच-सोचकर दिन बिता देना बेकार है। तू अपने पथ पर निरन्तर आगे बढ़ता जा, जबकि .इस रास्ते को छोड़कर दूसरे रास्ते पर चलना असम्भव है। जीवन का रास्ता एक ही है, उस पर चलना ही पड़ेगा, इसलिए यह सोचना व्यर्थ है कि यह बुरा है या अच्छा। तू इसी मार्ग को अच्छा जान ले, इससे तू रास्ते पर आसानी से चल सकेगा। यह मत सोच कि केवल तुझे ही मन में यह निश्चय करना पड़ा है, बल्कि हर एक सफल यात्री ने इसी विश्वास को लेकर इस रास्ते पर अपना मन लगा कर चलना शुरू किया है। तू भी आज. इसी रास्ते पर अपना मन लगा ले। हे यात्री ! चलने से पहले अपने मार्ग की पहचान कर ले। भाव है कि जब व्यक्ति कोई रास्ता अपना ले तो फिर उस पर बढ़ते रहना चाहिए।

विशेष:

  1. कवि ने मनुष्य को जीवन में स्थिरता का परिचय दिया है और माना है कि उसे बार-बार अपने लक्ष्य को बदलना नहीं चाहिए।
  2. भाषा सरल, सरस और भावपूर्ण है।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

3. है अनिश्चित किस जगह पर सरित्, गिरि, गह्वर मिलेंगे,
है अनिश्चित किस जगह पर बाग, वन सुन्दर मिलेंगे,
किस जगह यात्रा खत्म हो जाएगी, यह भी अनिश्चित,
है अनिश्चित, कब सुमन, कब कंटकों के शर मिलेंगे,
कौन सहसा छूट जाएंगे, मिलेंगे कौन सहसा,
आ पड़े कुछ भी, रुकेगा तू न, ऐसी आन कर लें,
पूर्व चलने के बटोही, बाट की पहचान कर ले।

शब्दार्थ : सरित् = नदी। गिरि = पहाड़। गह्वर = गड्ढा, खाई। सुमन = फूल। कंटकों = कांटों। शर = तीर।

प्रसंग:
यह पद्यांश ‘पथ की पहचान’ नामक कविता से लिया गया है। यह श्री हरिवंश राय बच्चन द्वारा रचित है। इसमें कवि ने मनुष्य को जीवन पथ पर निरन्तर आगे बढ़ने की प्रेरणा दी है। कवि जीवन-मार्ग पर चलने वाले मनुष्य को सावधान करते हुए कहते हैं

व्याख्या:
हे यात्री ! यह पहले से निश्चित नहीं है कि जीवन-पथ पर कहाँ नदी, पर्वत और खाई मिलेंगे, किस समय कौन-सी कठिनाई का सामना करना पड़े, इस विषय में पहले से कोई अनुमान लगाना सम्भव नहीं। किस मार्ग पर सुन्दर बाग और वन मिलेंगे अर्थात् किस समय सुख का अनुभव होगा, इस विषय में भी पहले से कुछ नहीं कहा जा सकता। किस स्थान पर जीवन-यात्रा समाप्त हो जाएगी, यह भी पहले से नहीं जाना जा सकता। यह भी निश्चित नहीं कि कब सुख रूपी फूल और कब तीव्र चुभन पैदा करने वाले दुःख रूपी कांटे मिलेंगे। इस जीवन-पथ पर बढ़ते हुए कौन-से साथी अलग हो जाएंगे और कौन-से नए आ मिलेंगे यह भी पहले से जानना सम्भव नहीं। बस तू केवल इतना फैसला कर ले कि तुम्हारे मार्ग में भले ही कुछ आ जाए पर तू अपने पथ पर रुकेगा नहीं, अपितु निरन्तर आगे बढ़ता जाएगा। अतः हे पथिक ! तू चलने से पूर्व अपने मार्ग की पहचान कर ले। भाव है कि जीवन-पथ के यात्री के लिए यह अनिश्चित होता है कि उसे कहाँ सुख मिलेंगे और कहाँ दुःख।

विशेष:

  1. कवि ने मनुष्य को निरन्तर आगे बढ़ने की प्रेरणा दी है।
  2. भाषा सरल और सरस है।।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 9 पथ की पहचान

पथ की पहचान कविता का सार

‘पथ की पहचान’ कविता श्री हरिवंश राय ‘बच्चन’ की श्रेष्ठ रचना है। इसमें कवि मनुष्य को सम्बोधित करते हुए कहता है कि हे मनुष्य ! जीवन के मार्ग पर चलने से पहले तू उसकी पहचान कर ले, क्योंकि इसका ज्ञान लोगों के बताने या पुस्तकों से प्राप्त नहीं होगा। कुछ लोग जो जीवन-पथ पर अपने चिह्न छोड़ गए हैं, उनके आधार पर अपनी यात्रा आरम्भ करनी चाहिए। एक बार रास्ते में चलने के बाद अच्छे या बुरे का विचार नहीं करना चाहिए। दृढ़ संकल्प के साथ आगे बढ़ना चाहिए। इस रास्ते पर चलते हुए यह निश्चित नहीं कि कहाँ सुख मिलेंगे और कहाँ दुःख। कौन रास्ते में छोड़ जाएगा और कब तुम्हारी जीवनयात्रा समाप्त हो जाएगी। ये सारी बातें अनिश्चित हैं, परन्तु तू दृढ़ता के साथ आगे बढ़ता चल।
‘पथ की पहचान’ कविता श्री हरिवंश राय ‘बच्चन’ की श्रेष्ठ रचना है। इसमें कवि मनुष्य को सम्बोधित करते हुए कहता है कि हे मनुष्य ! जीवन के मार्ग पर चलने से पहले तू उसकी पहचान कर ले, क्योंकि इसका ज्ञान लोगों के बताने या पुस्तकों से प्राप्त नहीं होगा। कुछ लोग जो जीवन-पथ पर अपने चिह्न छोड़ गए हैं, उनके आधार पर अपनी यात्रा आरम्भ करनी चाहिए। एक बार रास्ते में चलने के बाद अच्छे या बुरे का विचार नहीं करना चाहिए। दृढ़ संकल्प के साथ आगे बढ़ना चाहिए। इस रास्ते पर चलते हुए यह निश्चित नहीं कि कहाँ सुख मिलेंगे और कहाँ दुःख। कौन रास्ते में छोड़ जाएगा और कब तुम्हारी जीवनयात्रा समाप्त हो जाएगी। ये सारी बातें अनिश्चित हैं, परन्तु तू दृढ़ता के साथ आगे बढ़ता चल।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

Punjab State Board PSEB 8th Class Hindi Book Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 8 Hindi Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

Hindi Guide for Class 8 PSEB बस चुप भली Textbook Questions and Answers

(क) भाषा – बोध

I. शब्दार्थ

निगाह = नज़र।
जुबानदराजी = अधिक बोलने की आदत।
दस्तक = खटखटाना।
जहर उगलना = बुरा-भला कहना।
रामबाण औषधि = अचूक दवा।
नसीहतें = उपदेश।
बयान = वर्णन करना।
चटोरी = स्वाद लेने वाली।
रसना = जीभ।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

II. इन मुहावरों को अपने वाक्यों में प्रयोग करें:

1. काला अक्षर भैंस बराबर
2. छाती पर मूंग दलना
3. फाँसी का फंदा चूमना
4. कान पकड़ना
5.मैदान में कूद पड़ना
6. राग अलापना
7. नमक खाना
8. अपना-सा मुँह लेकर चले जाना
9. जान के पीछे पड़ना
उत्तर:
1. काला अक्षर भैंस बराबर – आज के युग में काला अक्षर भैंस बराबर व्यक्ति को समाज में सम्मान प्राप्त नहीं होता।
2. छाती पर मूंग दलना – गणेशी का बदमाश पोता न पढ़ता है और न ही कोई काम करता है, बस बूढ़ी दादी की छाती पर मूंग दलता रहता है।
3. फाँसी का फंदा चूमना – भगत सिंह ने देश के लिए खुशी-खुशी फाँसी का फंदा चूम लिया था।
4. कान पकड़ना – मैं तो कान पकड़ता हूँ कि तुम्हारे घर अब कभी नहीं आऊँगा।
5. मैदान में कूद पड़ना – झांसी की रानी अंग्रेजों के व्यवहार से क्रोधित हो कर मैदान में कूद पड़ी थी।
6. राग अलापना – तेरी यहाँ कोई सुनवाई नहीं तो फिर क्यों अपना राग अलाप रहा है।
7. नमक खाना – तुम्हारा बरसों तक नमक खाया है इसलिए यह काम तो मुझे करना ही पड़ेगा।
8. अपना-सा मुँह लेकर चले जाना – अफ़सर ने जब गाँव वालों की बात सुनी ही नहीं तो वे अपना-सा मुँह लेकर चले गए।
9. जान के पीछे पड़ना – ये गुंडे तो तुम्हारी जान के पीछे पड़े हुए हैं इसलिए जल्दी पुलिस की सहायता प्राप्त करो।

(ख) विषय – बोध

I. सही पर (✓) और गलत पर (×) का चिह्न लगायें :

(क) जुबानदराजी बुरी आदत है?
(ख) मौन के बल पर कालिदास का विवाह राजकुमारी से नहीं हुआ था। ( )
(ग) निर्दय जुबान के कारण रहीम अन्तिम दिनों में परेशान हुए थे। ( )
(घ) बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल को साहब ने तरक्की दी थी। ( )
(ङ) चुनाव अभियान में लेखक ने खन्ना का पक्ष लिया था। ( )
उत्तर:
सही- क, ग।
गलत- ख, घ, ङ।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

II. इन प्रश्नों के उत्तर एक या दो वाक्यों में लिखें :

प्रश्न (क)
सब आफ़तों से बचने की रामबाण औषधि क्या है?
उत्तर:
सब आफ़तों से बचने की रामबाण औषधि मौन धारण कर लेना है।

प्रश्न (ख)
न चाहते हुए भी हम क्यों जुबानदराजी करते हैं?
उत्तर:
न चाहते हुए भी मन के भावों के कारण जुबान नियंत्रण में नहीं रहती है और हम जुबानदराजी करते हैं।

प्रश्न (ग)
जुबानदराजी के कारण मनसूर का क्या परिणाम हुआ?
उत्तर:
जुबानदराजी के कारण मनसूर को फांसी के फंदे पर झूलना पड़ा था।

प्रश्न (घ)
अपने ही घर में लेखक को मेहमान क्यों बनना पड़ा?
उत्तर:
लेखक को अपने किसी जान-पहचान वाले के बेटे की शादी में न चाहते हुए भी भागीदार बनने के कारण अपने ही घर में मेहमान बनना पड़ा था।

प्रश्न (ङ)
बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल की गवाही से लेखक ने मुक्ति किस युक्ति से ली?
उत्तर:
लेखक को झूठ-मूठ की भयंकर खाँसी का बहाना करने की युक्ति से बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल की गवाही से मुक्ति मिली थी।

III. चार या पाँच वाक्यों में उत्तर लिखें:

प्रश्न (क)
एक चुप सौ सुख’ इस तथ्य (सच्चाई) को अपनी युक्तियों से स्पष्ट करें।
उत्तर:
वास्तव में ही ‘एक चुप सौ सुख’ एक सच्चाई है। यदि दो मित्र आपस में किसी भी बात पर झगड़ पड़ें तो उन में से किसी एक का पक्ष नहीं लिया जा सकता। ऐसा करने से उन दो में से एक मित्र का दुश्मन बन जाना निश्चित होता है। लड़ाई-झगड़ा तो घर में भी हो जाता है। चुप रह कर किसी भी पक्ष का साथ न देना समस्या को कम ही करता है और अपने शत्रुओं और विरोधियों की संख्या को भी कम करता है।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

प्रश्न (ख)
क्या हर स्थिति में चुप रहना चाहिए’ अपने विचार लिखें।
उत्तर:
हर स्थिति में चुप नहीं रहना चाहिए। ऐसा तो केवल वही कर सकता है जो मूर्ख हो या पागल हो। जब कोई अन्याय के रास्ते पर चलता हुआ किसी पर भी अनावश्यक रूप से अत्याचार कर रहा हो तो चुप नहीं रहना चाहिए। देखकर मक्खी नहीं निगली जा सकती। जब हमारे हितों को चोट लग रही हो या किसी पर भी अनर्थ ढाया जा रहा हो तो चुप नहीं रहना चाहिए, सदा चुप रहने वाले को लोग मूर्ख ही मानते हैं और जीवन जीते हुए मूर्ख कदापि नहीं बनना चाहिए। इसके लिए व्यवहार बुद्धि का प्रयोग करना चाहिए।

प्रश्न (ग)
बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल के झगड़े से बचने के लिए लेखक ने क्या नाटक किया?
उत्तर:
बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल के झगड़े से बचने के लिए लेखक ने अपने दफ़्तर के साहब से भयंकर खांसी का नाटक किया था। वह ज़ोर-जोर से खाँसी करते हुए लुढ़क गया था। उसने अपनी सांस रोक ली थी। उसे डिस्पैंसरी ले जाना पड़ा था।

प्रश्न (घ)
लेखक ने उलझनमयी परिस्थितियों कोर्ट कचहरी, शादी-मंगनी, चुनाव उपचुनाव-आदि से दूर रहने का संकेत क्यों दिया है ?
उत्तर:
जब हम किसी विषय पर चुप हो जाते हैं और किसी भी पक्ष के पक्ष या विपक्ष का साथ नहीं देते तो लोग हमें अपना शस्त्र नहीं बना पाते। वे हम से तब किसी गवाही की उम्मीद नहीं रखते। उन्हें लगता है कि हम उनके किसी काम के नहीं हैं। ऐसी स्थिति में हम कोट-कचहरी, शादी-मंगनी, चुनाव-उपचुनाव आदि चक्करों से बच जाते हैं।

(ग) व्यावहारिक व्याकरण

I. निम्नलिखित शब्दों में से उपसर्ग पृथक् करें :

1. अधिपति, अध्यक्ष, अध्यात्म, अधिराज।
2. अभिप्राय, अभिशाप, अभिलाषा, अभिमान।
3. अपराध, अपमान, अपशब्द, अपवाद।
4. अतिशय, अतिनिर्धन, अत्याचार, अत्यावश्यक।
5. अनुवाद, अनुचर, अनुरूप, अनुकरण।
6. अवगुण, अवनति, अवस्था, अवसर।
7. उपमान, उपवन, उपकार, उपमंत्री।
8. निर्भय, निर्दोष, निर्वाह, नीरोग (निर्)
9. निस्तार, निश्चल, निष्प्राण, निष्प्रभ (निस / निश / निष् । निः)
10. परिचय, परिमाण, परिक्रमा, परिवर्तन।
उत्तर:
1. अधि
2. अभि
3. अप
4. अति
5. अनु
6. अव
7. उप
8. निर्
9. निस / निश / निष् / निः
10. परि।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

II. समस्तपदों को अलग करें (विग्रह)

जुबान दराजी = ……………….
वाणी-संयम = ……………….
योग-साधना = ……………….
तन-मन = ……………….
शरणागत = ……………….
रसोईघर = ……………….
आपबीती = ……………….
अनपढ़ = ……………….
उत्तर:
जुबान दराजी = जुबान की दराजी
वाणी-संयम = वाणी का संयम
योग-साधना = योग की साधना
तन-मन = तन और मन
शरणागत = शरण में गत
रसोई घर = रसोई के लिए घर
आप बीती = अपने पर बीती
अनपढ़ = नहीं पढ़ा है जो/ न पढ़ा

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Guide बस चुप भली Important Questions and Answers

बहुविकल्पीय प्रश्न निम्नलिखित प्रश्नों के उत्तर सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखें

प्रश्न 1.
किस पर लगाम लगाने से सभी काम शीघ्रता और शांति से हो जाते हैं ?
(क) हाथों पर
(ख) पैरों पर
(ग) जुबान पर
(घ) मन पर।
उत्तर:
जुबान पर।

प्रश्न 2.
जुबानदराजी के कारण किसे फाँसी पर झूलना पड़ा
(क) महमूद को
(ख) मनसूर को
(ग) मुनव्वर को
(घ) मुज़रूह को।
उत्तर:
मनसूर को।

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

प्रश्न 3.
गवाही नहीं देने से मुक्ति कैसे मिलती है ?
(क) बेहोश होकर
(ख) बीमार होकर
(ग) खांसी के दौरे से
(घ) विदेश भाग कर।
उत्तर:
खांसी के दौरे से।

प्रश्न 4.
रहीम के अनुसार अनुचित बात कहने पर जूते किसे पड़ते हैं ?
(क) मुँह को
(ख) खोपड़ी को
(ग) पीठ को
(घ) टांगों को
उत्तर:
खोपड़ी को।

प्रश्न 5.
विधानसभा के चुनाव अभियान का काम संभालने से बचने के लिए लेखक कहाँ चले गए ?
(क) दिल्ली
(ख) शिमला
(ग) अमृतसर
(घ) पटियाला।
उत्तर:
दिल्ली

PSEB 8th Class Hindi Solutions Chapter 8 बस चुप भली

बस चुप भली Summary

बस चुप भली पाठ का सार

युगों से समझदार लोग सभी प्रकार की मुसीबतों से बचने के लिए एक ही बात कहते आएं हैं कि ‘एक चुप सौ सुख’। जुबान पर लगाम लगाने से सभी काम शीघ्रता और शांति से पूरे हो जाते हैं लेकिन जुबान है कि मुँह में टिकती ही नहीं। जरा-सी बात पर गज भर लंबी हो कर यह बाहर निकल आती है और झगड़े का बड़ा कारण बन जाती है। बुजुर्गों की चुप रहने की नसीहत धरी-की-धरी रह जाती है। चुप रहना आसान नहीं है पर इसके फ़ायदे बहुत हैं। मूर्ख और अनपढ़ कालिदास केवल चुप रहने के कारण सुंदर राजकुमारी का पति बन गया था और वहीं अपने युग का सबसे बड़ा दार्शनिक मन्सूर जोबस हर बात को बोलने के कारण फांसी के फंदे पर लटका दिया गया था। तभी तो रहीम को कहना पड़ा था कि जुबान अच्छी-बुरी सब बातें कह कर स्वयं तो दाँतों के पीछे मुँह में जा छिपती है और जूते बेचारी खोपड़ी को खाने पड़ते हैं। पिछले विधानसभा चुनाव के समय मुहल्ले के दो लोग लेखक के घर पधारे।

वे दोनों चाहते थे कि लेखक महोदय उनके लिए चुनावअभियान का सारा कार्यभार संभाल लें। लेखक ने उन दोनों को किन्हीं विशेष एहसानों के कारण साफ-साफ मना तो करना नहीं था, इसलिए उन्होंने उन्हें एक कागज़ पर लिख कर बताया कि वे मौन व्रत पर थे और अगले दिन बताएंगे कि वे उन दोनों में से किस के लिए काम करेंगे। अगले दिन सुबह-सवेरे वे दिल्ली चले गए और विवाद से बच गए। दफ़्तर में बिहारी लाल और मुरारी लाल ने आपस में जोरदार झगड़ा किया, तोड़-फोड़ भी कर दी। बड़े साहब ने उन दोनों के कहने पर लेखक को गवाह के रूप में बुलाया। संकट से बचने के लिए लेखक ने भयंकर खाँसी के दौरे का नाटक किया। लेखक को तो डिस्पैंसरी भेज दिया गया पर बिहारी-मुरारी दोनों की तरक्की रोक दी गई थी जिसका सारा दोष दोनों ने लेखक पर डाला। एक बार मुहल्ले के कुछ बुजुर्गों ने अपने होनहार पुत्र को विवाह के लिए लड़की पक्ष को दिखाने हेतु लेखक का घर चुन लिया। लेखक चाह कर भी उन्हें ना नहीं कह सका जिसका परिणाम है कि अब उसका मेहमानखाना लड़के-लड़की वालों के आपसी झगड़ों का पंचायत घर बना हुआ है। लेखक का यही मानना है कि कोर्ट-कचहरी, शादी-मंगनी, चुनाव-उपचुनाव, सिफ़ारिश, गवाही, जमानत आदि से दूर ही रहना चाहिए। यदि ऐसा नहीं किया जा सकता तो जुबान अवश्य खोलनी पड़ेगी और जुबान का रस तो निश्चित रूप से दुःखदायी होता ही है।

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Punjab State Board PSEB 12th Class Religion Book Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

PSEB Solutions for Class 12 Religion Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Long Answer Type Questions:

Question 1.
Discuss in brief but meaningful the salient features of Purana literature and its importance in Hinduism.
Or
Discuss the importance of Puranas in Hinduism.
Or
Give a brief account of important Puranas.
Or
Discuss in brief but meaningful the subject-matter of Puranas.
Or
Explain how Puranas were written?
Or
What is meant by Puranas? Give a brief account of the various Puranas.
Or
Write in brief about the Puranas.
Or
Give information about famous five Puranas.
Answer:
The Puranas are the ancient texts of the Hindus. The Purana means ancient. They have been written in Sanskrit. No definite period is given for their writing. These are not a creation of single century. They are described in the Atharvaveda, Upanishads and epics. There have been made changes in them from time to time and new chapters were added to them. The Puranas were given their final touch in the Gupta period. Hence the Puranas have been written by several writers.

The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda and the Shudras were given the permission to read them. The total number of Purans are 18. These Puranas have been divided into three parts. There Eire 6 PurEihas in each part and they Eire called Shiva, Vaishnava, and Brahman Pur ana.

These parts are as follows :

1. Shiva Purana :

  • Vayu
  • Linga
  • Skanda
  • Agni
  • Matsya
  • Kurma.

2. Vaishnava Purana :

  • Vishnu
  • Bhagvata
  • Narada
  • Garuda
  • Padma.

3. Brahman Purana :

  • Brahman
  • Brahmand
  • Brahmavaivrata
  • Markandeya
  • Bhavishya and
  • Vamana.

The prevalent Vedic and Non-Vedic religious beliefs, myths and stories are compiled in the Puranas. Myths are those stories that have no proof, but they Eire very popular. Each Purana is divided into five parts. These parts are :

  1. Search: It describes about the creation of the world.
  2. Pratisarga: It gives a description about the development, destruction and recreation of the world.
  3. Vansh: It gives a description of the lineage of the famous kings and Rishis.
  4. Manzanar: It gives a description of the great battles fought on this earth and the important event in each of them.
  5. Vanshanucharita: It gives a description of the kings of great lineage and the feats of the Rishis.

What is worth remembering here is that we do not have the original Puranas with us. What we have with us today as the Puranas, may not necessarily have the. descriptions as per the above divisions. A brief description of the Puranas is as follows :

1. The Brahman Purana: It is also called the Adi Purana. It has 14,000 shlokas in it. Most of it describes the pilgramage places of India. Besides this, it also gives a description of Krishana, Rama, Surya, famous royal families, earth, hell,’ various castes and about Varna Ashrama system.

2. The Padma Purana: This is the biggest Purana. It has almost 55,000 shlokas in it. It describes the Srishti Khand, Bhumi KhEind, Swarga Khand and Pataal Khand. It gives a detailed description of the Vishnu Katha and Rama Katha. Besides these, this Purana also describes about the holy places and fasts. Several stories pertaining to myths Eire Eilso recorded in it.

3. The Vishnu Purana: This Purana has 23,000 shlokas in it.*It says that Vishnu is the supreme god. He alone has created the world and protects it. Famous among the stories given in it are the stories of Prahlad and Dhruva. It also describes the strange things about this world and the people of heaven. It gives a description of several famous lineages. In the fifth and last part, the various miraculous deeds of Krishna have been discussed.

4. The Vayu Purana : This Purana has 11,000 shlokas in it. It describes several stories associated with the glory of Shiva. For this reason, it is also called the Shiva Pursina. It describes several lineages. It has great historical importance because it is based on facts. It also gives the geographical description which is quite useful.

5. The Bhagvata Purana : Most popular among the Puranas associated with Lord Vishnu is the Bhagavata Purana. It gives a description of several stories associated with the life of Lord Krishna. It also says that Lord Buddha and the founder of Sankhya philosophy, Kapil are incarnations of Vishnu. This Purana is not very important from historical point of view.

6. The Narada Purana : This Purana consists of 25,000 shlokas. This Purana is related to the worship of Vishnu. It gives a detailed description of the prevalent ‘ education in ancient India. It does not give a description of the lineages.

7. The Markandeya Purana : There are 900 shlokas in this Purana. It gives a detailed description of the Vedic gods Indra, Surya and Agni etc. It also gives a description of several famous lineages.

8. The Agni Purana : This Purana has 15,400 shlokas. According to a belief, this Purana was narrated to Rishi Vashisht by Agni god himself. This Purana is associated with Shaivism. It throws ample light on several important subjects like war tactics, methods to perform the yajans, astrology, geography, law, grammar, medicine, fasts, donation, marriage etc. Undoubtedly, this Purana is like an encyclopaedia.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

9. The Bhavishya Purana : This Purana has 14,000 shlokas in it. There are several stories related to the gods Brahma, Vishnu, Shiva and Surya. It also describes several ancient royal families and sages. Besides these, it also discusses several rituals which were performed at that time.

10. The Brahmavaivarta Purana : This Purana has 18,000 shlokas in it. This Purana tells Brahman as the creator of this universe. It gives a detailed description of Lord Krishna’s life. It also describes about Radha. In it, Ganesha has been called is an incarnation of Krishna.

11. The Linga Purana : This Purana has 11,000’shlokas in it. This Purana is associated with Shaivism. It describes about the incarnations of Shiva, fasts and holy places. It preaches to worship the linga as a form of Shiva.

12. The Varaha Purana: It has 10,700 shlokas in it. It giyes a detailed description of the worship of Vishnu in the incarnation of Varaha. It also gives a description related to Shiva, Durga and Ganesha.

13. The Skanda Purana : It was a large Purana. It describes 51,000 shlokas in it. This Purana is not available now. Information about it can be gathered from examples cited in the other texts. This Purana mainly describes about the worship of Shiva. Besides this, it gives useful information about the several holy places and temples of India.

14. The Vamana Purana : There are 10,000 shlokas in this Purana. Most of this Purana describes about the worship of gods like Shiva, Vishnu and Ganesha etc. It also describes several mythical stories.

15. The Kurina Purana : There are 18,000 shlokas in this Purana. It describes the worship of the Kurma incarnation of Vishnu. It gives a description of several mythical stories.

16. The Matsya Purana: It has 14,000 shlokas in it. This Purana is a conversation between a matsya (fish) and Manu. When this world was destroyed then this fish saved man. It gives a detailed description of several famous royal families. Besides these, there is a description of several fairs and pilgrimages.

17. The Garura Purana : There are 18,000 shlokas in this Parana. There is a description of the methods involved in the worhship of Vishnu. It gives important information about the yajnas, astrology, grammar, social science, physical education and ghosts and spirits. It gives detailed information about the last rites, sati system and pitra shradhs.

18. The Brahmanda Parana : There are 12,000 shlokas in this Pur ana. This Purana was read by Brahman. It gives a description about several dynasties and pilgramages. Importance of the Pur anas The Puranas present a detailed picture of the ancient Indian culture. The customs and traditions prevalent in Hinduism today are a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas throw ample light on the religious beliefs of the Hindus, the methods of worship of the gods and goddesses, fasts, shradhs, birth, marriage and rites performed at the time of death.

Idol worship and belief in incarnation is also a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas popularized the tradition of worship of forefathers further. People were inspired to donate. The description of the popular dynasties given in the Puranas proved to be quite useful historically.

The description of the pilgramages and temples gives us important infbrmation about the contemporary art. Besides these, the Puranas throw ample light on the social, economic and political condition of ancient India. Undoubtedly, it would be no exaggeration if the Puranas are called the encyclopaedia of Indian culture. Dr. R.C. Hazra has aptly remarked, “The Puranas have played a very important part in the life of the Hindus for more than two thousand years.

They have brought home to the common man the wisdom of the saints of the highest order without creating any discord. The authors of these works took every individual into consideration and made such prescriptions as would benefit him in.his social and religious life.”

Question 2.
Discuss in brief but meaningful the subject matter and importance of Upanishads.
Or
Give a brief account and importance and meaning of Upanishads.

Or
Discuss the contents of Upanishads and their importance.
Or
Explain the subject-matter of Upanishadls.
Or
Write a short note on the main teachings of the Upanishads.
Or
Discuss the main teachings of the Upanishads.
Or
What do you know about the main teachings of the Upanishads?
Or
What do you know about the main doctrines of the Upanishads?
Or
What is meant by Upanishads? Give a brief account of their main features.
Or
Give introduction about the Upanishads.
Or
Write about the m$dn teachings of the Upanishads. Name two earliest Upanishads.
Or
What is meant by Upanishads? Describe any two of them in brief.
Answer:
The Upanishads are considered as the true origin of Indian philosophy. Upanishads are those texts which incorporate in them the spiritual knowledge of the „ world of highest order just as pearls are held together in a string. The lustre o’f these pearls helps to eradicate the inner darkness of a person and, he is illuminated to such an extent that it outshines the light of the even sun. It would be no exaggeration to say that the Upanishads are the prime source of Indian philosophy. The word Upanishad is made from a combination of three words. The word ‘Up’ means near, ‘Ni’ means devotion and ‘Shad’ means to sit. Thus the word Upanishad’ means sitting beside with complete devotion.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

In fact, Upanishad is such knowledge which a guru gives to his students secretly. The Upanishads are also called Vedanta because they are considered to be consequential part of the Vedas. Vedanta means the last knowledge. This means that there is no knowledge beyond or after Upanishads. The Upanishads were composed by different sages between 1000 B.C. and 300 B.C. The total number of all Upanishads is 108. Upanishads like Isha, Kena, Prashna, Mundaka, Taittiriya, Aitareya, Chhandogya, Brihadaranyaka Shvetashvatara, Kaushitaki and Katha are considered the most important. The main teachings of the Upanishads are as follows :

1. Nature of Self : The word Self has been frequently used in the Upanishads because it is considered as the ultimate source of all knowledge. Self is the omnipresent living element. This element forms the basic foundation of all elements. This assumes a living form and resides in the hearts of all people. This is Brahman or the Atman (Absolute). For this reason, the Self is considered as the source of all light. According to the Upanishads, the Self is the only element about which there is no doubt. The Self is the determined strength. It is not transitory. It itself forms the basis of all transitory elements. For this reason, it is unchanging itself.

2. Nature of the Absolute : The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element of Sanskrit language called ‘Briha’ which means to grow or to proceed. From philosophical point of view, Brahman is an element which led to the creation of the visible world. Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boundless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights. Despite being the basis of all virtues it is called Nirguna. He is the source of complete knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, he is the basic cause and foundation of the entire world.

3. Identity of Self and the Absolute : The sages have considered the Self and Brahman as a single entity in the Upanishads. They were considered as one basic element. For this reason, in the Upanishads, the words Self and the Absolute are used interchangeably at- several places. The distinction is only in words but not in meaning or element. There is only one primary element. He is sometimes called Self and sometimes called the Absolute. Just as a river joins the sea, so does the Self sublime with the Parmatman. Because the Self and the Absolute are one, therefore they cannot be differentiated. In brief, the Upanishadic philosophy looks like an ocean in a drop.

4. Creation of the World : There are several instances of the description of the creation of the world in the Upanishads. It tells that Brahman (the Absolute) created the world. Prior to the creation of the world, Brahman was present in its own Self. Then Brahman decided to express Himself in various forms. In this manner, began the creation of the world.

5. Belief in Karma Theory : The Upanishads believed in the Karma Theory. According to this, each person had to pay for his deeds (Karmas). The fruits of the deeds of the previous birth would have to be borne during the present birth. The fruits of the deeds of this birth would be borne in the next birth. The joys and sufferings of our lives depend upon our own deeds. Hence we should always indulge in good deeds and keep a distance from evil deeds. It is due to one’s ill deeds that a man gets separated from the Parmatman and continues to be a part of the vicious circle of transmigration.

6. Moral Virtues : The Upanishads have greatly emphasised on moral virtues. It is only when one adopts the moral virtues then he can swim across the ocean of this life. These virtues are :

  • Always speak the truth.
  • Love all beings.
  • Think of others’ misery as one’s own.
  • Keep distance from pride, greed and evil thinking,
  • Do not indulge in stealing or robbing,
  • Obey the tenets of religion.
  • Do not show laxity towards the study of the Vedas, education, deities and forefathers,
  • Be sincere towards social welfare,
  • Respect your guru.

7. Maya : The Upanishads have thrown ample light on the principle of Maya. The world and its elements have been referred to as Maya. Ignorant men run after the attractive elements of this world. To acquire them, they do not hesitate to use even the worst meAnswer:Maya veils one’s intelligence and renders man to be trapped in the cycle of transmigration. An intelligent man understands the mystery of Maya and so does not fall a prey to this vicious Maya. Only such persons attain salvation (Moksha).

8. Moksha : The attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Through Karma, a man is subjected to the sufferings of transmigration. The Atman inside the body is the partner to all joys and sufferings. Till the time, the Atman is trapped in the body, it cannot free itself of joys and sufferings. Ignorance is the prime cause of all bonds of man. When this ignorance is destroyed, man is freed from all bonds and he attains salvation.

Moksha is the last step of ladder of man’s knowledge upon reaching there, he achieves all. Nothing supersedes the joy of attaining Moksha. According to the Upanishads, Moksha can be attained only through knowledge. The famous historian Dr. S.N. Sen has aptly remarked, “The Upanishads are rich in deep philosophical content and are the bed¬rock on which all the latter philosophical development rests.”

Question 3.
Explain the meaning and nature of Self and the Absolute.
Or
What is the relationship between Self and the Absolute? Explain.
Answer:
A detailed information in context of the Self and Brahman has been given in the Upanishads. What is the Self? What is meant by Brahman? What is the form of these two and what is the relationship between these two, a brief description in this context is given as follows :

(A) Nature of Self
The word Self has been used quite often in the Upanishads because they are considered to be a storehouse of complete knowledge. Self is the omnipresent living element. This element is the basic foundation of all elements (both materialistic and non-materialistic). It takes the form of a living being and resides in all hearts. It is Brahman or the Absolute. For this reason, Self is called the flame of all flames. The form of Self has been described in the Upanishads in the following manner :

1. Self is Certain Being: According to the Upanishads, the Self is the only thing which cannot be put to doubt. Self is a certain being. It does not need to be proved because it is self evident. It is considered to be a basis of all materialistic and non- materialistic elements. No experience is without the Self being involved in it, but it does not experience. It is the witness to all experiences.

2. Self is Permanent: Self is permanent. It is not transitory. It is the basis of all temporary things. Hence, it cannot be changed. It is beyond all psychological actions
and hence it is not affected by worldly changes. In fact, it is the creator of all changes but lives in its past. Hence one cannot deny the permanence of Self.

3. The Doctrine of Five Layers : To understand the form of Self, the Taittiriya Upanishad gives the Doctrine of the Five Layers. These five layers are :

  • Annamayi Kosh : It is a non-living and lifeless element. It comes at a materialistic level.
  • Pranmayi Kosh : It comes at a living level. It includes all flora and fauna.
  • Manomayi Kosh : It comes at a stage of consciousness. It is the objective of life.
  • Vigyanmayi Kosh : It is at a level of self consciouness. In it consciousness develops logical intellect.
  • Anandmayi Kosh : It is the true level of the Self. It destroys the spirit of diversity and differentiation.

The first four layers become a part of this pleasure (Anand) which is the last stage of their development. Hence the Doctrine of Five Layers proves that the Self is pure, living form of pleasure.

4. The Four Stages : The Mandukya Upanishad tries to explain the four stages of Self on the basis of consciousness. These four stages are :

  • The Stage of Wakefulness : In this stage the heart experiences pleasure from things of the world with the help of his senses.
  • The Stage of Dreams : In this stage consciousness presents several pictures (reflections) in itself.
  • The Stage of beep Sleep : It is the stage of deep sleep. The pleasure experienced in this stage is not real.
  • The Turiya Stage : It is a religious state. All ignorance gets destroyed here. The state of pleasure that the Self attains at this stage is indescribable.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

(B) Nature of the Absolute:

The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element ‘Briha’ in Sanskrit language which means to grow, increase and sprout. It can thus give a philosophical conclusion that Brahman is that element that has created this visual world. Brahman is considered-: to be a form of a person and nature is considered to be a form of power. His powers are unlimited because he Himself is without boundation. He is considered to be omnipotent and the source of all fight.

He is Nirguna (Attributeless) despite being the basis of all forms. He is the storehouse of all knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, He is the root cause and basis of the entire universe. A brief description of the form of the Absolute is as follows :

1. Absolute is Qualified Essence: The Upanishads have referred to the sages as the form of the Absolute at several places. The Mundaka Upanishad talks about the form of the Absolute as being present everywhere south-north, west-east, above the sky and below the earth. The Absolute is the universe. Brihadaranyaka Upanishad states that initially there was the Absolute alone but when he attained form, it became omnipresent.

The Chhandogya Upanishad says that the Brahman reaches everyone through all actions, all desires, all fragrances and all tastes. In short, it implies that Absolute is all in one.

2. Absolute is Attributeless Essence : The Upanishads refer to the Absolute as the attributeless essence. It has no form, colour, shape etc. For this reason it can neither be seen nor can it be understood. The Mundaka Upanishad says that the Brahman is neither visible, nor receivable and without clan, eyes, ears, hands and feet etc. Shankar says that the Brahman is the cause of all the universe but it cannot be converted into it. It is the basis of all changes. Since the Absolute is nondescriptive, it has been described using the words ‘Neti, Neti’ (no end, no end).

3. Absolute is the Cause of World : The Upanishads call the Absolute as the cause of the world. According to the Taittiriya Upanishad, it is Brahman which leads to the creation of all things and because of which they continue to be in existence and in the end they become a part of it. The Chhandogya Upanishad calls the Absolute as ‘Tajlan’ which means that which originates from the Absolute, lives with the help of its support and in the end becomes an inseparable part of it. It implies that the Absolute gave an expression to this world and its origin and end is caused by the Absolute.

4. Absolute is the Source of Light: The Upanishads consider the Absolute as the source of light. The sun, moon, stars etc. give light as parts of the light of the Absolute. The light of the Absolute should not be considered to be a form of the materialistic light because the materialistic light can be seen with the eyes but the light of the Absolute can be seen only through the power of Yoga. The spiritual light of the Absolute is present in all the things of this worl’d.

5. Absolute is Existence : The Absolute is considered to be of existence according to the Upanishads. In philosophy, Absolute means existence. The Absolute is the basis of all existence. Wherever there is existence, it is because of the Absolute. The Absolute is not dependent on anything for its existence but it is considered to be the foundation of the existence of all creatures and elements. Consequently, the Absolute is considered to be the form of all truth.

6. Absolute is Bliss : The Absolute is called a bliss in the Upanishads. What is worth remembering here is that this bliss is not like the other pleasures of the world. It is limitless and endless like the sea of pleasure. It is due to the bliss of the Absolute that all creatures are bom in this universe. It is the cause of life of all creatures. Each creation experiences this pleasure on the basis of one’s potential. In the end, all the creatures get immersed in this pleasure. There is no end to this pleasure of the Absolute because it is the form of complete bliss.

Identity of Self and the Absolute:

The sages in the Upanishads have made no distinction between the Self and the Absolute. They considered it as one basic element. For this reason, they often use the terms Self and the Absolute interchangeably. The distinction is merely that of words but there is no distinction of meaning or element. The basic element of this world is only one. It is sometimes called Self and sometimes called the Absolute. Just as a river meets the sea and becomes a part of it, similarly the Self becomes a part of the Absolute. Because the form of Self and the Absolute is one, hence, they cannot be distinguished. In brief, looking for the ocean in one drop or one drop in the ocean is what the Upanishadic philosophy is all about.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 4.
Give a brief account of the main teachings of Bhagvadgita.
Or
Explain the basic teachings of Bhagvadgita.
Or
Discuss in detail the Karamayoga.
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita is a part of the Mahabharata. It is more popularly known by the name Gita. There are 18 chapters and 700 shlokas (verses) in it. The sermon of Gita was given by Lord Krishna to Aijuna before the battle of Mahabharata began. The ideology imparted by Gita was usually beyond the comprehension of the common man. The ideas of Gita have a magical impact on the common people. It is for this reason, that the Gita is dear to all the Hindus even today. Ramanuja (1017—1137) wrote a commentary on Bhagvadgita and interpreted its teachings.

It has been translated into many languages of the world. Its most popular English translation have been done by Edwin Arnold under the title, The Song Celestial. A brief description of the main teachings of the Gita is as follows :

1. God : The Gita calls the Parmatman (God) as the creator of all world. He is one. He is omnipotent and present in all creatures and objects. He is the creator, preserver and destroyer of all creatures. God is the basis of all knowledge, truth, joy, sorrow, violence, non-violence, courage, happiness, fame and disrespect etc. The tenth chapter of the Gita says, “I am the initiator of everything. Everything is borne out of me. Knowing this, the intelligent men with full devotion worship me.” God is immortal. He is free from the bonds of birth and death. He is the greatest of all.

2. Atman : According to the Gita, the body is not the Atman (soul). The circle of birth and death is related to the body and not the Atman. The Soul is the indestructible element. The water, wind, weapons etc. have no impact on the Atman. Neither does it bom, nor does it die. Just as a man removes his old and tattered clothes to wear new ones, similarly the Atman discards old bodies to enter into new ones.

3. Karamayoga : Karamayoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and work selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and work to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayogi (Karma which does not desire of any fruits), the rest are all full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be a Karamayogi. According to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by the person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit. It is an inevitable principle. The fruits of one’s deeds lead one into the vicious circle of transmigration.

He bears the sufferings of fruit of the deeds of the previous birth and through new deeds, gathers the fruits of this birth to move on to the next birth. As a consequence of his deeds, man attains several stages of life, the highest being the Parampad which is his highest goal. Only through Karamayoga man can attain Parampad.

4. Bhaktiyoga : Bhaktiyoga is counted among the three main paths of the Gita. Bhakti is of several types :

  • Prapti Bhakti : It is a kind of bhakti in which the devotee comes with a pious heart in the shelter of God and gets detached from the materialistic elements,
  • Swarth Bhakti : Most of the bhakti in this world is purposeful. The reason for this is that some people resort to bhakti after they are hassled by troubles and they want to get rid of them,
  • Jnana Bhakti: Such bhagats deeply study the Shastras to fulfil their desire of knowledge and by God’s grace are able to attain true knowledge,
  • Nirguna Bhakti : This is a kind of bhakti in which God is considered omnipresent in all forms and thus he serves all the creatures.
  • Saguna Bhakti : In this kind of bhakti, the devotee with a pure heart pays devotion to the idol of his god.
  • Kirtan Bhakti : In this bhakti, the devotee constantly indulges in Kirtan in the name of God.
  • Shravana Bhakti : This type of bhakti is for the less educated. For this reason, they cannot deeply study the Shastras. Consequently, they listen to the sermons of Shastras from the others and tread on the path of bhakti. All these forms of bhakti are considered as a source of Mukti (salvation).

5. Jnanayoga : According to the Bhagvadgita, the fire of knowledge reduces all the bonds of Karma to ashes. For this reason, there is no purer a thing than knowledge in this world. This knowledge is not limited to the knowledge of ordinary elements. It actually means pure knowledge of the Soul. This is called Jnanayoga. Of Karmayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga, Jnanayoga receives prominence because without the knowledge of the Soul, a man can neither be a true Karamayogi nor can he be a true devotee.

After attaining human form, the creature who is not able to attain the knowledge of the Soul can never attain freedom from the bondage of cycle of Karma. Knowledge is the best way to attain salvation because knowledge sets the seed of Karma on fire and a burnt seed cannot give rebirth to a plant.

Question 5.
What do you know about the three paths shown in the Bhagwadgita for the benefit of mankind?
Or
Which are the three Yogas mentioned in the Bhagvadgita? Discuss.
Or
How many Yogas are referred to in the Bhagvadgita? Discuss in detail.
Or
Which are three Yogas mentioned in the Bhagvadgita? Discuss Bhaktiyoga.
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita or the Gita is one of the sacred texts of the Hindus. It gives a simple solution in clear words to all the problems of human life. The Gita does not suggest any one way of life for the attainment of salvation. It says that if every man’s behaviour is different from the other, then there ought to be different ways of reaching one’s ultimate goal. There are three ways of doing this Karamayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga. A man chooses his own path of life according to his nature and interest.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

1. Karamayoga : Karamayoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and work selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and work to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayogi (Karma which does not desire of any fruits), the rest are all full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be a Karamayogi. According to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by the person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit. It is an inevitable principle. The fruits of one’s deeds lead one into the vicious circle of transmigration.

He bears the sufferings of fruit of the deeds of the previous birth and through new deeds, gathers the fruits of this birth to move on to the next birth. As a consequence of his deeds, man attains several stages of life, the highest being the Parampad which is his highest goal. Only through Karamayoga man can attain Parampad.

2. Bhaktiyoga : Bhaktiyoga is counted among the three main paths of the Gita. Bhakti is of several types :

  • Prapti Bhakti : It is a kind of bhakti in which the devotee comes with a pious heart in the shelter of God and gets detached from the materialistic elements,
  • Swarth Bhakti : Most of the bhakti in this world is purposeful. The reason for this is that some people resort to bhakti after they are hassled by troubles and they want to get rid of them,
  • Jnana Bhakti: Such bhagats deeply study the Shastras to fulfil their desire of knowledge and by God’s grace are able to attain true knowledge,
  • Nirguna Bhakti : This is a kind of bhakti in which God is considered omnipresent in all forms and thus he serves all the creatures.
  • Saguna Bhakti : In this kind of bhakti, the devotee with a pure heart pays devotion to the idol of his god.
  • Kirtan Bhakti : In this bhakti, the devotee constantly indulges in Kirtan in the name of God.
  • Shravana Bhakti : This type of bhakti is for the less educated. For this reason, they cannot deeply study the Shastras. Consequently, they listen to the sermons of Shastras from the others and tread on the path of bhakti. All these forms of bhakti are considered as a source of Mukti (salvation).

3. Jnanayoga : According to the Bhagvadgita, the fire of knowledge reduces all the bonds of Karma to ashes. For this reason, there is no purer a thing than knowledge in this world. This knowledge is not limited to the knowledge of ordinary elements. It actually means pure knowledge of the Soul. This is called Jnanayoga. Of Karmayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga, Jnanayoga receives prominence because without the knowledge of the Soul, a man can neither be a true Karamayogi nor can he be a true devotee.

After attaining human form, the creature who is not able to attain the knowledge of the Soul can never attain freedom from the bondage of cycle of Karma. Knowledge is the best way to attain salvation because knowledge sets the seed of Karma on fire and a burnt seed cannot give rebirth to a plant.

Question 6.
What do you know about Nishkama Karma of Bhagvadgita?
Answer:

Karamayoga : Karamayoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and work selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and work to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayogi (Karma which does not desire of any fruits), the rest are all full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be a Karamayogi. According to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by the person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit. It is an inevitable principle. The fruits of one’s deeds lead one into the vicious circle of transmigration.

He bears the sufferings of fruit of the deeds of the previous birth and through new deeds, gathers the fruits of this birth to move on to the next birth. As a consequence of his deeds, man attains several stages of life, the highest being the Parampad which is his highest goal. Only through Karamayoga man can attain Parampad.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 7.
Who gave the lesson contained in the Bhagvadgita and to whom? Of the three Yogas in the Gita, write about the Bhakti Yoga.
Answer:
The preachings given in the Bhagvadgita were given by Lord Krishna to Aijuna.

Bhaktiyoga : Bhaktiyoga is counted among the three main paths of the Gita. Bhakti is of several types :

  • Prapti Bhakti : It is a kind of bhakti in which the devotee comes with a pious heart in the shelter of God and gets detached from the materialistic elements,
  • Swarth Bhakti : Most of the bhakti in this world is purposeful. The reason for this is that some people resort to bhakti after they are hassled by troubles and they want to get rid of them,
  • Jnana Bhakti: Such bhagats deeply study the Shastras to fulfil their desire of knowledge and by God’s grace are able to attain true knowledge,
  • Nirguna Bhakti : This is a kind of bhakti in which God is considered omnipresent in all forms and thus he serves all the creatures.
  • Saguna Bhakti : In this kind of bhakti, the devotee with a pure heart pays devotion to the idol of his god.
  • Kirtan Bhakti : In this bhakti, the devotee constantly indulges in Kirtan in the name of God.
  • Shravana Bhakti : This type of bhakti is for the less educated. For this reason, they cannot deeply study the Shastras. Consequently, they listen to the sermons of Shastras from the others and tread on the path of bhakti. All these forms of bhakti are considered as a source of Mukti (salvation).

Question 8.
What do you mean by Dharma Shastras? Write a note on the main Dharma Shastras.
Or
Which subjects have been touched in Dharma Shastras? Explain.
Or
What is Dharma Shastra? Explain any one of the Dharma Shastra.
Or
What is Shastra? Give brief description of any Hindu Scripture (Shastra).
Or
Write a brief note on Hindu Scriptures (Shastras).
Or
Describe the main features of Shastras.
Or
Explain the importance of Dharma Shastras.
Or
Describe Dharma Shastras.
Answer:
The Dharma Shastras Eire ancient texts of the Hindus. These are also called Smritis. Of these Dharma Shastras, the most famous are Manu’s Dharma Shastra or Manu Smriti. Besides this, the Smritis composed by Yajnavalkaya, Vishnu and Narda are also important. The historians disagree on the period of the composition of the Dharma Shastras. The common view is that they were created between 1st B.C. and Ith B.C. These Dharma Shastras are composed in Sanskrit. In these, the Vishnu Sihriti is composed in prose whereas the rest of the three Dharma Shastras are written in the form of a poem.

These Dharma Shastras render light on the religious, social, political and economic regulations of ancient India explicitly. Consequently, these Dharma Shastras are a valuable source for us to know about the condition of the people of that time. A brief description of the main Dharma Shastras is as follows :

1. Manu Smriti : Manu Smriti is also known by the name Manu Samhita. It was composed by Manu. Manu is considered as the world’s first law giver. In his compositions, he has given important information about the origin of Dharma and its sources. It clearly defines the roles of the Brahmans, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras. The Brahmanas occupied the highest position in society whereas the Shudras were considered the lowest. In it, human life is divided into four ashramas i.e. Brahmacharya, Grihastha, Vanaprastha and Sanyasa and the associated responsibilities and importance is also described in it.

In it, Manu has also described the rules that the kings should follow. According to this, the king should appoint a Council of Ministers to run the administration of the state. The king should least interfere in the local administration. Manu believed that we should respect and serve our parents, teachers and elders.

If they are angry with usr we should not lose our temper. Because we can never repay them for what they have done for us. A person who disrespects them should be fined with 100 pana. According to Manu, women should not be given the right to study the Vedas or the right to property. Their ideas should never be trusted. They should not be given freedom. He was in favour of early marriage. He opposed widow remarriage and Niyoga practices.

According to Manu, people should lead a simple and pious life. According to him, wicked and evil doers have to face several difficulties in hell. He was strictly against gambling. According to him, the government should fix the prices of goods. Besides these subjects, Manu has also given information about Yoga, Meditation, Transmigration and Moksha in his composition.

2. Yajnavalkya Smriti : Though Yajnavalkya Smriti is brief as compared to Manu Smriti but it is important in several aspects. The description in it is bound by principles and the language is lucid. It is considered to be composed between 100 B.C. and 300 B.C. Yajnavalkya Smriti is divided into three chapters. The first chapter deals with the values right from conception to marriage, the duties of a wife, the rights and duties of the four Vamas, the rules of charity, the rules for observing shradhas and the fruits of observing them, the appropriate qualities of a ruler and his ministers, judicial system and the penance for criminals and the tax system explicitly.

The second chapter gives the difference between Dharma Shastra and Artha Shastra. Rights to property, the rules relating to slavery, gambling, theft, rape, border disputes . are given in great details. The third chapter renders light on the last rites, period of sorrow, means of attaining purity, Atman, path to Moksha, evil doers, yogis, means to attain knowledge of the Atman, hell, objectives of remorse, killing of creatures etc.

The Yajnavalkya Smriti and Manu Smriti differ on certain issues. Manu on one hand has allowed a Brahmana to marry the daughter of a Shudra, on the other hand Yajnavalkya opposed it. Manu has criticised Niyoga whereas Yajnavalkya was in favour of it. Manu believed that the widows should have no right over property whereas Yajnavalkya was completely in favour of it. Manu was strictly against gambling whereas Yajnavalkya did not consider it bad. He was in favour of bringing it under the control of the government to obtain revenue. Yajnavalkya has provided important and useful information about biology and medical science in his Smriti.

3. Vishnu Smriti : This Smriti was composed between 100 A.D. and 300 A.D. It was written in the form of prose. In it some shlokas have been taken from Manu and Yajnavalkya’s Smritis. In Vishnu Smriti, the Aryan region has been described more explicitly than Manu Smriti. It covers almost the whole of India. It proves that during the period when Vishnu Smriti was composed, the Aryans had spread in the whole of India. The rulers were the focus of administration.

To expand their empires and protect their subjects was their prime duty. A Council of Ministers was appointed to help the king to run the administration efficiently, The ministers were appointed primarily on the basis of their abilities and loyalty towards the state. The smallest unit of administration was called Gram (village). To give fair justice to the subjects was the prime responsibility of the ruler. Vishnu Smriti gives a detailed description of the types of crimes and the punishments awarded for them.

The Manu Smriti describes that due to their highest position in society there should be no tax imposed on the Brahmans but the Vishnu Smriti favoured it. Vishnu Smriti was against gambling and considered it as a blot on society. It believed in the Varna system and Ashrama system prevalent in society. The Shudras too could become ascetics whereas according to the Manu Smriti they could not attain Sanyasa. During this period, the situation of women worsened.

This can be guaged from the fact that the Sati system began during this period. Vishnu Smriti emphasises on the fact that people should lead simple and pious life. They should not even speak to the crooked people. Vishnu Smriti also describes the coins namely yava, masha, swama, nishak, kishnal etc. It proves that trade at that time was not only conducted through the barter system but also by coins.

4. Narda Smriti : This Smriti was composed between 100. A.D. and 400 A.D. This Smriti has some shlokas from the Manu Smriti but it has its own qualities. The king appointed spies to keep him informed of the incidents of the kingdom. Kul, Shreni and Gana were institutions for social welfare. These institutions made their own policies and rules. The king interfered less in the internal affairs of these institutions. The Narda Smriti gives a detailed account of the judicial process of the state. The king was considered as the supreme justice of the state. His decisions were final.

If a thief was not caught, the king had to give an amount equivalent to the value of things lost from his treasury. Anyone who sheltered the thief or bought the stolen goods was considered equally guilty and deserved a punishment. Different punishments were awarded for different crimes. To be proved innocent, one had to go through seven tests which have been described in it.

Narda was in favour of bringing gambling under government control so that the government could earn some income from it. He was not in favour of a widow being given the property of her husband. He supported widow-remarriage and Niyoga traditions. He described the 15 kinds of slaves prevalent in society. Their duty was to serve the main three castes. They had no right to own property.

There was a system of partnership in business and the profit or loss was to be distributed proportionately among the partners. Narda has described the coins called dinar, pana and swama. He laid down some rules for the learning of students and artisAnswer:They had to go to the workshops of their masters to learn work. They could not leave their masters before the prescribed period of learning or else they were heavily penalised.

It is clear from the above mentioned description that the Dharma Shastras render great light on the various laws and traditions and customs. They are very important from historical point of view. Dr. R.C. Majumdar has aptly remarked, “The Dharma Shastras, also called Smritis, have played a very important part in Hindu life during the last two thousand years. Although the Vedas are regarded as the ultimate sources of dharma, in practice it is the Smriti works to which the Hindus all over India turn for the real exposition of religious duties and usages. They are also regarded as the only authentic sources of Hindu law and social customs.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 9.
What is meant by Manu Smriti? What subjects have been discussed in it?
Or
What do you know about Manu Smriti? Explain.
Answer:
The Manu Smriti is counted^irst amongst the few in the Dharma Shastras. It is also called the Manava Dharma Shastra. It was composed between 200 B.G. and 200 A.D. There are 27,000 shlokas in it and there are 12 chapters in it. It is written in Sanskrit in poem form. Manu is considered to be the first law giver to the world. In his creation, Manu has thrown ample light on the religious, social, political and economic regulations of India, during the contemporary era. A brief description of these regulations is as given below :

1. Four Sources of Dharma : The biggest contribution of Manu towards Indian heritage is his information about the four sources of Dharma. According to him, Vedas are the first source of Dharma. They give the basic element to all the religions of the world. The second source is Smriti. Smriti implies all those things that are written on the basis of one’s memory power. Smriti is different from Shruti. Shruti includes those things which are directly heard from the Absolute.

Dharma Shastras come under Smriti and the Vedas come under Shruti. A person who obeys the laws given in the Shruti and Smriti, attains fame in one’s lifetime and becomes the recepient of extreme pleasure in the next birth. The third source is the recognised customs and traditions but they should be based on good behaviour. The fourth source is that which is followded by the Self but that too should be based on good behaviour.

2. Administrative Laws : The Manu Smriti renders a great significance to the role of the king. He was the chief of the state. He was considered to be a form of God. His main duty was to protect Dharma and his subjects. It was essential for his subjects to follow his orders. The king was absolute. He used to form a Council of Ministers comprising 7 or 8 ministers with the objective of running the administration properly. Mukhyamatya was the head of this council and he was usually a Brahmana.

It explicitly describes the capabilities of the ministers and their duties, rules of battle, taxes imposed by the king over his subjects. Manu was not in favour of imposing taxes on the Brahmanas. Even the handicapped were not taxed. For administrative convenience, every kingdom was divided into several administrative units. The smallest administrative unit was Gram (village) which was headed by the Gramini. The king hardly interfered in the local administration.

3. Judicial Administration : Manu contributed commendably towards the field of law. He was the first person who distinguished between the civil and criminal laws. He considered it to be the first duty of the king to give fair justice. The ruler established several courts in his kingdom. The Kul, Shreni and Gana were also given the right to establish their own courts. If not satisfied by the decision of the court, any appellant could plead before the ruler. Manu has described 18 types of crimes like default in repayment of loan, breach of trust, breaking one’s promise, stealth, robbery, defamation, succession relation, extra marital affairs, non-payment of dues, border disputes etc.

Different punishments have been fixed for different crimes. Manu was not in favour of awarding death sentence to the Brahmanas. To make the criminals commit their crimes, they were even made to go through a fire test or a water test. In brief, there was no branch of the modem law system that remained untouched by Manu.

4. Varna System : Manu was in favour of the*prevalent Varna system. According to him, the Brahmanas were bom out of the mouth of the Absolute, the Kshatryias emerged from his arms, the Vaishyas from the stomach and the Shudras from his feet. The Brahmanas had the highest position in society. Their main work was to study the Vedas and help others to study them, to perform yajnas for the benefit of others, giving and taking donations, to act as the judge and the chief advisor of the ruler. They were expected to lead a pious and simple life. The main work of the Kshatriyas was to protect people.

Besides this they had been asked to study the Vedas, perform yajnas and give gifts. The primary works of a Vaishya were trade- commerce, agriculture and cattle rearing. They too could study the Vedas. The work of the Shudras was to serve the above mentioned three castes selflessly. They were not allowed to study the Vedas.

5. The Four Ashramas : Considering human life span to be approximately of 100 years, Manu has divided it into 4 Ashramas of 25 years each. They were Brahmacharya Ashrama, Grihastha ashrama, Vanaprastha Ashrama and Sanyasa Ashrama. All these Ashramas were fixed for the above mentioned three castes. The first ashrma was Brahmacharya. In it a child attained knowledge from the age of 5 years to the age of 25 years. Grihastha Ashrama was from 25 to 50 years. In it man marries in order to
have children. He took complete responsibility of their rearing.

It was esssential for every family to have a son. Vanaprastha Asharma was from 50 to 75 years. In it a man left his home and went to the forest to lead the life of an ascetic. The fourth and the last ashrama was Sanyasa. It was from 75 to 100 years. In it a man lived like a Sanyasi and tried to attain salvation.

6. Views about Women: Manu was not in favour of giving independence to women. He was of the view that a woman should be taken care of by her father when unmarried, by her husband when married and by her sons if her husband dies. He said that women put men on the wrong path. He was not in favour of believing what women said. Manu had favoured child marriage. He said that women should get married between the age of 8 to 12 years. Manu opposed widow remarriage and the system of Niyoga.

According to Niyoga system, a widow could marry her brother-in-law to produce a son. Manu was not in favour of giving property rights to women. She could only obtain ‘Istree Dhan’ which she got with herself as dowry. Despite all the restrictions that were placed on women, Manu respected women greatly in the form of a housewife. He said, “God resides where women are respected, and if women are not respected, religious rites are futile”.

7. Some Other Views : Manu has advised people to lead a holy and pious life. He said that an evil person always lives in suffering. He considered liars as the greatest thieves. Such evil doers go straight to hell. He said that parents, teachers and elders should always be respected. Whoever does not do so, should be punished. Manu has also thrown light on the rules pertaining to commercial trade. In the words of A.A. MacDonell,“No work has enjoyed so great a reputation and authority, throughout India for centuries as the Manava Dharmashastra, also called the Manu Smriti.”

Question 10.
Write short notes on any two of the following :

  1. Puranas
  2. Upanishads
  3. Shastras.

Answer:
The Puranas are the ancient texts of the Hindus. The Purana means ancient. They have been written in Sanskrit. No definite period is given for their writing. These are not a creation of single century. They are described in the Atharvaveda, Upanishads and epics. There have been made changes in them from time to time and new chapters were added to them. The Puranas were given their final touch in the Gupta period. Hence the Puranas have been written by several writers.

The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda and the Shudras were given the permission to read them. The total number of Purans are 18. These Puranas have been divided into three parts. There Eire 6 PurEihas in each part and they Eire called Shiva, Vaishnava, and Brahman Pur ana.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

These parts are as follows :

1. Shiva Purana :

  • Vayu
  • Linga
  • Skanda
  • Agni
  • Matsya
  • Kurma.

2. Vaishnava Purana :

  • Vishnu
  • Bhagvata
  • Narada
  • Garuda
  • Padma.

3. Brahman Purana :

  • Brahman
  • Brahmand
  • Brahmavaivrata
  • Markandeya
  • Bhavishya and
  • Vamana.

The prevalent Vedic and Non-Vedic religious beliefs, myths and stories are compiled in the Puranas. Myths are those stories that have no proof, but they Eire very popular. Each Purana is divided into five parts. These parts are :

  1. Search: It describes about the creation of the world.
  2. Pratisarga: It gives a description about the development, destruction and recreation of the world.
  3. Vansh: It gives a description of the lineage of the famous kings and Rishis.
  4. Manzanar: It gives a description of the great battles fought on this earth and the important event in each of them.
  5. Vanshanucharita: It gives a description of the kings of great lineage and the feats of the Rishis.

What is worth remembering here is that we do not have the original Puranas with us. What we have with us today as the Puranas, may not necessarily have the. descriptions as per the above divisions. A brief description of the Puranas is as follows :

1. The Brahman Purana: It is also called the Adi Purana. It has 14,000 shlokas in it. Most of it describes the pilgramage places of India. Besides this, it also gives a description of Krishana, Rama, Surya, famous royal families, earth, hell,’ various castes and about Varna Ashrama system.

2. The Padma Purana: This is the biggest Purana. It has almost 55,000 shlokas in it. It describes the Srishti Khand, Bhumi KhEind, Swarga Khand and Pataal Khand. It gives a detailed description of the Vishnu Katha and Rama Katha. Besides these, this Purana also describes about the holy places and fasts. Several stories pertaining to myths Eire Eilso recorded in it.

3. The Vishnu Purana: This Purana has 23,000 shlokas in it.*It says that Vishnu is the supreme god. He alone has created the world and protects it. Famous among the stories given in it are the stories of Prahlad and Dhruva. It also describes the strange things about this world and the people of heaven. It gives a description of several famous lineages. In the fifth and last part, the various miraculous deeds of Krishna have been discussed.

4. The Vayu Purana : This Purana has 11,000 shlokas in it. It describes several stories associated with the glory of Shiva. For this reason, it is also called the Shiva Pursina. It describes several lineages. It has great historical importance because it is based on facts. It also gives the geographical description which is quite useful.

5. The Bhagvata Purana : Most popular among the Puranas associated with Lord Vishnu is the Bhagavata Purana. It gives a description of several stories associated with the life of Lord Krishna. It also says that Lord Buddha and the founder of Sankhya philosophy, Kapil are incarnations of Vishnu. This Purana is not very important from historical point of view.

6. The Narada Purana : This Purana consists of 25,000 shlokas. This Purana is related to the worship of Vishnu. It gives a detailed description of the prevalent education in ancient India. It does not give a description of the lineages.

7. The Markandeya Purana : There are 900 shlokas in this Purana. It gives a detailed description of the Vedic gods Indra, Surya and Agni etc. It also gives a description of several famous lineages.

8. The Agni Purana : This Purana has 15,400 shlokas. According to a belief, this Purana was narrated to Rishi Vashisht by Agni god himself. This Purana is associated with Shaivism. It throws ample light on several important subjects like war tactics, methods to perform the yajans, astrology, geography, law, grammar, medicine, fasts, donation, marriage etc. Undoubtedly, this Purana is like an encyclopaedia.

9. The Bhavishya Purana : This Purana has 14,000 shlokas in it. There are several stories related to the gods Brahma, Vishnu, Shiva and Surya. It also describes several ancient royal families and sages. Besides these, it also discusses several rituals which were performed at that time.

10. The Brahmavaivarta Purana : This Purana has 18,000 shlokas in it. This Purana tells Brahman as the creator of this universe. It gives a detailed description of Lord Krishna’s life. It also describes about Radha. In it, Ganesha has been called is an incarnation of Krishna.

11. The Linga Purana : This Purana has 11,000’shlokas in it. This Purana is associated with Shaivism. It describes about the incarnations of Shiva, fasts and holy places. It preaches to worship the linga as a form of Shiva.

12. The Varaha Purana: It has 10,700 shlokas in it. It giyes a detailed description of the worship of Vishnu in the incarnation of Varaha. It also gives a description related to Shiva, Durga and Ganesha.

13. The Skanda Purana : It was a large Purana. It describes 51,000 shlokas in it. This Purana is not available now. Information about it can be gathered from examples cited in the other texts. This Purana mainly describes about the worship of Shiva. Besides this, it gives useful information about the several holy places and temples of India.

14. The Vamana Purana : There are 10,000 shlokas in this Purana. Most of this Purana describes about the worship of gods like Shiva, Vishnu and Ganesha etc. It also describes several mythical stories.

15. The Kurina Purana : There are 18,000 shlokas in this Purana. It describes the worship of the Kurma incarnation of Vishnu. It gives a description of several mythical stories.

16. The Matsya Purana: It has 14,000 shlokas in it. This Purana is a conversation between a matsya (fish) and Manu. When this world was destroyed then this fish saved man. It gives a detailed description of several famous royal families. Besides these, there is a description of several fairs and pilgrimages.

17. The Garura Purana : There are 18,000 shlokas in this Parana. There is a description of the methods involved in the worhship of Vishnu. It gives important information about the yajnas, astrology, grammar, social science, physical education and ghosts and spirits. It gives detailed information about the last rites, sati system and pitra shradhs.

18. The Brahmanda Parana : There are 12,000 shlokas in this Pur ana. This Purana was read by Brahman. It gives a description about several dynasties and pilgramages. Importance of the Pur anas The Puranas present a detailed picture of the ancient Indian culture. The customs and traditions prevalent in Hinduism today are a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas throw ample light on the religious beliefs of the Hindus, the methods of worship of the gods and goddesses, fasts, shradhs, birth, marriage and rites performed at the time of death.

Idol worship and belief in incarnation is also a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas popularized the tradition of worship of forefathers further. People were inspired to donate. The description of the popular dynasties given in the Puranas proved to be quite useful historically.

The description of the pilgramages and temples gives us important infbrmation about the contemporary art. Besides these, the Puranas throw ample light on the social, economic and political condition of ancient India. Undoubtedly, it would be no exaggeration if the Puranas are called the encyclopaedia of Indian culture. Dr. R.C. Hazra has aptly remarked, “The Puranas have played a very important part in the life of the Hindus for more than two thousand years.

They have brought home to the common man the wisdom of the saints of the highest order without creating any discord. The authors of these works took every individual into consideration and made such prescriptions as would benefit him in.his social and religious life.”

The Upanishads are considered as the true origin of Indian philosophy. Upanishads are those texts which incorporate in them the spiritual knowledge of the „ world of highest order just as pearls are held together in a string. The lustre o’f these pearls helps to eradicate the inner darkness of a person and, he is illuminated to such an extent that it outshines the light of the even sun. It would be no exaggeration to say that the Upanishads are the prime source of Indian philosophy. The word Upanishad is made from a combination of three words. The word ‘Up’ means near, ‘Ni’ means devotion and ‘Shad’ means to sit. Thus the word Upanishad’ means sitting beside with complete devotion.

In fact, Upanishad is such knowledge which a guru gives to his students secretly. The Upanishads are also called Vedanta because they are considered to be consequential part of the Vedas. Vedanta means the last knowledge. This means that there is no knowledge beyond or after Upanishads. The Upanishads were composed by different sages between 1000 B.C. and 300 B.C. The total number of all Upanishads is 108. Upanishads like Isha, Kena, Prashna, Mundaka, Taittiriya, Aitareya, Chhandogya, Brihadaranyaka Shvetashvatara, Kaushitaki and Katha are considered the most important. The main teachings of the Upanishads are as follows :

1. Nature of Self : The word Self has been frequently used in the Upanishads because it is considered as the ultimate source of all knowledge. Self is the omnipresent living element. This element forms the basic foundation of all elements. This assumes a living form and resides in the hearts of all people. This is Brahman or the Atman (Absolute). For this reason, the Self is considered as the source of all light. According to the Upanishads, the Self is the only element about which there is no doubt. The Self is the determined strength. It is not transitory. It itself forms the basis of all transitory elements. For this reason, it is unchanging itself.

2. Nature of the Absolute : The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element of Sanskrit language called ‘Briha’ which means to grow or to proceed. From philosophical point of view, Brahman is an element which led to the creation of the visible world. Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boundless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights. Despite being the basis of all virtues it is called Nirguna. He is the source of complete knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, he is the basic cause and foundation of the entire world.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

3. Identity of Self and the Absolute : The sages have considered the Self and Brahman as a single entity in the Upanishads. They were considered as one basic element. For this reason, in the Upanishads, the words Self and the Absolute are used interchangeably at- several places. The distinction is only in words but not in meaning or element. There is only one primary element. He is sometimes called Self and sometimes called the Absolute. Just as a river joins the sea, so does the Self sublime with the Parmatman. Because the Self and the Absolute are one, therefore they cannot be differentiated. In brief, the Upanishadic philosophy looks like an ocean in a drop.

4. Creation of the World : There are several instances of the description of the creation of the world in the Upanishads. It tells that Brahman (the Absolute) created the world. Prior to the creation of the world, Brahman was present in its own Self. Then Brahman decided to express Himself in various forms. In this manner, began the creation of the world.

5. Belief in Karma Theory : The Upanishads believed in the Karma Theory. According to this, each person had to pay for his deeds (Karmas). The fruits of the deeds of the previous birth would have to be borne during the present birth. The fruits of the deeds of this birth would be borne in the next birth. The joys and sufferings of our lives depend upon our own deeds. Hence we should always indulge in good deeds and keep a distance from evil deeds. It is due to one’s ill deeds that a man gets separated from the Parmatman and continues to be a part of the vicious circle of transmigration.

6. Moral Virtues : The Upanishads have greatly emphasised on moral virtues. It is only when one adopts the moral virtues then he can swim across the ocean of this life. These virtues are :

  • Always speak the truth.
  • Love all beings.
  • Think of others’ misery as one’s own.
  • Keep distance from pride, greed and evil thinking,
  • Do not indulge in stealing or robbing,
  • Obey the tenets of religion.
  • Do not show laxity towards the study of the Vedas, education, deities and forefathers,
  • Be sincere towards social welfare,
  • Respect your guru.

7. Maya : The Upanishads have thrown ample light on the principle of Maya. The world and its elements have been referred to as Maya. Ignorant men run after the attractive elements of this world. To acquire them, they do not hesitate to use even the worst meAnswer:Maya veils one’s intelligence and renders man to be trapped in the cycle of transmigration. An intelligent man understands the mystery of Maya and so does not fall a prey to this vicious Maya. Only such persons attain salvation (Moksha).

8. Moksha : The attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Through Karma, a man is subjected to the sufferings of transmigration. The Atman inside the body is the partner to all joys and sufferings. Till the time, the Atman is trapped in the body, it cannot free itself of joys and sufferings. Ignorance is the prime cause of all bonds of man. When this ignorance is destroyed, man is freed from all bonds and he attains salvation.

Moksha is the last step of ladder of man’s knowledge upon reaching there, he achieves all. Nothing supersedes the joy of attaining Moksha. According to the Upanishads, Moksha can be attained only through knowledge. The famous historian Dr. S.N. Sen has aptly remarked, “The Upanishads are rich in deep philosophical content and are the bed¬rock on which all the latter philosophical development rests.”

The Dharma Shastras Eire ancient texts of the Hindus. These are also called Smritis. Of these Dharma Shastras, the most famous are Manu’s Dharma Shastra or Manu Smriti. Besides this, the Smritis composed by Yajnavalkaya, Vishnu and Narda are also important. The historians disagree on the period of the composition of the Dharma Shastras. The common view is that they were created between 1st B.C. and Ith B.C. These Dharma Shastras are composed in Sanskrit. In these, the Vishnu Sihriti is composed in prose whereas the rest of the three Dharma Shastras are written in the form of a poem.

These Dharma Shastras render light on the religious, social, political and economic regulations of ancient India explicitly. Consequently, these Dharma Shastras are a valuable source for us to know about the condition of the people of that time. A brief description of the main Dharma Shastras is as follows :

1. Manu Smriti : Manu Smriti is also known by the name Manu Samhita. It was composed by Manu. Manu is considered as the world’s first law giver. In his compositions, he has given important information about the origin of Dharma and its sources. It clearly defines the roles of the Brahmans, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras. The Brahmanas occupied the highest position in society whereas the Shudras were considered the lowest. In it, human life is divided into four ashramas i.e. Brahmacharya, Grihastha, Vanaprastha and Sanyasa and the associated responsibilities and importance is also described in it.

In it, Manu has also described the rules that the kings should follow. According to this, the king should appoint a Council of Ministers to run the administration of the state. The king should least interfere in the local administration. Manu believed that we should respect and serve our parents, teachers and elders.

If they are angry with usr we should not lose our temper. Because we can never repay them for what they have done for us. A person who disrespects them should be fined with 100 pana. According to Manu, women should not be given the right to study the Vedas or the right to property. Their ideas should never be trusted. They should not be given freedom. He was in favour of early marriage. He opposed widow remarriage and Niyoga practices.

According to Manu, people should lead a simple and pious life. According to him, wicked and evil doers have to face several difficulties in hell. He was strictly against gambling. According to him, the government should fix the prices of goods. Besides these subjects, Manu has also given information about Yoga, Meditation, Transmigration and Moksha in his composition.

2. Yajnavalkya Smriti : Though Yajnavalkya Smriti is brief as compared to Manu Smriti but it is important in several aspects. The description in it is bound by principles and the language is lucid. It is considered to be composed between 100 B.C. and 300 B.C. Yajnavalkya Smriti is divided into three chapters. The first chapter deals with the values right from conception to marriage, the duties of a wife, the rights and duties of the four Vamas, the rules of charity, the rules for observing shradhas and the fruits of observing them, the appropriate qualities of a ruler and his ministers, judicial system and the penance for criminals and the tax system explicitly.

The second chapter gives the difference between Dharma Shastra and Artha Shastra. Rights to property, the rules relating to slavery, gambling, theft, rape, border disputes . are given in great details. The third chapter renders light on the last rites, period of sorrow, means of attaining purity, Atman, path to Moksha, evil doers, yogis, means to attain knowledge of the Atman, hell, objectives of remorse, killing of creatures etc.

The Yajnavalkya Smriti and Manu Smriti differ on certain issues. Manu on one hand has allowed a Brahmana to marry the daughter of a Shudra, on the other hand Yajnavalkya opposed it. Manu has criticised Niyoga whereas Yajnavalkya was in favour of it. Manu believed that the widows should have no right over property whereas Yajnavalkya was completely in favour of it. Manu was strictly against gambling whereas Yajnavalkya did not consider it bad. He was in favour of bringing it under the control of the government to obtain revenue. Yajnavalkya has provided important and useful information about biology and medical science in his Smriti.

3. Vishnu Smriti : This Smriti was composed between 100 A.D. and 300 A.D. It was written in the form of prose. In it some shlokas have been taken from Manu and Yajnavalkya’s Smritis. In Vishnu Smriti, the Aryan region has been described more explicitly than Manu Smriti. It covers almost the whole of India. It proves that during the period when Vishnu Smriti was composed, the Aryans had spread in the whole of India. The rulers were the focus of administration.

To expand their empires and protect their subjects was their prime duty. A Council of Ministers was appointed to help the king to run the administration efficiently, The ministers were appointed primarily on the basis of their abilities and loyalty towards the state. The smallest unit of administration was called Gram (village). To give fair justice to the subjects was the prime responsibility of the ruler. Vishnu Smriti gives a detailed description of the types of crimes and the punishments awarded for them.

The Manu Smriti describes that due to their highest position in society there should be no tax imposed on the Brahmans but the Vishnu Smriti favoured it. Vishnu Smriti was against gambling and considered it as a blot on society. It believed in the Varna system and Ashrama system prevalent in society. The Shudras too could become ascetics whereas according to the Manu Smriti they could not attain Sanyasa. During this period, the situation of women worsened.

This can be guaged from the fact that the Sati system began during this period. Vishnu Smriti emphasises on the fact that people should lead simple and pious life. They should not even speak to the crooked people. Vishnu Smriti also describes the coins namely yava, masha, swama, nishak, kishnal etc. It proves that trade at that time was not only conducted through the barter system but also by coins.

4. Narda Smriti : This Smriti was composed between 100. A.D. and 400 A.D. This Smriti has some shlokas from the Manu Smriti but it has its own qualities. The king appointed spies to keep him informed of the incidents of the kingdom. Kul, Shreni and Gana were institutions for social welfare. These institutions made their own policies and rules. The king interfered less in the internal affairs of these institutions. The Narda Smriti gives a detailed account of the judicial process of the state. The king was considered as the supreme justice of the state. His decisions were final.

If a thief was not caught, the king had to give an amount equivalent to the value of things lost from his treasury. Anyone who sheltered the thief or bought the stolen goods was considered equally guilty and deserved a punishment. Different punishments were awarded for different crimes. To be proved innocent, one had to go through seven tests which have been described in it.

Narda was in favour of bringing gambling under government control so that the government could earn some income from it. He was not in favour of a widow being given the property of her husband. He supported widow-remarriage and Niyoga traditions. He described the 15 kinds of slaves prevalent in society. Their duty was to serve the main three castes. They had no right to own property.

There was a system of partnership in business and the profit or loss was to be distributed proportionately among the partners. Narda has described the coins called dinar, pana and swama. He laid down some rules for the learning of students and artisAnswer:They had to go to the workshops of their masters to learn work. They could not leave their masters before the prescribed period of learning or else they were heavily penalised.

It is clear from the above mentioned description that the Dharma Shastras render great light on the various laws and traditions and customs. They are very important from historical point of view. Dr. R.C. Majumdar has aptly remarked, “The Dharma Shastras, also called Smritis, have played a very important part in Hindu life during the last two thousand years. Although the Vedas are regarded as the ultimate sources of dharma, in practice it is the Smriti works to which the Hindus all over India turn for the real exposition of religious duties and usages. They are also regarded as the only authentic sources of Hindu law and social customs.”

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Short Answer Type Questions (Type 1):

Question 1.
Describe the salient features of Puranas Literature in brief but meaningful.
Or
What is meant by Puranas?
Answer:
The Puranas are the ancient texts of the Hindus. The Purana means ancient, ’hey have been written in Sanskrit. There have been made changes in them from me to time and new chapters were added to them. Hence the Puranas have been itten by several writers. The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda and the Shudras re given the permission to read them. The total number of Purans are 18. These Puranas have been divided into three parts. There are six Puranas in each part and they are called Shiva, Vaishnava and Brahman Purana.

Question 2.
What is discussed in the Puranas?
Answer:
The prevalent Vedic and Non-Vedic religious beliefs, myths and stories are compiled in the Puranas. Each Purana is divided into five parts. These parts are :

  • Sarga : It describes about the creation of the world.
  • Pratisarga : It gives a description about the development, destruction and recreation of the world.
  • Vansh : It gives a description of the lineage of the famous kings and Rishis.
  • Manvantar : It gives a description of the great battles fought on this earth and the important event in each of them.
  • Vanshanucharita : It gives a description of the kings of great lineage and the feats of the Rishis.

Question 3.
Describe in brief but meaningfully the two popular Puranas.
Answer:

  • The Brahman furana : It is also called the Adi Purana. It has 14,000 shlokas in it. Most of it describes the pilgrimage places of India. Besides this, it also gives a description of Krishna, Rama, Surya, famous royal families, earth, hell, various castes, Varna Ashrama system and about Shradhs.
  • The Padma Purana : This is the biggest Purana. It has almost 55,000 shlokas in it. It describes the Srishti Khand, Bhumi Khand, Swarga Khand and Pataal Khand. It gives a detailed description of the Vishnu Katha and Rama Katha. Besides these, this Purana also describes about the holy places and fasts.

Question 4.
Describe the importance of Puranas Literature.
Answer:
The Puranas present a detailed picture of the ancient Indian culture. The customs and traditions prevalent in Hinduism today are a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas throw ample light on the religious beliefs of the Hindus, the methods of worship of the gods and goddesses, fasts, shradhas, birth, marriage and rites performed at the time of death. Idol worship and belief in incarnation is also a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas popularized the tradition of worship of forefathers further. People were inspired to donate. The description of the popular dynasties given in the Puranas proved to be quite useful historically.

Question 5.
What do you mean by the Upanishads?
Answer:
The Upanishads are those texts which describe knowledge. They are 108 in number and they were composed by different hermits between 550 B.C. to 100 B.C. These throw light on the indepth spiritual subjects. These try to tell what soul is and what is its relation to the Supreme Soul. They have tried to solve severa mysteries pertaining to life and death.

Question 6.
What is the nature of Self and Absolute according to the Upanishads?
Answer:

  • Nature of Self: The word Self has been frequently used in the Upanisha because it is considered as the ultimate source of all knowledge. Self is the omniorese living element. This element forms the basic foundation of all elements. This assumes a living form and resides in the hearts of all people.
  • Nature of the Absolute : The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element of Sanskrit language called ‘Briha’ which means to grow or to proceed. From philosophical point of view, Brahman is an element which led to the creation of the visible world. Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boundless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights.

Question 7.
According to Upanishads ‘Brahma’ is formless. Elucidate.
Or
According to Upanishads Brahma is the creator of Universe. Discuss.
Answer:
Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boundless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights. Despite being the basis of all virtues it is called Nirguna. He is the source of complete knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, he is the basic cause and foundation of the entire world.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 8.
What is meant by Moksha according to the Upanishads?
Answer:
According to the Upanishads, the attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Through Karma, a man is subjected to the sufferings of transmigration. The Atman inside the body is the partner to all joys and” sufferings. Till the time, the Atman is trapped in the body, it cannot free itself of joys and sufferings. Ignorance is the prime cause of all bonds of man. When this ignorance is destroyed, man is freed from all bonds and he attains salvation. –

Question 9.
Write a short note on Bhagvadgita.
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita is one of the sacred texts of the Hindus. The Bhagvadgita is a part of the Mahabharata. It is more popularly known by the name Gita. There are 18 chapters and 700 shlokas in it. The sermon of Gita was given by Lord Krishna to Arjuna before the battle of Mahabharata began. The ideas of Gita have a magical impact on the common people. It is for this reason, that the Gita is dear to all the Hindus even today. It gives a simple solution in clear words to all the problems of human life.

Question 10.
Write a short note on the Karmayoga.
Answer:
Karamyoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and works selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and works to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayoga (Karma which does not desire of my fruits), the rest are all full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be a laramayogi. Acce ding to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by e person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit.

Question 11.
What do you mean by Jnanayoga?
Answer:
According to the Bhagvadgita, the fire of knowledge reduces all the bonds of Karma to ashes. For this reason, there is no purer a thing than knowledge in this world. This knowledge is not limited to the knowledge of ordinary elements. It actually means pure knowledge of the Soul. This is called Jnanayoga. Knowledge is the best way to attain salvation because knowledge sets the seed of Karma on fire and a burnt seed cannot give rebirth to a plant.

Question 12.
What are the Dharma Shastras?
Answer:
The Dharma Shastras are ancient texts of the Hindus. Of these Dharma Shastras, the most famous are Manu’s Dharma Shastra or Manu Smriti. Besides this, the Smritis composed by Yajnavalkaya, Vishnu and Narda are also important. These Dharma Shastras are composed in Sanskrit.

Short Answer Type Questions (Type-2):

Question 1.
Describe the salient features of Puranas Literature in brief but meaningful.
Or
What is meant by Puranas?
Answer:
The Puranas are the ancient texts of the Hindus. The Pur ana means ancient. They have been written in Sanskrit. No definite period is given for their writing. These are not a creation of any single century. They are described in the Atharvaveda, Upanishads and epics. There have been made changes in them from time to time and new chapters were added to them. The Puranas were given their final touch in the Gupta period. Hence the Puranas have been written by several writers. The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda and the Shudras were given the permission to read them. The total number of Purans are 18. These Puranas have been divided into three parts. There are six Puranas in each part and they are called Shiva, Vaishnava and Brahman Purana.

These parts are as follows :

(1) Shiva Purana :

  • Vayu
  • Linga
  • Skanda
  • Agni
  • Matsya
  • Kurina.

(2) Vaishnava Purana :

  • Vishnu
  • Bhagvata
  • Narada
  • Garura
  • Padma.

(3) Brahman Purana :

  • Brahman
  • Brahmand
  • Brahmavaivrata
  • Markandeya
  • Bhavishya
  • Vamana.

Question 2.
What is discussed in the Puranas?
Answer:
The prevalent Vedic and Non-Vedic religious beliefs, myths and stories are compiled in the Puranas. Myths are those stories of which there is no proof, but they are very popular. Each Purana is divided into five parts. These parts are :

  • Sarga : It describes’ about the creation of the world.
  • Pratisarga : It gives a description about the development, destruction and recreation of the world.
  • Vansh : It gives a description of the lineage of the famous kings and Rishis.
  • Manvantar : It gives a description of the great battles fought on this earth and the important event in each of them.
  • Vanshanucharita : It gives a description of the kings of great lineage and the feats of the Rishis.

What is worth remembering here is that we do not have the original Puranas with us. What we have with us today as the Puranas, may not necessarily have the descriptions as per the above divisions.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 3.
Give a brief account of any five Puranas.
Answer:
(1) The Brahman Purana : It is also called the Adi Purana. It has 14,000 shlokas in it. Most of it describes the pilgrimage places of India. Besides this, it also gives a description of Krishna, Rama, Surya, famous royal families, earth, hell, various castes, Varna Ashrama system and about Shradhs.

(2) The Padma Purana : This is the biggest Purana. It has almost 55,000 shlokas in it. It describes the Srishti Khand, Bhumi Khand, Swarga Khand and Pataal Khand. It gives a detailed description of the Vishnu Katha and Rama Katha. Besides these, this Purana also describes about the holy places and fasts.

(3) The Vishnu Purana : This Purana has 23,000 shlokas in it. It says that Vishnu is the supreme god. He alone has created the world and protects it. It also describes the strange things about this world and the people of heaven. It gives a description of several famous lineages.

(4) The Vayu Purana : This Purana has 11,000 shlokas in it. It describes several stories associated with the glory of Shiva. For this reason, it is also called the Shiva Purana. It describes several lineages. It has great historical importance.

(5) The Bhagvata Purana : Most popular among the Puranas associated with Lord Vishnu is the Bhagavata Purana. It gives a description of several stories associated with the life of Lord Krishna.

Question 4.
Describe the importance of Puranas Literature.
Or
What are the main features of Puranas literature?
Or
Puranas are very important in Hinduisim. Discuss.
Answer:
The Puranas present a detailed picture of the ancient Indian culture. The customs and traditions prevalent in Hinduism today are a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas throw ample light on the religious beliefs of the Hindus, the methods of worship of the gods and goddesses, fasts, shradhas, birth, marriage and rites performed at the time of death. Idol worship and belief in incarnation is also a gift of the Puranas. These Puranas popularized the tradition of worship of forefathers further. People were inspired to donate.

The description of the popular dynasties given in the Purana?’ proved to be quite useful historically. The description of the pilgrimages and temples gives us important information about the contemporary art. Besides these, the Puranas throw ample light on the social, economic and political condition of ancient India. Undoubtedly, it would be no exaggeration if the Puranas are called the encyclopaedia of Indian culture.

Question 5.
What do you mean by the Upanishads?
Or
Describe the name of five Upanishads and their importance.
Or
Give informations about Upanishads literature.
Answer:
The Upanishads are those texts which describe knowledge. Since they are the last part of the Vedas, they are also called the Vedanta. They are 108 in number and they were composed by different hermits between 1000-500 B.C. These throw light on the indepth spiritual subjects. These try to tell what soul is and what is its relation to the Supreme Soul. They have tried to solve several mysteries pertaining to life and death. They throw ample light on subjects like Karma, Moksha, Maya and Transmigration. Dr. S.R. Goyal has rightly said, “The Upanishadic philosophy is rightly regarded as the source of all Indian Philosophy.”

Question 6.
What is the nature of Self and Absolute according to the Upanishads?
Answer:
1. Nature of Self: The word Self has been frequently used in the Upanishads because it is considered as the ultimate source of all knowledge. Self is the omnipresent living element. This element forms the basic foundation of all elements. This assumes a living form and resides in the hearts of all people. This is Brahman or the Parmatman
Or
According to Upanishads Brahma is the creator of Universe. Discuss.
Answer:
The word ‘Brahman’ is derived from an element of Sanskrit language called ‘Briha’ which means to grow or to proceed. From philosophical point of view, Brahman is an element which led to the creation of the visible world. Brahman is considered as an epitome of the power of man and nature. He is the master of unlimited powers because he himself is boufidless. He is all pervading and the light of all lights. Despite being the basis of all virtues it is called Nirguna. He is the source of complete knowledge. It is impossible to describe his knowledge in words. Undoubtedly, he is the basic Cause and foundation of the entire world.

Question 8.
What do you know about the Doctrine of Five Layers?
Answer:
To understand the form of Self, the Taittiriya Upanishad gives the Doctrine of the Five Layers. These five layers are :

  1. Annamayi Kosh : It is a non-living and lifeless element. It comes at a materialistic level.
  2. Pranmayi Kosh : It comes at a living level. It includes all flora and fauna.
  3. Manomayi Kosh : It comes at a stage of consciousness. It is the objective of life.
  4. Vigyanmayi Kosh : It is at a level of self consciousness. In it consciousness develops logical intellect.
  5. Anandmayi Kosh : It is the true level of the Self. It destroys the spirit of diversity and differentiation.

The first four layers become a part of this pleasure (Anand) which is the last stage of their development. Hence the Doctrine of Five Layers proves that the Self is pure, living form of pleasure.

Question 9.
What is meant by Moksha according to the Upanishads?
Answer:
According to the Upanishads, the attainment of Moksha is the prime objective of a man’s life. Through Karma, a man is subjected to the sufferings of transmigration. The Atman inside the body is the partner to all joys and sufferings. Till the time, the Atman is trapped in the body, it cannot free itself of joys and sufferings. Ignorance is the prime cause of all bonds of man. When this ignorance is destroyed, man is freed from all bonds and he attains salvation. Moksha is the last step of ladder of man’s knowledge. Upon reaching there he achieves all. Nothing supersedes the joy of attaining Moksha. According to the Upanishads, Moksha can be attained only through knowledge.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 10.
Write a short note on Bhagvadgita.
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita is one of the sacred texts of the Hindus. The Bhagvadgita is a part of the Mahabharata. It is more poularly known by the name Gita. There are 18 chapters and 700 shlokas in it.

The sermon of Gita was given by Lord Krishna to Arjuna before the battle of Mahabharata began. The ideology imparted by Gita was usually beyond the comprehension of the common man. The ideas of Gita have a magical impact on the common people. It is for this reason, that the Gita is dear to all the Hindus even today. It gives a simple solution in clear words to all the problems of human life. The Gita does not suggest any one way of life for the attainment of salvation.

It says that if every man’s behaviour is different from the other, then there ought to be different ways of reaching one’s ultimate goal. There are three ways of doing this : Karamayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga. A man chooses his own path of life according to this nature and interest.

Question 11.
Write a short note on the Karmayoga.
Answer:
Karamyoga is a famous principle of the Gita. No creature can spend a single moment without Karma. A person who is able to control his senses and works selflessly is called Karamayogi and those persons who fall a victim to their senses and works to show off are called hypocrite. Except Karamayoga .(Karma which does not desire if any fruits), the rest are all, full of bonds. Hence, the Gita inspires a man to be ,a Karamayogi. According to the Gita, every Karma bears fruit which has to be borne by the person. It is never possible that a person performs an action and escapes its fruit.

It is an inevitable principle. The fruits of one’s deeds lead one into the vicious circle of transmigration. He bears the sufferings of fruit of the deeds of the previous birth and through new deeds, gathers the fruits of this birth to move on to the next birth. As a consequence of his deeds, man attains several stages of life, the highest being the Parampad which is his highest goal. Only the Karamyoga can help man attain Parampad.

Question 12.
Give a brief account of the Bhaktiyoga.
Answer:
Bhaktiyoga is counted among the three main paths of the Gita. Bhakti is of several types :

(1) Prapti Bhakti : It is a kind of bhakti in which the devotee comes with a pious heart in the shelter of God and gets detached from the materialistic elements,

(2) Swarth Bhakti : Most of the bhakti in this world is purposeful. The reason for this is that some people resort to bhakti after they are hassled by troubles and they want to get rid of them.

(3) Jnana Bhakti: Such bhagats deeply study the Shastras to fulfil their desire of knowledge and by God’s grace are able to attain true knowledge.

(4) Nirguna Bhakti: This is a kind of bhakti in which God is considered omnipresent in all forms and thus. He serves all the creatures,

(5) Saguna Bhakti: In this kind of bhakti, the devotee with a pure heart pays devotion to the idol of his god.

(6) Kirtan Bhakti : In this bhakti, the devotee constantly indulges in Kirtan in the name of God.

(7) Shravana Bhakti: This type of bhakti is for the less educated. For this reason, they cannot deeply study the Shastras. Consequently, they listen to the sermons of Shastras from the others and tread on the path of bhakti. All these forms of bhakti are considered as a source of Mukti (salvation).

Question 13.
What do you mean by Jnanayoga?
Answer:
According to the Bhagvadgita, the fire of knowledge reduces all the bonds of Karma to ashes. For this reason, there is no purer a thing than knowledge in this world. This knowledge is not limited to the knowledge of ordinary elements. It actually means pure knowledge of the Soul. This is called Jnanayoga. Of Karmayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga, Jnanayoga receives prominence because without the knowledge of the Soul, a man can neither be a true Karamayogi nor can he be a true devotee.

After attaining human form, the creature who is not able to attain the knowledge of the Soul can never attain freedom from the bondage of cycle of Karma. Knowledge is the best way to attain salvation because knowledge sets the seed of Karma on fire and a burnt seed cannot give rebirth to a plant.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 14.
Describe in brief but meaningful the salient features of Dharma Shastras.
Or
What are the Dharma Shastras?
Or
Describe Dharma Shastras.
Or
Describe the importance of Shastra literature.
Answer:
The Dharma Shastras are ancient texts of the Hindus. These are also called Smritis. Of these Dharma Shastras, the most famous are Manu’s Dharma Shastra or Manu Smriti. Besides this, the Smritis composed by Yajnavalkaya, Vishnu and Narda are also important. The historians disagree on the period of the composition of the Dharma Shastras. The common view is that they were created between 1st B.C. and 5th B.C. These Dharma Shastras are composed in Sanskrit.

In these, the Vishnu Smriti is composed in prose whereas the rest of the three Dharma Shastras are written in the form of a poem. These Dharma Shastras render light on the religious, social, political and economic regulations of ancient India explicitly. Consequently, these Dharma Shastras are a valuable source for us to know about the condition of the people of that time.

Question 15.
Write a short note on the Manu Smriti.
Or
Give information about Manu Smriti.
Answer:
Manu Smriti is also known by the name Manu Samhita. It was composed by Manu. Manu is considered as the world’s first law giver. In his compositions, he has given important information about the origin of Dharma and its sources. It clearly defines the roles of the Brahmanas, Kshatriyas, Vaishyas and Shudras. The Brahmanas occupied the highest position in society whereas the Shudras were considered the lowest. In it, human life is divided into four ashramas i.e. Brahmacharya, Grihastha, Vanaprastha and Sanyasa and the associated responsibilities and importance is also described in it.

In it, Manu has also described the rules that the kings should follow. According to this, the king should appoint a Council of Ministers to run the administration of the state. The king should least interfere in the local administration. Manu believed that we should respect and serve our parents, teachers and elders. If they are angry with us, we should not lose our temper. Because we can never repay them for what they have done for us. According to Manu, women should not be given the right to study the Vadas or the right to property.

Question 16.
What do you mean by the Four Ashramas?
Answer:
Considering human life span to be approximately 100 years, Manu has divided it into four Ashramas of 25 years each. They were Brahmacharya Ashrama, Grihastha ashrama, Vanaprastha Ashrama and Sanyasa Ashrama. All these Ashramas were fixed for the above mentioned three castes. The first ashrma was Brahmacharya. In it a child attained knowledge from the age of 5 years to the age of 25 years. Grihastha Ashrama was from 25 to 50 years.

In it man indulged in marriage to produce children. He took complete responsibility of their rearing. It was essential for every family to have a son. Vanaprastha Asharma was from 50 to 75 years. In it a man left his home and went to the forest to lead the life of an ascetic. The fourth and the last ashrama was Sanyasa. It was from 75 to 100 years. In it a man lived like a Sanyasi and tried to attain salvation.

Question 17.
What views are given about women in’Manu Smriti?
Answer:
Manu was not in favour of giving independence to women. He was of the view that a woman should be taken care of by her father when unmarried, by her husband when married and by her sons once her husband dies. ‘He said that women put men on the wrong path. He was not in favour of believing what women said. Manu had favoured child marriage. He said that women should get married between the age 8 to 12 years. Manu opposed widow remarriage and the system of Niyoga. According to Niyoga system, a widow could marry her brother-in-law to produce a son.

Manu was not in favour of giving property rights to women. She could only obtain Tstree Dhan’ which she got with herself as dowry. Despite all the restrictions that were placed on women, Manu respected women greatly in the form of a housewife. He said, “God resides where women are respected, where women are not respected, religious rites are futile”.

Question 18.
What do you know about Yajnavalkya Smriti?
Answer:
Though Yajnavalkya Smriti is brief as compared to Manu Smriti but it is important in several aspects. The description in it is bound by principal and the language is lucid. It is considered to be composed between 100 B.C. and 300 B.C. Yajnavalkya Smriti is divided into three chapters. The first chapter deals with the values right from conception to marriage, the duties of a wife, the rights and duties of the four Varnas, the rules of charity, the rules for observing shradhas and the fruits of observing them, the appropriate qualities of a ruler and his ministers, judicial system and the penance for criminals and the tax system explicitly.

The second chapter gives the difference between Dharma Shastra and Artha Shastra, rights to property, the rules relating slavery, gambling, theft, rape, border disputes in great details. The third chapter renders light on the last rites, period of sorrow, means of attaining purity, Soul, path to Moksha, evil doers, yogis, means to attain knowledge of the Soul, hell, objectives of remorse, killing of creatures etc.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 19.
Write a short note on the Vishnu Smriti.
Answer:
The Vishnu Smriti was composed between 100 A.D. and 300 A.D. It was written in the form of prose. In it some shalokas have been taken from Manu and Yajnavalkya’s Smritis. In Vishnu Smriti, the Aryan region has been described more explicitly than Manu Smriti. It covers almost the whole of India. It proves that during the period when Vishnu Smriti was composed, the Aryans had spread in the whole of India. The rulers were the focus of administration. To expand their empires and to protect their subjects was their prime duty. A Council of Ministers were appointed to help the king to run the administration efficiently. The ministers were appointed primarily on the basis of their abilities and loyalty towards the state.

The smallest unit of administration was called Gram (village). To give fair justice to the subjects was a prime responsibility of the ruler. Vishnu Smriti gives a detailed description of the types of crimes and the punishments awarded for them. Vishnu Smriti was against gambling and considered it as a blot on society. It believed in the Varna system and Ashrama system prevalent in sociey. During this period, the situation of women worsened. This can be guaged from the fact that the Sati system began during this period.

Question 20.
What do you know about the Narda Smriti?
Answer:
This Smriti was composed between 100 A.D„,and 400 A.D. This Smriti has some shlokas from the Manu Smriti but it has its own qualities. The king appointed spies to keep him informed of the incidents of the kingdom. Kul, Shreni and Gana were institutions for social welfare. These institutions made their own policies and rules. The king interfered less in the internal affairs of these institutions. The Narda Smriti gives a detailed account of the judicial process of the state. The king was considered as the supreme justice of the state. His decisions were final.

If a thief was not caught, the king had to give an amount equivalent to the value of things lost from his treasury. Anyone who sheltered the thief or bought the stolen goods was considered equally guilty and deserved a punishment. Different punishments were awarded for different crimes. To be proved innocent, one had to go through seven tests which have been described in it. Narda was in favour of bringing gambling under government control so that the government could earn some income from it. He was not in favour of a widow being given the property of her husband. He supported widow-remarriage and Niyoga traditions. He described the 15 kinds of slaves prevalent in society.

Answer in One Word to One Sentence:

Question 1.
What is meant by the Puranas?
Answer:
The Puranas mean ancient/the oldest.

Question 2.
In which language were the Puranas written?
Answer:
Sanskrit.

Question 3.
Which is known as the fifth Veda?
Answer:
Puranas.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 4.
How many Puranas are there?
Or
Give the total number of Puranas.
Answer:
18.

Question 5.
In how many groups the Puranas have been classified?
Answer:
The Puranas have been classified in three groups.

Question 6.
Name the three groups of the Puranas.
Answer:

  • Shiva Puranas,
  • Vaishnava Puranas,
  • Brahman Puranas.

Question 7.
Name any two famous Puranas.
Answer:
Shiva Puranas and Vaishnava Purana.

Question 8.
Mention any one Purana included in Shiva Puranas.
Answer:
Linga Purana.

Question 9.
Mention any one Purana included in Vaishnava Puranas.
Answer:
Vishnu Purana.

Question 10.
Mention any one Purana included in Brahama Puranas.
Answer:
Brahmanda Purana.

Question 11.
In how many parts each Purana has been divided?
Answer:
Five parts.

Question 12.
In what part of the Purana the origin of the world has been described?
Answer:
Sarga part.

Question 13.
Which part of the Purana is considered historically important?
Answer:
Fifth part.

Question 14.
Which is the oldest of the Puranas?
Answer:
Brahman Purana.

Question 15.
By what other name the Brahman Purana is known?
Answer:
Adi Purana.

Question 16.
How many shlokas are there in the Brahman Purana?
Answer:
14,000 shlokas.

Question 17.
Which is the largest Purana?
Answer:
Padama Purana.

Question 18.
How many shlokas Padama Purana has?
Answer:
55,000 shlokas.

Question 19.
Of how many shlokas Vishnu Purana contains?
Answer:
23,000 shlokas.

Question 20.
By what other name Vayu Purana is known?
Answer:
Shiva Purana.

Question 21.
Bhagvata Purana is related with which god?
Answer:
Bhagvata Purana is related with Vishnu.

Question 22.
How many shlokas Narada Purana contains?
Answer:
25,000 shlokas.

Question 23.
With which god Narada Purana is associated?
Answer:
Lord Vishnu.

Question 24.
Which Purana has the least number of shlokas’?
Answer:
Markandeya Purana.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 25.
How many shlokas Markandeya Purana contains?
Answer:
900 shlokas.

Question 26.
Name any two gods mentioned in the Markandya Purana?
Answer:

  • Indra,
  • Agni.

Question 27.
With which god Bhavishya Purana is associated?
Answer:

  • Brahman,
  • Vishnu,
  • Shiva,
  • Surya.

Question 28.
How many shlokas does Skanda Purana contain?
Answer:
51,000 shlokas.

Question 29.
With which god Skanda Purana is associated?
Answer:
Lord Shiva.

Question 30.
Between whom the dialogue goes on in Matsaya Purana?
Answer:
There is a dialogue between the Matsaya (Fish) and Manu.

Question 31.
With which god Garura Purana is associated?
Answer:
Lord Vishnu.

Question 32.
Mention any one subject of the Puranas.
Answer:
The origin of the world.

Question 33.
What is meant by Upanishad?
Answer:
To sit close with absolute reverence.

Question 34.
Why are the Upanishads called Vedanta?
Answer:
They are the finale of the Vedas.

Question 35.
In which language the Upanishads are composed?
Answer:
Sanskrit.

Question 36.
When were the Upanishads composed?
Answer:
During 550 to 100 B.C.

Question 37.
What is the total number of Upanishads?
Answer:
108.

Question 38.
Give the nunfber of main Upanishads.
Answer:
The main Upanishads are eleven.

Question 39.
Write the name of famous five Upanishads.
Or
Name any two Upanishads.
Answer:

  • Isha,
  • Kena,
  • Katha,
  • Prasma,
  • Taittiriya.

Question 40.
Mention first two Upanishads.
Answer:

  • Brihadaranyka,
  • Chhandogya.

Question 41.
When were Brihadaranyka and Chhandogya Upanishads composed?
Answer:
During 550 to 450 BC.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 42.
Mention any two subjects of the Upanishads.
Answer:

  • The nature of soul,
  • The principle of Karma.

Question 43.
Is soul impermanent according to the Upanishads?
Answer:
No.

Question 44.
Mention two Upanishadic moral principles.
Answer:

  • Always speak the truth,
  • Love living beings.

Question 45.
What according to the Upanishads is the ultimate aim of life?
Answer:
To attain Moksha.

Question 46.
The Bhagvadgita forms a part of which epic?
Answer:
The Bhagvadgita is a part of Mahabharata.

Question 47.
In which language was the Bhagvadgita composed?
Answer:
It was composed in Sanskrit.

Question 48.
How many shlokas the Bhagvadgita contain?.
Answer:
700 shlokas.

Question 49.
What does Bhagvadgita mean?
Answer:
It means Divine Song.

Question 50.
Who gave the sermon to whom in the Bhagvadgita?
Answer:
Lord Krishna gave sermon to Aijuna.

Question 51.
How many Yogas are mentioned in the Bhagvadgita?
Answer:
Three Yogas have been mentioned in the Bhagvadgita.

Question 52.
What are the three Yogas mentioned in the Gita?
Answer:
They are Karamayoga, Bhaktiyoga and Jnanayoga.

Question 53.
Mention any one of Gita’s sermon.
Answer:
Man has to reap the fruit of his Karma.

Question 54.
How many type of Bhaktis are mentioned in the Bhagvadgita?
Answer:
The Gita mentions seven types of Bhaktis.

Question 55.
Mention any one types of Bhaktis expostulated in the Gita.
Answer:
Jnana Bhakti.

Question 56.
Who translated the Gita into English first of all?
Answer:
Edwin Arnold.

Question 57.
Who wrote commentary on the Gita?
Answer:
Ramanuja wrote commentary on the Gita.

Question 58.
What is meant by Dharma Shastras?
Or
What are the Dharma Shastras?
Answer:
They are the ancient law books of the Hindus.

Question 59.
Mention any one Dharma Shastras.
Answer:
Manu Smriti.

Question 60.
In which language Dharma Shastras were written?
Answer:
Sanskrit.

Question 61.
Which is the oldest Dharma Shastra?
Answer:
Manu Shastra.

Question 62.
Who is said to be the progenitor of mankind?
Answer:
Manu is believed to be the progenitor of mankind.

Question 63.
Who was the author of Manu Smriti?
Answer:
Manu.

Question 64.
By what other name Manu Smriti is known?
Answer:
Manava Dharma Shastra.

Question 65.
Which Dharma Shastra prescribes the duties of four varanas?
Answer:
Manu Smriti.

Question 66.
In how many Ashramas human life has been divided?
Answer:
Four Ashramas.

Question 67.
Mention any one Ashrama.
Answer:
Grihastha Ashrama.

Question 68.
Does Manu,Smriti allow the Shudras to read the Vedas?
Answer:
No.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

Question 69.
How many sources of Dharma Manu Smriti mention?
Answer:
Four.

Question 70.
Mention any one source of Dharma as mentioned by Manu.
Answer:
The Vedas.

Question 71.
Which Dharma Shastra was against gambling?
Answer:
Vishnu Smriti.

Question 72.
Which Dharma Shastra favoured widow marriage.
Answer:
Narda Smriti.

Question 73.
What subjects have been discussed in Dharma Shastras?
Answer:
Rules of conduct and customs.

Fill in the Blanks:

1. The puranas means ……………
Answer:
ancient/the oldest.

2. The Puranas were written in ……………
Answer:
Sanskrit.

3. The Puranas are …………. in number.
Answer:
18.

4. Each Purana has been divided into …………… parts.
Answer:
five.

5. In …………… the origin of the the world has been’ described.
Answer:
Sarga.

6. The …………… gives a description of the lineage of the famous Kings and Rishis.
Answer:
Vanshanucharita.

7. The Brahman Purana is also known as …………….
Answer:
Adi Purana.

8. The biggest Purana was the …………… Purana.
Answer:
Padma.

9. The Vayu Purana is also called the …………… Purana.
Answer:
Shiva.

10. The Narada Purana contains …………….. Shlokas.
Answer:
25000.

11. The Garur Purana consists …………….. Shlokas.
Answer:
18000.

12. The ……………… Purana is the shortest of all the Puranas.
Answer:
Markandeya.

PSEB 12th Class Religion Solutions Chapter 5 General Introduction to Puranas, Upanishads and Shastras

13. The Upanishads are also called …………..
Answer:
The Vedanta.

14. The Upanishads preached the principle of ……………. layers.
Answer:
five.

15. The Bhagvadgita is a part of the …………….
Answer:
Mahabharata.

16. The Bhagvadgita contains ……………. Shlokas.
Answer:
700.

17. Gita’s sermon was given by ……………..
Answer:
Lord Krishana.

18. ………….. Yogas have been mentioned in the Bhagvadgita.
Answer:
Three.

19. The Dharam Shastras were written in ……………..
Answer:
Sanskrit.

20. …………… is believed to be the progenitor of mankind.
Answer:
Manu.

21. Manu Smriti is also known as …………….. Dharam Shastra.
Answer:
Manava.

22. Manu Smriti does ……………… allow giving property rights and reading Vedas facility to women.
Answer:
not.

True Or False:

1. The Puranas were written in Sanskrit language.
Answer:
True

2. The Puranas were called the Fifth Veda.
Answer:
True

3. The Puranas are 10 in number.
Answer:
False

4. The Brahman Purana is the biggest Purana.
Answer:
False

5. The Padma Purana has 55000 shlokas in it.
Answer:
True

6. The Vayu Purana is also known as the Shiva Purana.
Answer:
True

7. The Bhagvata Purana is associated with the glory of Shiva.
Answer:
False

8. The Narada Purana is related to the worship of Vishnu.
Answer:
True

9. The Agni Purana was the shortest among the Puranas.
Answer:
False

10. The Bhavishya Purana has 14,000 shlokas in it.
Answer:
True

11. There are 51,000 shlokas in the Skanda Purana.
Answer:
True

12. The Matsya Purana is conversation between a fish and Manu.
Answer:
True

13. The total number of Upanishads is 108.
Answer:
True

14. The Upanishads were written in Pali language.
Answer:
False

15. The Upanishads give the Doctrine of Five layers.
Answer:
True

16. Bhagvadagita is a part of the Ramayana.
Answer:
False

17. The Bhagvadgita has 18 chapters.
Answer:
True

18. The Sermon of Gita was given by Lord Krishna to Aijuna.
Answer:
True

19. The Bhagvadgita has a belief in four Yogas.
Answer:
False

20. The ancient law texts of Hindus are called the Dharma Shastras.
Answer:
True

21. Manu Smriti was composed by Yajnavalkya.
Answer:
False

22. Manu is considered as the progenitor of mankind.
Answer:
True

23. The Narda Smriti was in favour of the widow’s marriage.
Answer:
True

Multiple Choice Questions:

1. What is the total number of Puranas?
(a) 6
(b) 10
(c) 15
(d) 18
Answer:
(d) 18

2. In which language were the Puranas written?
(a) Hindi
(b) Punjabi
(c) Sanskrit
(d) English
Answer:
(c) Sanskrit

3. In how many groups the Puranas have been classified?
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 6.
Answer:
(a) 3

4. Which of the following is not a Shiva Purana?
(a) The Vayu
(b) The Vishnu
(c) The Skanda
(d) The Linga
Answer:
(b) The Vishnu

5. Which part of the Puranas contains description of the lineage of the famous kings and rishis?
(a) Vansh
(b) Vaushanu Charita
(c) Sarga
(d) Manvantar
Answer:
(a) Vansh

6. Which of the following is the oldest Purana?
(a) The Brahman Purana
(b) The Padma Purana
(c) The Vishnu Purana
(d) The Agni Purana
Answer:
(a) The Brahman Purana

7. Which of the following is the largest Purana?
(a) The Vishnu Purana
(b) The Skanda Purana
(c) The Vamana Purana
(d) The Padma Purana
Answer:
(d) The Padma Purana

8. What is the total number of shlokas in the Padma Purana?
(a) 15,000
(b) 23,000
(c) 51,000
(d) 55,000
Answer:
(d) 55,000

9. Which of the following is the smallest Purana?
(a) The Varana Purana
(b) The Vamana Purana
(c) The Padma Purana
(d) The Markandeya Purana
Answer:
(d) The Markandeya Purana

10. Which of the following Puranas contain the details of last rites?
(a) The Narada Purana
(b) The Vayu Purana
(c) The Garur Purana
(d) The Bhavishya Purana
Answer:
(c) The Garur Purana

11. What is the total number of Upanishads?
(a) 6
(b) 11
(c) 18
(d) 108
Answer:
(d) 108

12. Which of the following is not a Upanishad?
(a) Isha
(b) Kena
(c) Chhandogaya
(d) Skanda
Answer:
(d) Skanda

13. Who gave the sermon in the Bhagvadgita?
(a) Lord Krishna Ji
(b) Aijuna
(c) Lord Rama Ji
(d) Shiva
Answer:
(a) Lord Krishna Ji

14. The Bhagvad Gita is a part of which of the following texts?
(a) rrhe Ramayana
(b) The Mahabharata
(c) The Buddha Charita
(d) The Katha vathu
Answer:
(b) The Mahabharata

15. How many sMokas are there in Bhagvadgita?
(a) 500
(b) 700
(c) 800
(d) 900
Answer:
(b) 700

16. What are the ancient law texts called?
(a) Vedas
(b) Mahabharata
(c) Ramayana
(d) Dharam Shastras
Answer:
(d) Dharam Shastras

17. Which of the following is also known as Manava Dharma Shastra?
(a) Yajnavalkya Smriti
(b) Manu Smriti
(c) Vishnu Smriti
(d) Narada Smriti
Answer:
(b) Manu Smriti

18. Who is called Progenitor of mankind?
(a) Narada
(b) Vishnu
(c) Manu
(d) Yajnavalkya
Answer:
(c) Manu

19. Which of the following Puranas was against the freedom of women?
(a) Manu Smriti
(b) Narda Smriti
(c) Vishnu Smriti
(d) Yajnavalkya Smriti
Answer:
(a) Manu Smriti